HSB 60

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 288

INSTALLATION MANUAL

MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES


Air to Water Heat Pump
Hydrolution (HM)
HSB60/HMK60/FDCW60VNX-A
PT300/RC-HY20/40

HK 200S

English:Original instruction

This heat pump complies with EMC Directive 2004/108/


EC (replaced by 2014/30/EU on 20/4/2016), LV Directive
2006/95/EC (replaced by 2014/35/EU on 20/4/2016).
CE marking is applicable to the area of 50 Hz power supply.

PSC012D085BS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table of Contents

Safety precautions 2 Connection between controller and 3-way valve (QN10/QN12) 40


HSB60 with RC-HY20 40
General information for installer 7 HSB60 with RC-HY40 40
HMK60 with RC-HY20 41
Over view and design 7
HMK60 with RC-HY40 41
Transport and storage 10
Connection between controller and sensors 42
Supplied components 10
RC-HY20 with HSB60 42
Assembly 10
RC-HY20 with HMK60 43
Hanging indoor unit 12
RC-HY40 with HSB60 45
Hanging control unit 12
RC-HY40 with HMK60 46
Dimensioning expansion vessel 13
Optional connections 48
Recommended installation order 13
RC-HY20 48
Room sensor BT50 48
Pipe installation 14 Step controlled additional heat 48
General 14 Connection example with HMK60 49
Installation diagram 14 Relay output for emergency mode 49
HSB60 14 Connection example with HMK60 50
HMK60 15 External circulation pump 50
System requirements 16 AUX inputs/outputs 50
Overflow valve 16 myUpway™ 52
Pump capacity diagram 16 RC-HY40 53
Pressure drop in indoor unit 17 Load monitor 53
Dimensions and pipe connections 17 Room sensor BT50 53
HSB60 17 Step controlled additional heat 53
HMK60 17 Relay output for emergency mode 53
PT300 18 External circulation pump 53
Water circuit 19 AUX inputs/outputs 54
Connection to heating system 19 myUpway™ 55
Connection to hot water heater 19
Housing disassembly of tank unit 19 Commissioning and adjusting 56
Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit 20 Preparation 56
Connecting hot water tank to water main 21 Filling and venting 56
Hot water circulation circuit 22 Hot water tank 56
Connection of external heat source 23 Climate system 56
Refrigerant circuit 23 Inspection of installation 56
Connecting refrigerant pipes 23 Start-up and inspection 57
Piping insulation 23 Before start-up 57
Drain connection 23 Commissioning with heat pump 57
Dockings 24 Commissioning with additional heater only 57
3-way valve operation check 57
Electrical installation 29 AUX function check 57
General 29 Cooling mode 57
Electrical components 30 Cleaning particle filter 57
Accessibility, electrical connection for controller 32 Secondary adjustment 57
Cable lock 34 Start guide 58
Connection 34 Heating/cooling curve setting 59
<HSB60> 34 Hot water circulation setting 60
Power supply 34 SG ready 61
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit 34
Connection between indoor unit and controller 35 Control 62
Cascade connection setting 35 Display unit 62
Recommended fuse size for HSB60 35 Menu system 63
Recommended cable size for HSB60 35 Menu list 66
<HMK60> 35 Menu 1 – Indoor climate 66
Circuit breaker 35 Menu 2 – Hot water 66
Power supply 35 Menu 3 – Info 66
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit 36 Menu 4 – My system 66
Connection between indoor unit and controller 36 Menu 5 – Service 67
Recommended fuse size for HMK60 36
Recommended cable size for HMK60 35 Service 75
<RC-HY20/40> 36
Power supply 36 Disturbances in comfort 78
Connection between controller and indoor unit 37 Manage alarm 78
HSB60 with RC-HY20 37 Troubleshooting 78
HSB60 with RC-HY40 37 Additional heating only 79
HMK60 with RC-HY20 37 Alarm list 80
HMK60 with RC-HY40 37
Connection between controller and circulation pump (GP12) 38 Accessories 83
HSB60 with RC-HY20 38
HSB60 with RC-HY40 38 Technical data 84
HMK60 with RC-HY20 39 Dimensions and setting-out coordinates 84
HMK60 with RC-HY40 39 Electrical circuit diagram 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Safety precautions
When installing the unit, be sure to check shall not play with the appliance. Cleaning
whether the selection of installation and user maintenance shall not be made
place, power supply specifications, by children without supervision.
usage limitation (piping length, height This in accordance to applicable parts of
differences between indoor and outdoor the low voltage directive 2014/35/EU, LVD.
units, power supply voltage and etc.) and This appliance is also intended for use by
installation spaces. experts or trained users in shops, hotels,
 We recommend you to read this light industry, on farms and in similar
“SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully environments. This in accordance to
before installation in order to gain full applicable parts of the machinery directive
advantage of the functions of the unit 2006/42/EC.
and to avoid malfunction due to CE marking is applicable to the area of 50
mishandling. Hz power supply.
 The precautions described below are The emission sound pressure level from
divided into WARNING and CAUTION . each Indoor and Outdoor unit is under 70
The matters with possibilities leading dB(A).
to serious consequences such as
death or serious personal injury due WARNING
to erroneous handling are listed in Installation must be carried out by
the WARNING and the matters with the qualified installer.
possibilities leading to personal injury If you install the system by yourself, it may cause
or damage of the unit due to erroneous serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
handling including probability leading to shocks, fire and personal injury, as a result of a
serious consequences in some cases system malfunction.
are listed in CAUTION . These are very Install the system in full accordance
important precautions for safety. Be with the instruction manual.
sure to observe all of them without fail. Incorrect installation may cause bursts, personal
 Be sure to confirm no anomaly on the injury, water leaks, electric shocks and fire.
equipment by commissioning after Use the original accessories and the
completed installation and explain the specified components for installation.
operating methods as well as the If parts other than those prescribed by us are used,
maintenance methods of this equipment It may cause water leaks, electric shocks, fire and
to the user according to the owner’s personal injury.
manual. When installing in small rooms, take
 Keep the installation manual together prevention measures not to exceed
with owner’s manual at a place where the density limit of refrigerant in the
any user can read at any time. Moreover event of leakage.
if necessary, ask to hand them to a new Consult the expert about prevention measures. If
user. the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the
event of leakage, lack of oxygen can occur, which
This heat pump complies with EMC can cause serious accidents.
Directive 2014/30/EU.
Ventilate the working area well in the
This appliance is designed for use in a
event of refrigerant leakage during
home environment and can be used by
installation.
children aged from 8 years and above and
If the refrigerant comes into contact with naked
persons with reduced physical, sensory or
flames, poisonous gas is produced.
mental capabilities or lack of experience
and knowledge if they have been given After completed installation, check that
supervision or instruction concerning use no refrigerant leaks from the system.
of the appliance in a safe way and If refrigerant leaks into the room and comes into
understand the hazards involved. Children contact with an oven or other hot surface, poisonous
gas is produced.
2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Hang up the unit at the specified points the box. Install the service panel correctly.
with ropes which can support the Incorrect installation may result in overheating
weight in lifting for portage. And to and fire.
avoid jolting out of alignment, be sure to Do not perform brazing work in the
hang up the unit at 4-point support. airtight room.
An improper manner of portage such as 3-point It can cause lack of oxygen.
support can cause death or serious personal injury Use the prescribed pipes, flare nuts
due to falling of the unit. and tools for R410A.
Install the unit in a location with good Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can
support. cause the unit failure and serious accidents due to
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the burst of the refrigerant circuit.
unit to fall and cause material damage and Tighten the flare nut by using double
personal injury. spanners and torque wrench according
Ensure the unit is stable when installed, to prescribed method. Be sure not to
so that it can withstand earthquakes tighten the flare nut too much.
and strong winds. Loose flare connection or damage on the flare part
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the by tightening with excess torque can cause burst
unit to fall and cause material damage and or refrigerant leaks which may result in lack of
personal injury. oxygen.
Ensure that no air enters in the refriger- Do not open the service valves for
ant circuit when the unit is installed liquid line and gas line until completed
and removed. refrigerant piping work, air tightness
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure test and evacuation.
in the refrigerant circuit becomes too high, which If the compressor is operated in state of opening
can cause burst and personal injury. service valves before completed connection of
The electrical installation must be refrigerant piping work, air can be sucked into
carried out by the qualified electrician refrigerant circuit, which can cause bust or
in accordance with “the norm for personal injury due to anomalously high pressure
electrical work” and “national wiring in the refrigerant.
regulation”, and the system must be Do not put the drainage pipe directly into
connected to the dedicated circuit. drainage channels where poisonous
Power supply with insufficient capacity and gases such as sulphide gas can occur.
incorrect function done by improper work can Poisonous gases will flow into the room through
cause electric shocks and fire. drainage pipe and seriously affect the user’s
Be sure to shut off the power before health and safety.
starting electrical work. Only use prescribed optional parts.
Failure to shut off the power can cause electric The installation must be carried out by
shocks, unit failure or incorrect function of the qualified installer.
equipment. If you install the system by yourself, it can cause
Be sure to use the cables conformed serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
to safety standard and cable ampacity shocks, fire.
for power distribution work. Do not run the unit with removed panels
Unconformable cables can cause electric leak, or protections
anomalous heat production or fire. Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or
Use the prescribed cables for electrical high voltage parts can cause personal injury due
connection, tighten the cables securely to entrapment, burn or electric shocks.
in terminal block and relieve the Be sure to fix up the service panels.
cables correctly to prevent overloading the Incorrect fixing can cause electric shocks or
terminal blocks. fire due to intrusion of dust or water.
Loose connections or cable mountings can cause Do not perform any repairs or modifi-
anomalous heat production or fire. cations by yourself. Consult the dealer
Arrange the wiring in the control box so if the unit requires repair.
that it cannot be pushed up further into If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

leaks, electric shocks or fire. cause fire.


Do not perform any change of protec- Do not install the unit where corrosive
tive device itself or its setup condition gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or
The forced operation by short-circuiting protective combustible gas (such as thinner and
device of pressure switch and temperature petroleum gases) can accumulate or collect,
controller or the use of non specified component or where volatile combustible substances
can cause fire or burst. are handled.
Be sure to switch off the power supply Corrosive gas can cause corrosion of heat
in the event of installation, inspection exchanger, breakage of plastic parts and etc. And
or servicing. combustible gas can cause fire.
If the power supply is not shut off, there is a risk Secure a space for installation, inspec-
of electric shocks, unit failure or personal injury tion and maintenance specified in the
due to the unexpected start of fan. manual.
Consult the dealer or an expert regar- Insufficient space can result in accident such as
ding removal of the unit. personal injury due to falling from the installation
Incorrect installation can cause water leaks, place.
electric shocks or fire. When the outdoor unit is installed on a
Stop the compressor before disconnec- roof or a high place, provide permanent
ting refrigerant pipes in case of pump ladders and handrails along the access
down operation. route and fences and handrails around the
If disconnecting refrigerant pipes in state of outdoor unit.
opening service valves before compressor If safety facilities are not provided, it can cause
stopping, air can be sucked, which can cause burst personal injury due to falling from the installation
or personal injury due to anomalously high place.
pressure in the refrigerant circuit. Do not use the indoor unit at the place
where water splashes may occur.
CAUTION Since the indoor unit is not waterproof, it
can cause electric shocks and fire.
Carry out the electrical work for ground Do not install or use the system close
lead with care. to the equipment that generates elec-
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, tromagnetic fields or high frequency
water line, lightning conductor or telephone line’s harmonics.
ground lead. Incorrect grounding can cause unit Equipment such as inverters, standby generators,
faults such as electric shocks due to short- medical high frequency equipments and
circuiting. telecommunication equipments can affect the
Use the circuit breaker with sufficient system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns.
breaking capacity. The system can also affect medical equipment and
If the breaker does not have sufficient breaking telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its
capacity, it can cause the unit malfunction and function or cause jamming.
fire. Do not install the outdoor unit in a
Earth leakage breaker must be insta- location where insects and small animals
lled. can inhabit.
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can Insects and small animals can enter the electric
cause electric shocks. parts and cause damage or fire. Instruct the user to
Do not use any materials other than a keep the surroundings clean.
fuse with the correct rating in the Do not use the base flame for outdoor
location where fuses are to be used. unit which is corroded or damaged due
Connecting the circuit with copper wire or other to long periods of operation.
metal thread can cause unit failure and fire. Using an old and damage base flame can cause
Do not install the unit near the location the unit falling down and cause personal injury.
where leakage of combustible gases Do not install the unit in the locations
can occur. listed below.
If leaked gases accumulate around the unit, it can Locations where carbon fiber, metal powder or
4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

any powder is floating. Do not install the remote controller at


Locations where any substances that can affect the direct sunlight.
the unit such as sulphide gas, chloride gas, acid It can cause malfunction or deformation of the
and alkaline can occur. remote controller.
Vehicles and ships. Do not use the unit for special purposes
Locations where cosmetic or special sprays are such as storing foods, cooling precision
often used. instruments and preservation of
Locations with direct exposure of oil mist and animals, plants or art.
steam such as kitchen and machine plant. It can cause the damage of the items.
Locations where any machines which generate Take care when carrying the unit by
high frequency harmonics are used. hand.
L ocations with salty atmospheres such as If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be
coastlines. carried by two or more persons. Do not carry by
Locations with heavy snow (If installed, be sure the plastic straps, always use the carry handle
to provide base flame and snow hood mentioned when carrying the unit by hand. Use gloves to
in the manual). minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum fins.
Locations where the unit is exposed to chimney Dispose of any packing materials cor-
smoke. rectly.
Locations at high altitude (more than 1000m Any remaining packing materials can cause
high). personal injury as it contains nails and wood. And
Locations with ammonic atmospheres. to avoid danger of suffocation, be sure to keep the
Locations where heat radiation from other heat plastic wrapper away from children and to dispose
source can affect the unit. after tear it up.
Locations without good air circulation. Pay attention not to damage the drain
Locations with any obstacles which can prevent pan by weld spatter when welding
inlet and outlet air of the unit. work is done near the indoor unit.
Locations where short circuit of air can occur (in If weld spatter entered into the indoor unit during
case of multiple units installation). welding work, it can cause pin-hole in drain pan
Locations where strong air blows against the air and result in water leakage. To prevent such
outlet of outdoor unit. damage, keep the indoor unit in its packing or
It can cause remarkable decrease in performance, cover it.
corrosion and damage of components,
malfunction and fire. Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes
so as not to condense the ambient air
Do not install the outdoor unit in the moisture on them.
locations listed below. Insufficient insulation can cause condensation,
Locations where discharged hot air or operating which can lead to moisture damage on the ceiling,
sound of the outdoor unit can bother floor, furniture and any other valuables.
neighborhood.
Locations where outlet air of the outdoor unit Be sure to perform air tightness test
blows directly to plants. by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after
Locations where vibration can be amplified and completed refrigerant piping work.
transmitted due to insufficient strength of If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in
structure. the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room,
Locations where vibration and operation sound lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious

generated by the outdoor unit can affect accidents.
seriously. (on the wall or at the place near bed Do not touch any buttons with wet hands.
room) It can cause electric shocks.
Locations where an equipment affected by high Do not shut off the power supply imme-
harmonics is placed. (TV set or radio receiver is diately after stopping the operation.
placed within 5m) Wait at least 5 minutes, otherwise there is a risk
Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. of water leakage or breakdown.
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a Do not control the system with main
claim. power switch.
It can cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the
5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

fan can start unexpectedly, which can cause Notabilia for units designed for R410A
personal injury. Only use R410A refrigerant. R410A is the
Do not touch any refrigerant pipes refrigerant whose pressure is 1.6 times as high as
when the system is in operation. that of conventional refrigerant.
During operation the refrigerant pipes become
extremely hot or extremely cold depending the The size of charging port of service valve and
operating condition, and it can cause burn injury check joint for R410A are altered from that for
or frost injury. conventional refrigerant in order to prevent the
system being charged with the incorrect
refrigerant by mistake. And the protruding
dimension of pipe for flare processing and flare
nut size for R410A are also altered from that for
conventional refrigerant in order to reinforce
strength against the pressure for R410A.
Accordingly the dedicated tools for R410A listed
in the below mentioned table should be prepared
for installation and servicing.
Dedicated tools for R410A
a) Gauge manifold
b) Charge hose
c) Electronic scale for refrigerant charge
d) Torque wrench
e) Flare tool
f) Protrusion control gauge for copper pipe
g) Vacuum pump adapter
h) Gas leak detector
Do not use charging cylinder. Using charging
cylinder may alter the composition of refrigerant,
which results in making the performance of the
system worse.

Refrigerant must be charged always in liquid state


from the bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

General information for installer


For outdoor unit installation information, see Installation
manual for Outdoor unit.

Over view and design


HSB60
UB1 UB2 UB3 EP2 XL14 XL1 XL2

AA23-X1

XL13
A23-F3

AA23-X4

AA23-S3

AA23

PF3 BT3

AA23-X100

BP4
HZ2
BT15

BT12

Pipe connections Sensor, thermostats


XL1(Red mark) Climate system supply BP4 Pressure sensor, high pressure
XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system return BT3 Temperature sensor, heating medium, return
XL14 Connection, gas line BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser, supply
XL13 Connection, liquid line BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe

Valves etc. Miscellaneous


EP2 Heat exchanger UB1 Cable gland
HQ1 Particle filter (supplied) UB2 Cable gland
HZ2 Drying filter UB3 Cable gland

Electrical components
AA23 Communication board
AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection
of KVR
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
module / control module
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
module

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

HMK60
XL10 XL4 XL13 XL14 XL3 XL2

XL1
BT12
XL11
BT64
QN12 GP12

EP2
CM1 BP4
BT15
EB1 BT25
BT3
BT63
QN10
BT71
BT7

EB2

EB15

BT6

Pipe connections Sensors


XL1 ( ) Connection, heating medium, supply BP4 Pressure sensor, high pressure
XL2 ( ) Connection, heating medium, return BT3 Temperature sensor, heating medium return
XL3 Connection, cold water BT6 Temperature sensor, hot water loading
XL4 Connection, hot water BT7 Temperature sensor, top of the hot water heater
XL10 Connection, cooling BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser outlet
XL11 Connection, safety group, manometer BT15 Temperature sensor, liquid
XL13 Connection, liquid cooling medium BT25 Temperature sensor, heating medium supply
XL14 Connection, gas cooling medium BT63 Temperature sensor, heating medium supply
downstream the submersible heater
HVAC elements BT64 Temperature sensor, cooling medium supply
BT71 Temperature sensor, heating medium re- turn
CM1 Diaphragm expansion vessel, closed
QN10 Isolation valve, domestic hot water/central heating
QN12 Isolation valve, cooling/heating Others
GP12 Circulation pump EB15 HMK 60
EP2 Heat exchanger PF3 Serial number
EB2 Domestic hot water tank

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

PT300

1
11
8

12
13

2
9
3
14

4 13

10 15

16
6

Section of the PT300 storage tanks. Side view of the PT300 storage tanks.
8. Thermometer
1. Upper insulation of the storage tank 9. Connector pipe for mounting electric heating unit
2. Protective magnesium anode 10. Inspection opening
3. Enamelled tank 11. Hot water intake connector pipe
4. Side insulation of the storage tank 12. Hot water circulation connector pipe
5. Coil 13. Temperature sensor cover
6. Lower insulation of the storage tank 14. Coil supply connector pipe
7. Adjustable foot 15. Connection of return line from the coil
16. Cold water supply connector pipe

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Transport and storage Assembly


■ It is recommended that indoor unit is installed in a room
Indoor unit and tank unit must be transported and stored
with existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room
vertically in dry conditions.
or boiler room.
■ For indoor unit and control unit, the mounting surface must
Supplied components be firm, flat and vertical, preferably a concrete wall.
■ Indoor unit with tank and tank unit must be set on a solid
HSB60 Indoor unit
waterproof base that would keep the weight of the unit. The
height-adjusting legs allow for levelling and stable setting.

HMK60



 


Wrench size 13
Particle filter R25 (HQ1). Brackets kit 20-40 mm

HMK60 Indoor unit with tank

PT300

Safety valve with pressure gauge

RC-HY20/40 Control unit


0-15 mm

Outside sensor Room sensor (RC-HY40 only)


LEK

Insulation tape Temperature sensor

■ For indoor unit with tank, floor drain port is required to


connect drain hose in case cooling function is used.
■ Install indoor unit with its back to an outside wall, ideally
LEK

in a room where noise does not matter. If this is not


possible, avoid placing it against a wall behind a bedroom
Aluminium tape Cable ties or other room where noise may be a problem.
■ Route pipes so they are not fixed to an internal wall that
backs on to a bedroom or living room.
LE
K

LE
K

■ Install indoor unit with tank, tank unit and its pipings to
indoor unit indoors in order to avoid icing.
LE
K

■ Ensure free space described in the following figures for


future maintenance.
Heating pipe paste Current sensor (RC-HY40 only)

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

HSB60 HMK60
Recommendation for positioning on wall

Min. 300mm

800 mm
Min. 200mm Min. 200mm

IMPORTANT
For HMK60, leave 10 – 25 mm free space between the indoor
module and the back wall for cables and piping.

PT300

Recommendation for positioning in corner


A min
Min. 400mm

Mi
n. 4
00m
m

Amin is required on top to replace anode bar, and 500 mm is


required in front to replace immersion heater if equipped.
*Min 800mm is required in front
Application Connector pipe dia. Type of anode Amin
1" Chain ø26 × 8 150 mm
PT300
¾" Titanium anode 200 mm

RC-HY20/40
100 mm

100 mm 100 mm

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Hanging indoor unit Hanging control unit


It is recommended that the split box is installed in a room with Use all mounting points and install control unit upright against
existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room or boiler a flat wall. Make sure whole back surface faces the wall.
room.
1. The bracket for the split box is mounted to the wall by use
Mounting point Mounting point
of appropriate screws.
ø10
4-

2. Insert HSB60 in the bracket mounted to the wall.

Mounting point Mounting point

NOTE
Indoor unit weigh16 kg excluding water inside.

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Dimensioning expansion vessel Recommended installation order


The expansion vessel volume must be at least 5% of total water 1. Hang indoor unit and control unit to appropriate position
volume in the circulation system. and connect indoor unit and tank unit.
HMK60 is equipped with an expansion vessel with a volume 2. Connect indoor unit to climate system, cold and hot water
of 10 liters. lines as well as any external heat sources. See page 14, 15.
Also see docking descriptions on page 26-28 and further
Initial pressure and max height difference on.
Recommended maximum height difference between expansion 3. Install refrigerant pipes according to the description on the
vessel and the highest point in the system is 5m. Installation manual for outdoor unit.
The initial pressure of the pressure expansion vessel must be 4. Connect current limiter, any centralised load control and
dimensioned according to the maximum height (H) between external contacts as well as the cable between indoor unit
the vessel and the highest positioned radiator, see figure. An and outdoor unit.
initial pressure of 0.5 bar (5 mvp) means a maximum permitted 5. Connect incoming electricity to indoor unit and/or outdoor
height difference of 5 m. unit. See page 34-36.
If the standard initial pressure in the pressure vessel is not high 6. Follow the commissioning instructions on page 37-55.
enough it can be increased by filling via the valve in the
expansion vessel. The expansion vessel’s standard initial
pressure must be entered in the check list on User’s manua1.
Any change in the initial pressure affects the ability of the
expansion vessel to handle the expansion of the water.
Consult local distributor in case height difference exceeds 5m.
H

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Pipe installation
General
Pipe installation must be carried out in accordance with current return at lowest design outdoor temperature (DOT) though
norms and directives. indoor unit can operate with a return temperature of up to 65°C
A following table shows plumbing necessary for each product. and an outgoing temperature from the unit of 65°C.
Indoor unit is not equipped with shut off valves; these must be
Refrigerant Plumbing
installed outside the heat pump to facilitate any future
HSB Necessary Necessary
servicing.
HMK Necessary Necessary
PT ⸺ Necessary Indoor unit can be connected to the radiator system, floor
PC-HY ⸺ ⸺ heating system and/or fan convectors.
Safety valve is not equipped with in indoor unit. Make sure to
This heat pump system is designed for low or medium
install safety valve in the circuit.
temperature heating system. It is recommended water
temperature must not exceed 55°C on supply and 45°C on

Installation diagram
FDCW60VNX-A outdoor unit provides heat for space heating and domestic hot water using free energy in the outdoor air within the
range of low temperature up to -20°C. Connection is different according to the type of indoor unit (see below figures). The system is
controlled by RC-HY20 or RC-HY40 control unit.

HSB60
HSB60 indoor unit is equipped with plate heat exchanger. It needs to install expansion vessel, shut-off valves, safety valve, electric
heater and circulation pump to make a complete heating system. In case domestic hot water is required, 3 way valve and tank is also
necessary.

AA25

XL14 BT12 XL1


BP4 P
BT15 BT3 XL2
XL13

HSB60

FDCW60 PT300

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

HMK60
HMK60 indoor unit is equipped with coil water heater, expansion vessel, safety valve, electric heater, plate heat exchanger,
sensors and gauge, and circulation pump.

XL11
XL10

XL14 XL1
BP4
EH
XL13 XL2
XL4
XL3

FDCW60
HMK60

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Vent P Manometer

Cut-off valve Circulation pump

Water tap Particulate filter

Non-return valve Compressor

Balancing valve Heat exchanger

Three-way valve Cooling

Safety valve Central heating system

T Thermometer Domestic hot water

Temperature sensor Heating systems Floor


heating

Diaphragm expansion
Cooling system
vessel

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

System requirements Pump capacity diagram


The minimum water volume in the climate system is subject to HSB60
the values in the table below. If it is not fulfilled, volume
HSB60 is not equipped with circulation pump.
vessel must be installed.
This graph shows the characteristic of CPD11-25/55.
For more options, see the docking description on Page 24.
(liter)
With underfloor Without underf l oor Pressure
cooling application cooling application [kPa]
HSB60, HMK60, 80
50 20 70
FDCW60VNX-A
60
50
Overflow valve
40
NOTE 30
A free flow is required for all docking options, which 20
means that an overflow valve must be installed. 10
The circulation pump may become damaged. 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Flow [l / s]

HMK60
Pressure
[kPa]

Flow [l / s]

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Pressure drop in indoor unit Dimensions and pipe connections


HSB60 HSB60
Tryckfall HBS05
[kPa]
30

25
XL1
20
XL2
15
XL13
10

5
XL14
0
0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
HSB100 HSB60, 140 Flow [l / s] Pipe connections
XL1 (Red mark) Climate system, flow ø28 mm
XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system, return ø28 mm
XL14 Gas line refrigerant, flare ½ ̋
HMK60
XL13 Liquid line refrigerant, flare ¼ ̋
[kPa]
16
HMK60
14
12 XL4 XL5 XL3 XL2 XL1
93.5 92.5 87 63 55
10
44

152
155

6 156
4 XL14
65
2 XL13
XL10

610.5
0
300

0 0.2 0.4 0.6


Flow [l / s]

PF3
Connection of extra circulation pump XL11
When connecting extra circulation pumps, requirements for
pressure, maximum flow etc must be met. See page 27 for 600.5
location.

NOTE Pipe connections


XL1 ( ) Connection, Heating medium supply ø22 mm
Non-return valve must be installed in case extra circulation XL2 ( ) Connection, Heating medium return ø22 mm
pump is used. See page 27 for the position. XL3 Connection, cold water ø22 mm
The circlulation pump may become damaged. XL4 Connection, hot water ø22 mm
XL5 Connection, circulation ø15 mm
XL13 Connection, liquid cooling medium ¼ ࡉ
XL14 Connection, gas cooling medium ½ ࡉ
XL10 Connection, cooling ø22 mm
XL11 Connection, safety valve ø22 mm, manometer

Other information
PF3 Serial number plate

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

PT300

N
F

L
K

E
J

1634
1325

1398
I

1187
1107
930

840

H
D
588

G
315

336
167
21-0/+15

Connection U/m PT300


D Inspection opening mm ø120
E Heating unit connection inch 1½ ̋ Female
F Thermometer enclosure mm ø10 Female
N Hot water outlet inch 1 ̋ Male
L Hot water circulation inch ¾ ̋ Male
K Temp. sensor enclosure (BT7) mm ø16 Female
J Coil supply inch 1 ̋ Male
I Temp. sensor enclosure (BT6) mm ø16 Female
H Return from coil inch 1 ̋ Male
G Cold water input inch 1 ̋ Male

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Water circuit HMK60

Connection to heating system XL8 XL9 XL3 XL5 XL4 XL2 XL1
XL11
Connect XL1 to supply line and X2 to return line from
heating system. XL10
■ All required safety devices and shut-off valves must be
installed as close to the indoor unit as possible.
■ Install bleed valves where necessary, highest point of the
water system in usual case.
■ When connecting to a system with thermostats on all
radiators, install an overflow valve or remove some of the
thermostats to ensure sufficient flow.
■ See section Dockings on page 25 for outline diagram.
■ Install a safety valve with manometer on heating circuit and
hot water circuit. (FL2)
For HSB60 install a safety valve for heating circuit on the
water pipe returning to indoor unit since it doesn’t have
port for FL2.
The entire length of the overflow water pipe from the safety Install safety valve FL2 on XL11.
valves must be inclined to prevent water pockets and must
also be frost proof.
Connection to hot water heater
■ The end of overflow water pipe from the safety valves must be
For HSB60 indoor unit, it is necessary to connect PT300 tank
left open to the atmosphere. The water may drip from the pipe.
unit applying 3 way valve in order to use domestic hot water
function.
For HMK60 indoor unit, 180L tank unit is integrated in
HSB60
indoor unit.
XL14 XL1 XL13 XL2
Housing disassembly of tank unit
Removable housing with thermal insulation facilitates trans-
port and installation of the storage tank. Disassembly the ho-
using in the following order (see below figure):
1. Remove the Temperature gauge, plug of the heating ele-
ment connector pipe and blanking plate of the inspection
opening.
2 Remove the upper cover of the housing together with
thermal insulation.
3. Remove the plugs from the connector pipes and black
bushings.
4. Remove the fixing screws and the strip connecting the
housing jacket.
5. Remove the jacket surrounding the tank (housing jacket.)
6. Remove the four-piece thermal insulation.
After the installation of the storage tank in its final location,
reinstall the removed components in the reverse order.
Install safety valve as close to XL2 as possible.

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Housing and thermal insulation disassembly

3 4 5 6

Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit ■ Tank unit can be aligned using the adjustable feet.
■ Protection against overpressure shall be made in accordance
CAUTION with the relevant regulations.
Installation and commissioning of the storage tank ■ Connect the heating system according to the installation
shall only be done by appropriately qualified installer. diagram (see figure).
The installer should inform the user of the functions of Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil.
the product and provide the necessary in formation on its
safe use.
1

Information 1. PT storage tank


2. Cut-off valve
We recommend installing a strainer in order to protect the
pumps, check valve and the components of the heating
system. 2
supply from heat
pump
■ Tank and its pipings to indoor unit must be installed
indoors where the temperature wouldn't drop below 15°C 2
return to heat pump
in order to prevent pipings from icing.
■ Maximum piping length between indoor unit and tank is
10 m.
■ Tank unit should be placed on firm, preferably a concrete
f l oor or foundation.

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Connecting hot water tank to water main


■ Install a mixing valve if the temperature exceeds 60 °C.
Information
In order to minimize the flow of water from the safety valve
■ It is recommended to install a thermostatic mixing valve associated with the thermal expansion of the liquid, it is
for stable temperature hot water supply. advisable to install a suitable expansion vessel at the cold
■ Connect the storage tank to the water supply system of water connection (see item 8.)
water pressure at least 1 bar and max 10 bar. Install a
pressure reducer if the pressure at the cold water inlet to the CAUTION
tank is higher than allowed.
Installation of the appropriate safety valve in the cold
■ Install a safety valve which have a maximum 10.0 bar water supply line protecting the unit against
opening pressure on the incoming domestic water line overpressure is mandatory!
according to outline diagram in order to protect the storage
tank against overpressure. Pressure increases during heating
the water. CAUTION
■ During heating the water, small and temporary water flow Installation of necking of any kind (such as reducers, dirt pockets,
from the safety valve can occur, which indicates that the etc.) and cut-off valves between the storage tank and the safety
pressure has increased above the rated value, which valve is not allowed. Only a T-pipe with a drain valve and a T-pipe
triggered the valve. This may in no way be prevented. with an expansion vessel may be installed in these line sections.
■ Safety valve drain line should be installed with a decline, in
an environment free of freezing and remain open to the
atmosphere. The manufacturer is not responsible for CAUTION
flooding the room through the safety valve.
Never block the safety valve or drain line. This can cause
■ Blocked safety valve can cause equipment failure. Drain a dangerous overpressure in the storage tank.
the outflow from the safety valve to the sewerage or drain
grate.
■ See section Dockings on page 25 for outline diagram.
CAUTION
■ Connect the water supply system according to the When heating water, slight, temporary discharge from
installation diagram. the safety valve can occur. This is a correct safety valve
function. Any attempt to interfere in its operati on can
Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil. lead to the danger and destruction of the storage tank.
1

2
DHW CAUTION
2 7 6 2 Never use the equipment with clogged safety valves.
hot water circulation
(optional)

Connection
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the proce-
dure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page 19):
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
3 8
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
4 5 2
water supply system 3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
to sewerage
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect
1. PT storage tank it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
2. Cut-off valve 5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating
3. Safety valve medium to the coil.
4. Drain valve
5. Pressure reducer (option, if the pressure in the system CAUTION
exceeds the allowable value) If there is an electric heating module installed in the
6. Strainer storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.
7. Hot water circulating pump
8. Hot water expansion vessel

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Hot water circulation circuit 3. Remove the plug from the circulation pipe (XL5).
Hot water circulation function is available for HMK60 and
XL5
PT300.

HMK60

4. Install the elbow, facing the rear housing, on the circulation


pipe.
5. Connect the pipe to the elbow, with the dimensions shown
in the figure below, leading pipe in the top of the housing,
in place of the XL5 plug. Mount the pipe insulation.

To connect the circulation:


1. Remove the XL5 plug from the top of the housing.

XL5
520

2. Remove the front panel, then slide the control panel down 120
to access the hydraulic connections.
Circulation pipe dimensions (*) Elbow 15x15 (*)

6. At the outlet of the circulation tube, install the circulation


pump and then connect its control to the RC-HY (Chapter 5
Electrical connection).
7. Install the control panel and the front panel.
(*) Prepared on site.

PT300
If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect it to
the port L (see page 19).
Then install the Cut-off valves, circulation pump and strainer.

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Connection of external heat source Refrigerant circuit


External heat source, e.g. a gas or oil boiler or electric heater,
can be connected on supply line of heating system (XL1). Connecting refrigerant pipes
See Installation manual for outdoor unit.

Piping insulation
Install insulation on all piping in order to avoid condensation
during cooling operation.
It is also strongly recommended to insulate piping for heating
only application in order to avoid getting burned or reducing
the heating capacity.
The thickness of the insulation should be 20mm where the
relative humidity exceeds 70%.

Drain connection
HMK 60 is equipped with a condensate hose in the heat
exchanger section. The hose drains all condensate away from
the device to minimize the risk of damage. If necessary, the
hose can be extended.

Condensate hose

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Dockings
General
Installation requirements
Hydrolution can be connected in several different ways, some of which are shown on the following pages.

HSB60 HMK60
FDCW60VNX-A
Max pressure, climate system 0.25 MPa (2.5 Bar)
Highest recommended supply/return temperature 55/45°C
Max temperature, climate system 65 °C
Max temperature in indoor unit 65 °C
Max temperature from external heat source 65 °C
Max supply temperature with compressor at outdoor temp -15°C 58 °C
Min supply temp. cooling 7 °C
Max supply temp. cooling 25 °C
Min volume, climate system during heating, cooling 20 L
Min volume, climate system during underf l oor cooling 50 L
Max flow, climate system 0.29 L/s
Min flow, climate system, at 100% circulation pump speed 0.19 L/s
Min flow, climate system 0.09 L/s
Nominal system flow heating (ѬT=5K) 0.29 L/s (6kW, 7/45°C)
Nominal system flow cooling (ѬT=5K) 0.28 L/s (5.8kW, 35/7°C)

External circulation pump must be used when the pressure drop in the system is greater than the available external pressure. In such
cases, a bypass line with non-return valve must be installed.
Use an overflow valve if system flow cannot be guaranteed.

Symbol key
Symbol Meaning
Venting valve

Shut-off valve

Non-return valve

Control valve

Safety valve
Temperature sensor

Expansion vessel
P Pressure gauge
Circulation pump

Shunt / shuttle valve


Fan

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Docking alternatives Explanation


Heating system can be constructed in several different ways AA25 Controller
combining indoor unit, tank, control unit and other accessories.
BT1 Outdoor sensor1)
For further option information, see page 84.
BT6 Temperature sensor, hotwater charging1)
In the system example shown on the following page, heating,
BT7 Temperature sensor, hot water top1)
hot water as well as cooling operation are available.
BT25 Temperature sensor, external supply line1)
Additional heating is helpful on the cold day of the year as the
energy from the air is reduced. It is also recommended as back- BT50 Room sensor
up in case the heat pump operation is blocked for any reason BT63 Temperature sensor, external supply line after
(e.g. ambient temperature exceeds the operation limit of heat electric heater
pump). BT71 Temperature sensor, external return line1)
GP10 Circulation pump, Heating medium
NOTE QN10 Reversing valve, Hot water/Heating medium2)
The heating medium side and the hot water side must be
EB1 Additional heat
fitted with the necessary safety equipment in accordance
with the applicable regulations. EB1 Immersion heater
This is the outline diagram. Actual installations KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor2)
must be planned according to applicable EB101 Heat pump system
standards.
BP4 Pressure sensor, condensor3)
BT3 Temperature sensor, return line3)
BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser supply line3)
BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe3)
EB101 Heat pump
FL10 Safety valve
GP12 Charge pump2)
HQ1 Particle filter3)
QM1 Drain valve, Heating medium
QM31 Shut-off valve, Heating medium, Flow
QM32 Shut off valve, Heating medium, Return
QM43 Shut-off valve
EQ1 Cooling system
BT64 Temperature sensor, cooling supply line2)
CP6 Single jacket accumulator tank, cooling
GP13 Circulation pump, cooling
QN12 Reversing valve, Cooling/Heating2)
Miscellaneous
CM1 Expansion vessel closed, Heating medium
CP5 Buffer vessel
CP10 Accumulator tank with hotwater heating
EB20 Immersion heater
FL2 Safety valve, Heating medium
KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor
RN10 Trim valve

1) Included in and supplied with controller


2) Included in and supplied with accessory
3) Included in indoor unit

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Installation with indoor unit HSB60, tank PT300, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional heat
before reversing valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EQ1
-AA25 -AA25 -RN10
-CP6
-AA25-QN10

-EB1
-EB1 -FL2
-KA1 -BT63 -CM1
-GP13
-CP10

-BT64 -AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101

-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE
Not all components are shown in this
outline diagram.

Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to The additional heat can also be used for water heater when a
meet the heating and hot water demand. higher temperature is required than the heat pump can produce.
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand, the reversing During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on automatically when the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity. This is used reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
for both heating and charging hot water. heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Indoor unit HSB60, tank PT300, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional heat after reversing
valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EB1
-EB1
-KA1

-CP5 -AA25
-GP10 -BT25
-BT71
-EQ1
-AA25
-CP6
-AA25 -RN10
-AA25-QN10

-GP13 -FL2
-CM1
-BT64
-CP10

-AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101
-KA1
-EB20
-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE Immersion heater (EB20) in the water heater/accumulator tank


Not all components are shown in this is used during the time to produce hot water if the heat pump is
outline diagram. used for heating at the same time.
The immersion heater (EB20) can also be used if a higher
This installations alternative is suitable for more complex temperature of hot water is required than the heat pump can
installations with a focus on comfort. produce.
Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
meet the heating and hot water demand of the installation. switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand the reversing demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on, automatically when the
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity.

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Installation with indoor unit HMK60 for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

AA25

P
XL10

-BT64
XL14 -BT12 -GP12
-QN12 -BT25
-BT63 XL1
-BT15 XL2
XL13 -QN10
-BP4 -CM1
-EB1
BT71
-BT3
XL4
XL3
-BT7

-BT6

-XL14
-XL13

Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to Cooling is controlled by the sensor BT64, and the reversing
meet the heating and hot water demand. At simultaneous valve (QN12) swithes to the cooling system. If several
heating and hot water demand, the reversing valve (QN10) simultaneous demands occur while there is a cooling demands,
swithes periodically between the climate system and the hot the system reacts differently. In the event of a hot water
water heater. When the hot water heater is fully charged, the demand, the reversing valve switches back and hot water is
reversing valve swithes to the climate system. produced until the demand is fulfilled. In the event of heating
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on automatically when the demand, the reversing valve switches periodically between
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity. This is used cooling and heating. If the cooling demand is met, the
for both heating and charging water heater. reversing valve switches back to basic mode (heating/hot
water).
The additional heat can also be used for water heater when a
higher temperature is required than the heat pump can produce.

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical installation
General Principle diagram, electrical installation
Indoor unit must be installed via an isolator switch in accordance HSB60
Electrical
with the local codes and regulations. PEN L1 L2 L3
distribution unit
For HMK60, electrical equipments, except outdoor air sensor,
room sensor, current transformers and outdoor unit has been
connected at the factory.
Isolator switch
■ Disconnect the indoor unit, outdoor unit and control unit
before insulation testing of the house wiring.
■ If the building is equipped with an earth-fault breaker,
Hydrolution should be equipped with a separate one.
■ For the electrical wiring diagram, see page 85. Circulation 3way
FDCW60 HSB60 RC-HY20/40 Electric pump valve
(Outdoor unit) (Indoor unit) (Controller) heater
■ Do not lay communication, sensor or signal cables for
Power and sensor cable
external connection close to high voltage lines. Communication cable
■ Minimum cross section of communication, sensor or signal
cables for external connection must be 0.5mm2 up to 50 m, Cable size
for example EKKX, LiYY or equivalent. Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 2.5mm2 (power cable)
■ Use screened three core cable for communication between
2core, 1.5mm2
controller (RC-HY20/40) and indoor unit (HSB60/ Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
HMK60).
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
■ When laying cables into indoor units and controllers, be equivalent (communication cable)
sure to route the cable grommet (UB1 AND UB2).
The cable size shown on the above table is reference value.
■ Be careful to route cables not to be damaged by metal edge Choose appropriate size according to local laws and regulations.
or trapped by panels.
HMK60
■ Outdoor unit is equipped with a single phase compressor. PEN L1 L2 L3 Electrical
This means that phase L3 is loaded with up to 15 A during distribution unit
compressor operation.

NOTE
Electrical installation and service must be carried out
Isolator switch
under the supervision of a qualified electrician.
Turn off the circuit breaker before carrying out any
servicing.
Electrical installation and wiring must be carried out in
accordance with the stipulations in force.
Make sure to turn off the power supply during
installation.
FDCW60 HMK60 RC-HY20/40
(Outdoor unit) (Indoor unit) (Controller)
Power and sensor cable
Communication cable
NOTE
Do not turn on the power on control until the boiler is Cable size
filled with water. Power – Indoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
(power/communication cable)
The circulation pump and immersion heater
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
may become damaged.
(power/communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
NOTE 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)
If the power supply cable is damaged, only authorised
person may replace it to avoid danger or damage. The cable size shown on the above table is reference value.
Choose appropriate size according to local laws and regulations.

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical components HMK60


HSB60 X2
F1
X1 F2
AA23-X1

AA23-F3 AA23
X3
K1-K3
AA23 AA8

T1 F3-SF2
AA23-X4

AA23-S3

AA23-X100

Explanation
AA23 Communication board
AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection
of KVR
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
module / control module
Explanation
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
X1 Terminal block, sensors
module FDCW
X2 Terminal block, power supply
X3 Terminal block
SF1 Controller switch
K1-K3 Submersible heater contact
T1 Thermostat, standby mode
F3 Temperature limiter
AA8 Titanium anode board
AA23 Communication board
F1 Circuit breaker, outdoor unit
F2 Circuit breaker, controller
UB1 Cable grommet
UB2 Cable grommet
F3-SF2 Reset botton, temperature limiter

30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Temperature limiter RC-HY20


Temperature limiter (F3) cuts off the power supply of the PF3 AA4
electrical heating module if the temperature increases to the
range of approximately 87 °C, and can be reset manually.

X2

1
2
3
5 4
6
Resetting

7
8
9
10
13 12 11
Temperature limiter (F3) is accessible behind the front cover.

14
17 16 15
Temperature limiter is reset by strong pressing of the button

18
SF1

21 20 19
(F3-SF2) using a small screwdriver.
X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

Press the button, max. 15 N (approx. 1.5 kg).


AA4-XJ3 AA7
F3
AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

UB1 UB2

FA1

F3-SF2

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7

AA2 LEK

Explanation
AA2 Base card
AA4 Display unit
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, control signal circulation pump,
sensors AUX inputs and heat pump
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

RC-HY40 Accessibility, electrical connection


PF3 AA4
for controller
The cover of the control module is opened using a Torx 25
screwdriver. Assembly takes place in the reverse order.
AA5 AA3
3

SF1 X2
1 2 3 4

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA4-XJ3 AA7

AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

UB1 UB2

FA1

K2
2

1
X2
1 2 3 44

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

NOTE
AA7 The cover to access the base board is opened
AA2 LEK
using a Torx 25 screwdriver

Explanation
AA2 Base card
AA3 Input circuit board
AA4 Display unit
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA5 Accessory card
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
K2 Emergency mode relay
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, AUX4 - AUX6
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal
The display may need to be moved for easier access when
connecting electrics. This is easily done by following these
steps.

32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

4. Secure the display on the panel.

1. Press in the catch on the upper rear side of the display unit
5. When the electrical connection is ready the display must be
towards you (a) and move the display unit upwards (b) so
reinstalled with three mounting points again, otherwise the
that the mountings unhook from the panel.
front cover cannot be installed.

2. Lift the display unit from its mountings.

3. Align the two lower mountings on the reverse of the


display unit with the two upper holes in the panel as
illustrated.

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Cable lock Connection


Use a suitable tool to release/lock cables in the terminal block.
NOTE
HSB60, RC-HY20/40 To prevent interference, unscreened communication and/
Terminal block on the electrical card or sensor cables to external connections must not be laid
closer than 20 cm from high voltage cables.

HSB60
2

1
2

1
Power supply
2
In case of HSB60, power supply is made to indoor unit,
4 LE
K
outdoor unit and controller separately. 230V 1AC 50Hz is
1
applied.
3 For indoor unit, incoming supply is connected on AA23-X1
2 terminal.

AA23-X1

Terminal block AA23-F3

AA23

AA23-X4
LEK

AA23-S3

3,5 mm AA23-X100

1 mm

HMK60 For outdoor unit, incoming supply is connected on TB


terminal. See figure on Connection between indoor and outdoor
unit.
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit
The communication cable between indoor and outdoor unit is
3 connected between terminal AA23-X100 in indoor unit and TB
in outdoor unit. Screened 2 core cable is recommended.
1

FDCW 60
L N 1 2 3 (AMS
TB 10:TB)
2
HSB 60
Yellow/ Brown Blue Communication AA23-X100
AA23-X100
Green

1
Communication

2
Electrical distribution
Central 3
unit

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between indoor unit and controller HMK60


See Connection for RC-HY20/40
Circuit breaker
Cascade connection setting HMK60 is equipped with internal circuit breakers to protect
In case of cascade connection system, it is necessary to allot the system and components. The circuit breaker F1 protects
unique address to each indoor unit. Set the dip switch S3-1, -2 outdoor unit and F2 protects controller.
and -3 according to the following table.
Power supply
Address S3:1 S3:2 S3:3 In case of HMK60, power supply is made to indoor unit, and
1 OFF OFF OFF further connected to outdoor unit and controller. 400V 3NAC
2 On OFF OFF
50Hz is applied.
3 OFF On OFF
4 On On OFF Connect power supply cable to the port for power supply on
5 OFF OFF On X2 terminal as shown below.
6 On OFF On L L1 L2 L3 N N PE
7 OFF On On
8 On On On

Recommended fuse size for HSB60


The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Fuse size
Indoor unit (HSB60) 6A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Outdoor unit (FDCW60VNX-A) 20A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Controller (RC-HY20/40) 10A/ 230V 1AC 50Hz
Electric heater (ELK9M)
16 A/400V 3NAC 50Hz
(reference)

Recommended cable size for HSB60


EMERGENCY

The recommended cable size shown in the following table is RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local


laws and regulations.
Cable size
Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 2.5mm2 (power cable)
2core, 1.5mm2
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between indoor and outdoor unit RC-HY20/40


For interconnection cable between indoor unit and outdoor Cable connection is different according to the system structure.
unit, connect 2, 3, L, N and PE port for outdoor unit on X2 Refer to the connection method according to the indoor unit.
terminal on HMK60 to 2, 3, L, N, and port on FDCW60
respectively according to the below figure. Power supply
HSB60

3
5 x 2,5 mm2 Connect power cable on X1 terminal as shown below.
2 RC-HY 20/40 must be installed via an isolator switch with a
FDCW60
1 minimum breaking gap of 3 mm. Minimum cable area must be
TB
L sized according to the fuse rating used.
N

X1

L N
HMK60
X2

HY FDCW

X1 X2

RC-HY20/40 X1
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

HMK60
Power is supplied through indoor unit. Connect the port L, N
and on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to the port L, N and
Connection between indoor unit and controller PE for controller on X2 terminal on HMK60 respectively as
shown below.
See Connection for RC-HY20/40.
RC-HY20/40
Recommended fuse size for HMK60
X1
The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Fuse size L N 1
Indoor unit (HMK60) 25A / 400V 3NAC 50Hz

Recommended cable size for HMK60


The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
HMK60
Cable size
X2
Power – Indoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
(power/communication cable) L N PE
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
(power/communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable) X1 X2
3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between controller and indoor unit HMK60


HSB60 Communication cable and pump cable are connected between
Signal cable is connected between controller and indoor unit controller and indoor unit. with screened 3 core cable for
with screened 3 core cable for HSB60. Choose correct terminal HMK60. Choose correct terminal according to the type of
according to the type of controller as shown below. controller as shown below.
<HMK60 with RC-HY20>
<HSB60 with RC-HY20>
Connect the port 19(A), 20(B) and 21(GND) on X2 terminal Communication cable
on RC-HY20 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on AA23 Connect the port 19(A), 20(B) and 21(GND) on X2 terminal
board on HSB60 respectively. on RC-HY20 to the port A, B and GND for EB101 on X1
terminal on HMK60 respectively.
GND 6
B 5 AA23-X4
A
GND
4
3 RC-HY20
B 2 X2
A 1

18

19 A
HSB60 B
20
21 GND

RC-HY20 RC-HY20
SMO RC-HY20
X2 18 X2

GND
19 A

A
B
B HMK60
20
GND X1
21

X2
X1

<HSB60 with RC-HY40>


Connect the port 1(A), 2(B) and 3(GND) on X4 terminal on
AA5 board on RC-HY40 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal

EMERGENCY
on AA23 board on HSB60 respectively. RC - HY

In case several systems are connected to one controller, connect


<HMK60 with RC-HY40>
the port 4, 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA23 board on HSB60
close to the controller to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on Connect the port 1(A), 2(B) and 3(GND) on X4 terminal on
AA23 board on another HSB60. AA5 board on RC-HY40 to the port A, B and GND for EB101
on X1 on HMK60 respectively.
HSB60 HSB60
GND 6
AA23-X4 GND 6
B 5 B 5 AA23-X4 AA5-X4 RC-HY40
A 4 A 4
GND 3 GND 3
B 2 B 2 -X8
GND B A
A A
1 2 3 4 5

1 1 -X4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ON

-X2 24
23
22
21
5 4 3 2 1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
AA5-X4
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2

RC-HY40 1

RC-HY40
-X1 -X10 -X9

SMO PE PE L N 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND
A
B

GND B A HMK60
X1
AA5-X4
5 4 3 2 1
-X8

-X4
1 2 3
8 7 6
4
5 4 3 2
5
1

ON AA5-X4
-X2 24

X1
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
EMERGENCY

-X1 -X10 -X9


PE PE L N 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RC-HY40 RC - HY

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between controller and circulation <HSB60 with RC-HY40>


pump (GP12) Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on
HSB60 RC-HY40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump
For HSB60, circulation pump (GP12) is installed outside of (EB101-GP12) respectively. Control signal cable is connected
indoor unit. Choose correct terminal according to the type of between the port 7 and 8 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC-
controller. HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as
shown below.
<HSB60 with RC-HY20>
Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on AA2-X4 4 5 6 7 8 9

RC-HY20/40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump


respectively. Control signal cable is connected between the SMO 40
RC-HY
port 1 and 2 on X2 terminal on RC-HY20 and PWM and GND 1 2 3 4

External
Externt
on circulation pump respectively as shown below.
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

PE

L
N
LEK

4 5 6 7 8 9
AA2-X4 RC-HY40
EB101-GP12
SMO 20
RC-HY AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
Externt
External
PE

L
N

10 9 8 7 6 5
AA3-X4
LEK

RC-HY20
EB101-GP12 SMO 40
RC-HY

PWM
GND
External
Externt
AA2-X4

1
PWM AA3-X4
2
GND RC-HY40
3
EB101-GP12
4

X2 RC-HY40 can connect and control up to two pumps. Connect


the port 12, 13 and 15 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-
SMO 20
RC-HY
HY40 to the port PE, N and L on second circulation pump
Externt
External
(EB102-GP12) respectively. Control cable is connected
RC-HY20 between the port 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC-
HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as
X2
EB101-GP12 shown below.

11 12 13 14 15 16
AA2-X4

SMO 40
RC-HY

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

External
Externt
PE

L
N

LEK

RC-HY40
EB102-GP12

AA2-X4

8 7 6 5 4 3
AA3-X4

SMO 40
RC-HY
PWM
GND

External
Externt

AA3-X4
RC-HY40
EB102-GP12

38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

HMK60 <HMK60 with RC-HY40>


HMK60 is equipped with circulation pump (GP12). Choose Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board to
correct terminal according to the type of controller. the port L, N and PE for GP12 on X2 terminal on HMK60
<HMK60 with RC-HY20>
respectively (same as with RC-HY20).
Also, connect the port 7 and 8 on X4 terminal on AA3 board to
Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board to
the port PWM and GND for GP12 on X1 terminal on HMK60
the port L, N and PE for GP12 on X2 terminal on HMK60
respectively as shown below.
respectively.

RC-HY 40
4 5 6 7 8 9 RC-HY20/40
AA3-X4
AA2-X4
N
PE

PWM
L

GND
1 2 3 4

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

LEK 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
RC-HY20/40
AA3-X4
AA2-X4 RC-HY40
HMK60
X2
L N PE HMK60
GP12 X1

GND
PWM
GP12
X1 X2 X1
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW
RC - HY

Also, connect the port 1 and 2 on X2 terminal to the port PWM


and GND for GP12 on X1 terminal on HMK60 respectively as
shown below.

RC-HY20
X2
PWM
1
GND
2
3
4

RC-HY20

X2
HMK60
X1
GND
PWM

GP12
X1
EMERGENCY

RC - HY

39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between controller and 3-way valve <HSB60 with RC-HY40>


(QN10/QN12) • 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10)
3-way valve is used for switching heating / hot water Refer to 3-way valve connection for HSB60 with RC-HY20.
production (QN10), or switching heating / cooling (QN12). • 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)
Install appropriate valves according to the system structure on
QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay.
site.
Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port C and
HSB60
NO on X7 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 respectively.
HSB60 is not equipped with 3-way valve. Install the valves on Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below.
right position according to the diagram and connect wires on
appropriate port according to the type of controller.
<HSB60 with RC-HY20> QN12
• 3-way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10) AA3-X7 NL
N
L
Connect the N, Control and L wire on 3-way valve to the port
2, 3 and 4 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20/40 External
Externt
respectively as shown below. RC-HY
SMO 40

1 2 3 4 5 6
AA2-X4 AA3-X7 NC NO C

SMO
RC-HY20/40 RC-HY40
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
Externt
External
L
N

LEK

RC-HY20/40
CAUTION
QN10 The relay outputs may be subjected to a max
load of 2A at resistive load (230V AC).
AA2-X4

• 3-way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)


QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay.
Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port 15 and
16 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20 respectively.
Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below.
Additional setting is necessary in menu 5.4. See Menu system
for details.

14 15 16 17
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
L
N
L N
AA2-X4
QN12

CAUTION
The relay outputs can have a max load of 2 A
at resistive load (230V AC).

40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

HMK60 <HMK60 with RC-HY40>


HMK60 is equipped with both QN10 (for switching heating / • 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10)
hot water) and QN12 (for switching heating / cooling). Connect Refer to 3-way valve connection for HMK60 with RC-HY20.
wires on appropriate port according to the type of controller.
• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)
<HMK60 with RC-HY20> Connect the port C and NO on X7 terminal on AA3 board on
• 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10) RC-HY40 to the port Brown and Black for QN12 on X2
Connect the port 2, 3 and 4 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on terminal on HMK60 respectively. Also, connect the port 0 on
RC-HY20/40 to the port N, Black and Brown for QN10 on X2 X1 terminal on RC-HY40 to N port for QN12 on X2 terminal
terminal on HMK60 respectively as shown below. on HMK60. In addition, connect the port 1 on X1 terminal to
the port C on X7 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40.
1 2 3 4 5 6
AA2-X4
X1

1 0 PE 2 3

C NO NC
AA3-X7

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA3X7
LEK

RC-HY20/40
RC-HY40

HMK60
AA2-X4 X2 HMK60
X2
Brown
Black

Brown
Black
N
X1
N

QN12
QN10

X1 X2
X1 X2
EMERGENCY

EMERGENCY
RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)


Connect the port 15 and 16 on X3 terminal on AA2 board on
RC-HY20 to the port Brown and Black for QN12 on X2
terminal on HMK60 respectively. Also, connect to the port 0 on
X1 terminal on RC-HY20 to N port for QN12 on X2 terminal on
HMK60. In addition, connect the port 1 on X1 terminal to the
port 15 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20.
X1

1 0 PE 2 3

15 1 6 17
AA2-X4

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

LEK

RC-HY20

X1
HMK60
AA2-X4 X2
N L 1 1 0 PE 4
Brown
Black
N

QN12
X1 X2
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between controller and sensors • Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater
Sensor connection is different according to the combination of This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before
indoor unit and controller. Refer to the appropriate combination 3-way valve (QN10) for switching heating/hot water (see page
mentioned below. 26 for diagram).
Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section. Connect temperature sensor, external supply after electric
Regarding other sensors not mentioned in this chapter, refer to heater (BT63) to the port 9 and 10 on terminal X2.
page 49, Optional connections. SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

6
<RC-HY20 with HSB60>
7

• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1 8


9
Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a 10
wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the BT63
11
RC-HY20
morning sun.
X2 X2
Connect the sensor to the port 3 and 6 on X2 terminal.
If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
in the sensor capsule.
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
1 diagram).
2
3 Connect temperature sensor, external supply (BT25) to the port
4 8 and 10 on X2 terminal.
5 BT1
6 SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External
RC-HY20
7
X2 6
X2
7
8
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom) 9
BT25
The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in 10

the submerged tube on the water heater. RC-HY20 11

Connect the sensor to the port 5 and 6 on X2 terminal. X2 X2

Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start


guide. • Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way
1
2
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
3 diagram).
4
5 For connection, see page 50, AUX inputs.
6
BT6 • Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
RC-HY20 7
This sensor is used in case cooling application is required.
X2 X2
For connection, see page 51, AUX inputs.
• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)
A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected
to RC-HY20 to show the water temperature at the top of the
tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
Connect the sensor to the port 4 and 6 on X2 terminal.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

1
2
3
4
5
BT7
6

RC-HY20 7

X2 X2

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<RC-HY20 with HMK60> • Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)

• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1 The temperature sensor, hot water top (BT7) is placed at the
top of the water heater. Connect the port 4 and 6 on X2
Refer to the connection RC-HY20 with HSB60.
terminal on RC-HY20 to the port BT7 on X1 terminal on
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom) HMK60.
The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed at
the bottom part of the water heater. Connect the port 5 and 6 on
1
X2 terminal on RC-HY20 to the port BT6 on X1 terminal on 2
HMK60. 3
4
5
1
6
2 RC-HY20
3 7
X2
4
X2
5

6
RC-HY20

BT7
7
X2
X2 HMK60
X1
BT6

HMK60
X1 X1

X1 RC - HY

RC - HY

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater • Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
The temperature sensor BT63 is placed on the outlet at The temperature sensor BT 25 is placed on the supply line for
additional heater. Connect the port 9 and 10 on X2 terminal on heating. Connect the port 8 and 10 on X2 terminal on RC-
RC-HY20 to the port BT63 on X1 terminal on HMK60. HY20 to the port BT25 on X1 terminal on HMK60.

6 6

7 7

8 8

9 9

10 10
RC-HY20
RC-HY20 11
11
X2
X2
X2 X2

BT25
BT63

HMK60
HMK60
X1 X1

X1 X1

RC - HY
RC - HY

• Temperature sensor BT71, return pipe


The temperature sensor BT71 is placed on the return pipe line
for water heater. For connection, see page 50, AUX inputs.
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
The temperature sensor BT64 is placed on the supply line for
cooling. For connection, see page 51, AUX inputs.

44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<RC-HY40 with HSB60> • Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater

• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1 This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before 3
way valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hotwater (see page
Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a
26 for diagram).
wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the
morning sun for example. For connection, see page54, AUX inputs.
Connect the sensor to the port 1 and 2 on X6 terminal on AA3 • Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
board. This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way
If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
in the sensor capsule. diagram).
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
Connect temperature sensor, external supply line (BT25) to the
port 5 and 6 on X6 terminal on AA3 board.
1
2 SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
3
4
BT1
4
5
5
6
6
7
7 BT25
8
8
AA3-X6 9
AA3-X6 10
RC-HY40 11
AA3-X6 AA3-X6
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom) RC-HY40
The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in
the submerged tube on the water heater. • Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating

Connect the sensor to the port 7 and 8 on X6 terminal on AA3 This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way
board. valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
diagram).
Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start
guide. Connect temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) to the
port 17 and 18 on X6 terminal on AA3 board.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
6
7 11
8 12
9 BT6 13
10 14
11 15
12 16
13 17
18
AA3-X6 AA3-X6
AA3-X6 BT71
RC-HY40 AA3-X6
RC-HY40
• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected This sensor is used in case cooling application is required.
to RC-HY40 to show the water temperature at the top of the For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs.
tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
Connect the sensor to the port 15 and 16 on X6 terminal on
AA3 board.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External

11
12
13
14
15
16
17 BT7
18

AA3-X6 AA3-X6
RC-HY40

45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<RC-HY40 with HMK60> • Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)

• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1 The temperature sensor, hot water top (BT7) is placed at the
top of the water heater. Connect the port 15 and 16 on X6
Refer to the connection RC-HY40 with HSB60.
terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT7 on X1
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom) terminal on HMK60.
The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed at
the bottom part of the water heater. Connect the port 7 and 8 on
X6 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT6 on 11
12
X1 terminal on HMK60. 13
14
15
16
17
6 18
7 AA3-X6
8 RC-HY40 AA3-X6
9
10
11
12
13
AA3-X6

BT7
RC-HY40 AA3-X6
HMK60
X1
BT6

HMK60
X1 X1

EMERGENCY
X1 RC - HY

RC-HY

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater • Temperature sensor BT71, return pipe
The temperature sensor BT63 is placed on the outlet at The temperature sensor BT71 is placed on the return pipe line
additional heater. For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs. for water heater. Connect the port 17 and 18 on X6 terminal on
AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT71 on X1 terminal on
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
HMK60.
The temperature sensor BT 25 is placed on the supply line for
heating. Connect the port 5 and 6 on X6 terminal on RC-HY40
11
to the port BT25 on X1 terminal on HMK60. 12
13
14
15
4 16
17
5
AA3-X6 18
6
7 RC-HY40
AA3-X6
8
9
10
AA3-X6 11
RC-HY40

BT71
AA3-X6

HMK60
X1
BT25

HMK60
X1
X1

X1
RC-HY

RC - HY
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
The temperature sensor BT64 is placed on the supply line for
cooling. For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs.

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Optional connections Step controlled additional heat

RC-HY20 NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for
Room sensor BT50
external voltage.
Room sensor can be connected to controller.
The room temperature sensor has up to three functions: External step controlled additional heat can be controlled by up
1. Show current room temperature in the control module to three potential-free relays in the control module (3 step
display. linear or 7 step binary). Alternatively two relays (2 step linear
or 3 step binary) can be used for step controlled additional
2. Option of changing the room temperature in °C.
heat, which means that the third relay can be used to control
3. Makes it possible to change/stabilise the room temperature. the immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator tank.
Install the sensor in a neutral position where the set temperature Step in occurs with at least 1 minute intervals and step outs
is required. A suitable location is on a free inner wall in a hall with at least 3 seconds intervals.
approx. 1.5 m above the floor.
Step 1 is connected to terminal block X2:2 on the additional
Do not install the sensor where correct room temperature relay board (AA7).
cannot be detected such as in a recess, between shelves, behind
Step 2 is connected to terminal block X2:4 on the additional
a curtain, above or close to a heat source, in a draft from an
relay board (AA7).
external door or in direct sunlight.
Step 3 or immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator
Closed radiator thermostats can also cause problems.
tank is connected to terminal block X2:6 on the additional
The control module can operate without the sensor, but if user relay board (AA7).
wants to read off the accommodation's indoor temperature in
The settings for step controlled additional heat are made in
controller display, the sensor must be installed.
menu 4.9.3 and menu 5.1.12.
Connect the room sensor to the port 7 and 10 on X2 terminal.
All additional heat can be blocked by connecting a potential-
If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in free switch function to the software controlled input on
°C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor terminal block X2 which is selected in menu 5.4.
must be activated in menu 1.9.4.
If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it X1 AA7-X2
-X1

should only have an indicatory function, not control of the


12 34 56

room temperature. -X2


1 2 3 4 5 6

1 0 PE
6
RC-HY 20 External L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7-X2
LEK

6
RC-HY
SMO
7 20/40
8 External
E
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
9
A1 A1 A1
10 BT50 -K1 -K2 -K3
A2 A2 A2
11 RC-HY20/40 X1
RC-HY20
X2 X2
If the relays are to be used for control voltage, bridge the
supply from terminal block X1:1 toX2:1, X2:3 and X2:5 on
additional relay board (AA7). Connect the neutral from the
CAUTION external additional heat to terminal block X1:0.
Changes of temperature in accommodation
Use a cable with appropriate cross section.
take time. For example, short time periods in
For connection, see the installation manual for additional
combination with underfloor heating will not
heater.
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.

Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section.

48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<Connection example with HMK60> Relay output for emergency mode


Connect the port 2, 4, 6 on X2 terminal on AA7 board on RC-
HY20/40 to the port K1, K2, K3 on X2 terminal on HMK60
NOTE
respectively. Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for
external voltage.

X1 AA7-X2
When the switch (SF1) is in " " mode (emergency mode) the
-X1
12 34 56

-X2
1 2 3 4 5 6 circulation pump is activated (EB101-GP12).
1 0 PE
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

6
AA7-X2

LEK
CAUTION
RC-HY
SMO 20/40
No hot water is produced when emergency
mode is activated.
N L 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY 20/40
The emergency mode relay can be used to activate external
X1
additional heat. Between the port 2 and 4 is closed during
emergency mode. An external thermostat must be connected to
the control circuit (port 4) to control the temperature. Ensure
HMK60
that the heating medium circulates through the external
additional heating.

X2
K1 K2 K3

PE 2 3 4 X1
X1 X2

RC-HY
SMO 20/40
External
Externt
MERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY F

RC-HY20/40 X1

If the relay is to be used for control voltage, bridge the supply


from terminal block X1:1 to X1:2 and connect neutral and
control voltage from the external additional heat to X1:0 (N)
and X1:4 (L).

X1

1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20/40
Externt
External

N L
RC-HY20/40 X1

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<Connection example with HMK60> External circulation pump


Connect the port 4 on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to Connect the external circulation pump (GP10) to terminal
EMERGENCY on X2 terminal on HMK60, as well as the port block X4:9 (PE), X4:10 (N) and X4:11 (230 V) on the base
0 on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to Neutral on HMK60. board (AA2) as illustrated.
8 9 10 11 12 13
AA2-X4
A2
X1 A1
RC-HY
SMO 20/40
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
External
Externt

PE
1 0 PE 2 3

L
N
LEK

RC-HY20/40
GP10
RC-HY
SMO 20/40
AA2-X4

AUX inputs
RC-HY20/40 X1 Other external inputs are available on the port 11 through 18
N on X2 terminal on RC-HY20.
HMK60
AUX1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 correspond to the port 11, 12, 13, 15,
X2
16 and 17 respectively. Port 14 and 18 are GND and are
common to the all auxiliary circuit. Connect a sensor or switch
K1
K2
K3
EMERGENCY

between AUX and GND with a two-core cable with a minimum


cross section of 0.5mm2.
X1 X2
11
AUX1
12 AUX2
13 AUX3
1
2
3
5 4

14
GND
6
7
8
9
10
13 12 11

15
AUX4
EMERGENCY

14
17 16 15

16
AUX5
18
21 20 19

RC - HY RC - HY
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
17 AUX6
18 GND
19
Set the supply temperature with the thermostat T1 in case of LEK
20
RC-HY20 21
emergency mode. The setting range is 6-67℃. For floor
heating, the setting must be min.20℃ to max. 35-45℃ in order X2

to preserve heat comfort in the room and ensure effective


system operation. When the temperature is set at 35℃ or Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4.
higher, be careful not to cause low temperature burn.
soft in/outputs 5.4

block heating

activate temp lux

not used

not used

not used

not used

■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74)


Additional room sensor (BT74) is applied in case user wants
to determine the operation mode (cooling/heating) with a
temperature in a particular room.
This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is
available.
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71)
Temperature sensor BT71 is applied in case additional heater
is placed after 3-way valve (see page 27 and 28 for diagram).

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64) ■Contact for activation of “temporary lux”
Temperature sensor BT64 is required in case 4-pipe system Temporary hot water production function “temporary lux” is
is used for cooling operation. (see page 26-28 for diagram) activated with this signal. Connect the terminals with a
This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is potential-free switch and choose the function in menu 5.4.
activated. “Temporary lux” is activated only when the switch is closed.
■ Contact for external tariff blocking ■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
In cases where external tariff blocking is required it must be Target temperature offset for supply temperature or room
connected to terminal block X2. temperature can be done with this signal.
Tariff blocking means that the additional heat, the When a room sensor is connected and activated, the target
compressor, heating and cooling are disconnected by room temperature is offset in ℃ if the switch is closed.
connecting a potential free switch function to the input When a room sensor is not connected, target supply water
selected in menu 5.4. temperature (heat curve) is offset instead. The degree of
A closed contact results in the electrical output being offset can be set in menu 5.4.
disconnected. ■Switch for external alarm
■ Switch for “SG ready” Alarms from external devices can be connected to the control
and appear as an info alarm. Potential-free signal of NO or
NOTE NC type can be connected.
This function can only be used in mains networks ■Switch for external blocking
that support the "SG Ready"-standard . This function is used in case certain operation mode needs to
"SG Ready" requires two AUX inputs. be prohibited. The operation at selected operation mode is
prohibited when the switch is closed. Following functions
This function can only be used in power supply networks that can be managed.
support the “SG Ready” standard. “SG Ready” requires two Additional heat
AUX inputs.
compressor operation
“SG Ready” is a smart tariff management scheme in which
heating mode
electricity supplier can affect indoor and hot water temperature
or simply prohibits additional heat and/or the compressor cooling mode
operation in heat pump at certain period of the day. You can hot water mode
choose which operation mode is affected by this function in
menu 4.1.5 after the function is activated.
Choose two external input circuits and connect potential-free
switches, and set “SG Ready A” and “SG Ready B” in menu
5.4. The system works differently according to the combination
of the circuit open/closed.
Blocking (A: Closed, B: Open)
“SG Ready” is active. Compressor operation and additional
heat is prohibited.
Normal mode (A: Open, B: Open)
“SG Ready” is not active. No effect on the system.
Low price mode (A: Open, B: Closed)
"SG Ready" is active. The system operates to provide higher
capacity than normal mode by using lower tariff electricity.
You can select the operation mode (heating/hot water/
cooling) affected by this function in menu 4.1.5.
Overcapacity mode (A: Closed, B: Closed)
“SG Ready” is active. The system supplies higher capacity
than Low price mode since the electricity price is supposed
to be very low in this mode. You can select the operation
mode (heating/hot water/cooling) affected by this function in
menu 4.1.5.

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• AUX outputs For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump
External output is available on the port 15 to 17 on X4 terminal control (GP10).
on AA2 board on RC-HY20. The relay output can have a max
load of 2A at resistive load. NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external
voltage.

14 15 16 17
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

myUpway™
RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK
Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP)
RC-HY20 External
Externt
with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display
unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the
AA2-X4 control module for cable routing.

Following functions are available. Select the function in menu


5.4.
Indication of buzzer alarm
When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between
the port 15 and 16. During normal operation, the port 15 and AA4-X9
-
17 is closed.
Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
cooling)
When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
becomes closed between the port 15 and 16. By using this
signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 40 to 41
External pump control (GP10)
External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 27 for diagram).
Connect the circulation pump as shown below using the port
15 and 16 on X4 terminal.

14 15 16 17
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
L
N
PE L N PE
AA2-X4

Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
(refer to page 22 for diagram).

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

RC-HY40 Room sensor BT50

Load monitor Refer to Room sensor BT50 for RC-HY20 for function and
installation place.
In case many power electrical appliances are connected in the
property and the electric heater is energised at the same time, Connect the room sensor to terminal block X6:3 and X6:4 on
there is a risk of tripping the main fuse of the property. the input board (AA3).

The control module has an integrated load monitor that controls If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in
the power steps of the electric heater by disconnecting step by °C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor
step in the event of overload in a phase. It will be reconnected must be activated in menu 1.9.4.
if other current consumption is reduced. If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it
Connecting current sensors should only have an indicatory function, not control of the
room temperature.
A current sensor (BE1 - BE3) should be installed on each
incoming phase conductor in to the electrical distribution unit SMO External
RC-HY40 Externt
to measure the current. This is best done in the electrical 2
distribution unit. 3
4
Connect the current sensors to a multi-core cable in an 5
6
enclosure next to the electrical distribution unit. Use a multi- 7 BT50
8
core cable of at least 0.5 mm² from the enclosure to the heat 9
RC-HY40
pump. AA3-X6 AA3-X6
Connect the cable to terminal block X4:1 to 4.
X4:1 is the common terminal block for the three current
sensors. CAUTION
Set the size of the property's main fuse in menu 5.1.12. Changes of temperature in accommodation
Incoming electricity
Inkommande el take time. For example, short time periods in
P EN L1 L2 L3 combination with underfloor heating will not
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.

• Step controlled additional heat


Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
• Relay output for emergency mode
Electrical distribution unit Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
Control module
Värmepump • External circulation pump
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.

AA3-X4
6 5 4 3 2 1

RC-HY
SMO 40
External
Externt
AA3-X4
RC-HY40
BE3 BE1
BE2

53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AUX inputs AUX outputs
Up to 6 other external inputs are available on RC-HY40. External output is available on the port NC, NO and C on X7
AUX1 through 3 correspond to the port 9/10, 11/12, 13/14 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40. The relay output can
respectively on X6 terminal on AA3 board. AUX4 through 6 have a max load of 2A at resistive load.
correspond to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X2 terminal on RC-HY40.
Port 4 on X2 terminal is GND and is common to AUX4 X1 AA7-X2
through 6. Connect a sensor or switch between AUX and GND
-X1

12 34 56
with a two-core cable with a minimum cross section of -X2
1 2 3 4 5 6

0.5mm2. 1 2 3 4
1 0 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7-X2
AUX1 LEK

RC-HY
SMO 40
AUX2 AA3-X6
External
Externt
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
AUX3 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3
A2 A2 A2
RC-HY40 X1

Following functions are available. Select the function in menu


X2 5.4.
RC-HY40
Indication of buzzer alarm
When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
GND

the port NO and C. During normal operation, the port NC


and C is closed.
Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4.
cooling)
soft in/outputs 5.4 When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
becomes closed between the port NO and C. By using this
block heating signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
activate temp lux or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 40 and
not used
41
not used
External pump control (GP10)
not used External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
not used placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 27 and 28 for diagram).
Connect the circulation pump using the port NO and C on
■ Temperature sensor, external supply at additional heat before X7 terminal on AA3 board as shown below.
reversing valve (BT63)
Temperature sensor BT63 is applied in case additional heater
is placed before 3-way valve (see page 26 for diagram)
The following functions are available. For details, see AUX PE N L
PE
inputs for RC-HY20. N
L
■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74)
External
Externt
AA3-X7
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) RC-HY40 RC-HY
SMO 40
■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64)
■ Contact for external tariff blocking AA3-X7 NC NO C

■ Switch for “SG ready”


■Contact for activation of “temporary lux”
■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
■Switch for external alarm
■Switch for external blocking

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
(refer to page 22 for diagram).
For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump
control (GP10).

NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external
voltage.

myUpway™
Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP)
with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display
unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the
control module for cable routing.

AA4-X9
-

55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Commissioning and adjusting


Preparations CAUTION
Open the hot water intake valves before heating the system
Before starting commissioning, check the followings; up for the first time or after a longer break in its operation
The signal cable is connected between indoor unit and in order to check whether the storage tank is filled with
water and the cut-off valve at the cold water inlet is not
outdoor unit as well as indoor unit and controller according closed.
to the instruction.
The power cable is connected to indoor unit, outdoor unit
and controller according to the instruction.
Climate system
Operation switch in controller is in the position .
1. Open the vent at the top of the heating system.
The service valves on outdoor unit (QM35 and QM36) are
open. 2. Open all shut-off valves, where installed, so that water flows
into all circuits.
Drain valve is closed before filling water in the system.
3. Open the valve for filling the heating circuit and fill it with
Temperature limiter and electrical switch are not tripped.
water.
The system is filled with water and well vented.
4. Close the vent when water comes out continuously without
There are no leaks on the water pipe. bubbles.
5. Check the manometer and close the filling valve when the
Filling and venting pressure reaches the required value (2 bar is recommended).
6. Start the circulation pump of the heating system, and open
Hot water tank the vent from time to time and release the all remaining air
1. Open the hot water tap as well as venting valve if applicable, in the heating system.
and then open the cold water cut-off valve at the inlet. 7. Open safety valve until the pressure of the heating system
2. Fill the storage tank until obtaining uniform water outflow at drops down to about 1 bar. If the pressure drops below 1 bar
the hot water tap, and then close the hot water tap and during venting, add additional water in the circuit.
venting valve.
3. Fill the water heater coil in the tank. See Climate system for Inspection of installation
details.
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the Current regulations require that the climate system is inspected
procedure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page before it is commissioned. The inspection must be carried out
18): by a suitably qualified person and must be documented. Do not
replace any part of the system without carrying out new
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
checks.
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulati on system, connect
it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating medium
to the coil.

CAUTION
If there is an electric heating module installed in the
storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start-up and inspection Cooling mode


In case the climate system contains a cooling circuit, activate
Before start-up cooling function in menu 5.11.1.1. After that, you can choose
1 In case of cascade connection, check if each indoor unit has cooling mode indication in menu 5.4 for the AUX output.
a unique address. See Cascade connection setting on page
Cleaning particle filter
35 for details.
Clean the particle filter (HQ1) after installation.
2. For an outdoor unit equipped with a crank case heater, it is
necessary to supply power 6-8 hours before starting 1. Close valve QM31 and the valve by the particle filter (HQ1).
compressor operation to heat the compressor with the heater. 2. Open the safety valve (QM20) to ensure that the pressure in
To do this, supply power to whole system and disable the HSB60 drops.
compressor operation from menu 5.2.2 on the controller. 3. Clean the particle filter (HQ1) as illustrated.
Disable additional heater as well if necessary.
3. After 6-8 hours, enable the compressor operation in menu 1

LEK
5.2.2 on the controller and enable the additional heater in
menu 4.9.2 and 4.9.3 on the controller.
4. Start commissioning by the following steps.
*Step 2 and 3 are not necessary for FDCW60VNX-A.

Commissioning with heat pump


Start guide is shown on the display on the controller when it is
turned ON for the first time. Follow the start guide in the 2

LEK
display, or choose menu 5.7 to show the start guide. For details,
see Start guide on page 58.
Commissioning with additional heater
only
Follow the start guide in the display as same as commissioning
with heat pump, and then follow the list below.
1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
Secondary adjustment
2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
Air is initially released from the hot water and venting may be
the OK button.
necessary. If bubbling sounds can be heard from the heat pump,
3. Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button. the circulation pump and radiators the entire system will
require further venting. When the system is stable (correct
CAUTION pressure and all air eliminated) the automatic heating control
When commissioning without MHI air/water heat pump an system can be set as required
alarm communication error may appear in the display.
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").

3-way valve operation check


1. Activate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
2. Check that the reversing valve opens or is open for hot water
charging.
3. Deactivate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
AUX function check
To check any function connected to the AUX socket,
1. Activate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-HY40)”
in menu 5.6.
2. Check the desired function.
3. Deactivate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-
HY40)” in menu 5.6.

57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start guide Operation in the start guide


A. Page B. Name and menu number
NOTE
Fill in the climate system with water before the switch is set language 4.6
to " "

1. Set the control module's switch to " ".


2. Follow the instructions in the start guide in the control
module display. If the start guide does not start when you
start the control module, start it manually in menu 5.7.

TIP
See page 63 for a more in-depth introduction to the If the start guide is left on this page it closes
installation’s control system (operation, menus etc.). automatically in
60 min

C. Option / setting
Commissioning
The start guide is displayed when installation is started, It A. Page
describes what needs to carry out at the first start together with
basic settings during installation. You can see the current page of the start guide.
The start guide is displayed so that it cannot be bypassed in Scroll between the pages of the start guide as follows:
order to carry out the start-up correctly. You can start the start 1. Turn the control knob until the arrow is marked in the top
guide later in menu 5.7. left corner (at the page number).
During the start-up guide, reversing valves and the shunt are 2. Press OK button to proceed to the next page in the start
run back and forth to help vent the heat pump. guide.
B. Name and menu number
CAUTION
As long as the start guide is active, no function in the heat You can see the menu name of this page. The number refers to
pump will start automatically. the menu number in the control system.
Each time the controller is ON, the guide will appear until it To read more about affected menus, see the help menu or read
is completed on the last page. the user manual.

C. Option / setting
Make settings for the system here.

D. Help menu
In many menus there is a symbol indicating that extra help
is available.
To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
scroll between using the control knob.

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Heating/cooling curve setting The optimum slope depends on the climate conditions in your
location, the type of heating device (radiators or under floor
heating curve 1.9.1.1 heating) and how well insulated the house is.
system
The curve is set when the heating installation is installed, but
flow temperature °C may need adjusting later. Normally, the curve will not need
further adjustment.

CAUTION
In the event of making fine adjustments of the indoor
temperature, the curve must be offset up or down instead,
outdoor temp. °C
this is done in menu 1.1 temperature .

cooling curve 1.9.1.2 Curve offset


system
The target temperature can be offset in parallel over the entire
flow temperature °C
outdoor temperature range by this function. This is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
The target temperature can be parallel offset in the entire
outdoor temperature range with this function. It is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
outdoor temp. °C
Supply temperature
°C
70
Offset
Förskju tenheating curve
vär mekurva

heating curve 60

Setting range: 0 – 15 50

Default value: 9 40

30
cooling curve (accessory required)
Setting range: 0 – 9 10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
UTETEMPERATUR
Outdoor temperature
Default value: 0
Flow line temperature – maximum and
The prescribed heating curve for your house can be viewed in minimum values
the menu heating curve . The task of the heating curve is to This function is used in order to limit max-min supply
give an even indoor temperature, regardless of the outdoor temperature. The heating / cooling curve becomes flat beyond
temperature, and thereby energy efficient operation. From this max / min target temperature.
heating curve, the control module determines the temperature
of the water to the heating system, supply temperature, and CAUTION
there by the indoor temperature. Select the heating curve and Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
read off how the supply temperature changes at different temperature set between 35 and 45°C. Take care not to
outdoor temperatures here. If there is cooling function, the cause low temperature burns in case it is set higher than
35°C.
same settings can be made for the cooling curve.
Must be restricted with underfloor cooling min. flow line
Curve coefficient temp. to prevent condensation.
The heating/cooling curve shows the relation between the Check the max temperature for your floor with your
target supply temperature and the corresponding outdoor installer/floor supplier.
temperature. A steep curve indicates that supply temperature
becomes higher at low outdoor air temperature in heating and
it becomes lower at high outdoor air temperature in cooling. Supply temperature
°C
70
Supply temperature
°C
70 60
Steeper
Brantare curve slope
kur vlutning Maximum value
Maximivärde
60
50

50
40

40
30 Minimum value
Minimivärde
30

10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
Outdoor temperature
UTETEMPERATUR
10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40°C
Outdoor tempera
UTETEMPERATUR

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

The figure at the end of the curve indicates the curve number. Hot water circulation setting
The figure beside the thermometer icon gives the curve offset.
Use the control knob to set a new value. hot water recirc.
Confirm the new setting by pressing the OK button. operating time
Curve 0 is an own curve created in menu 1.9.7.
Setting range: 1 – 60 min
To select another curve (slope): Default value: 60 min
1. Press OK button to access the setting mode downtime
2. Select a new curve. The curves are numbered from 0 to 15, Setting range: 0 – 60 min
and the bigger number curve has steeper slope.
Default value: 0 min
Curve 0 means that own curve (menu 1.9.7) is used.
3. Press OK button to exit the setting.
Set the hot water circulation for up to three periods per day
To read off a curve: here. During the set periods the hot water circulation pump will
1. Turn the control knob so that the ring on the shaft with the run according to the settings above.
outdoor temperature is marked. "operating time" decide how long the hot water circulation
2. Press OK button. pump must run per operating instance.
3. Follow the grey line up to the curve and out to the left to "downtime" decide how long the hot water circulation pump
read off the value for the supply temperature at the selected must be stationary between operating instances.
outdoor temperature. Hot water circulation is activated in menu 5.4 "soft inputs and
4. You can now select to take read outs for different outdoor outputs".
temperatures by turning the control knob to the right or left
and read off the corresponding flow temperature.
5. Press OK or Back button to exit read off mode.

TIP
Wait 24 hours before making a new setting, so that the
room temperature has time to stabilise.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve slope by one increment.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve slope by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve offset by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve offset by one increment.

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

SG Ready
This function can only be used in mains networks that support
the "SG Ready"-standard .
Make settings for the function "SG Ready" here.
Low price mode means that the electricity supplier has a low
tariff and the system uses this to reduce costs.
Over capacity mode means that the electricity supplier has set
the tariff very low and the system uses this to reduce the costs
as much as possible.
affect room temperature
Here you set whether room temperature should be affected
when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset of the
indoor temperature is increased by "+1". If a room sensor is
installed and activated, the desired room temperature increases
by 1 °C.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset for
the indoor temperature is increased by"+2".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature increases by 2 °C.
affect hot water
Here you set whether the temperature of the hot water should
be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode on "SG Ready" the stop temperature of
the hot water is set as high as possible at only compressor
operation (immersion heater not permitted).
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the hot water is set to
"luxury" (immersion heater permitted).
affect cooling (accessory required)
Here you set whether room temperature during cooling
operation should be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation the
indoor temperature is not affected.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation
the parallel offset for the indoor temperature is reduced by"-1".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature decreases by 1 °C.

NOTE
The function must be connected to two AUX inputs and
activated in menu 5.4.

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Control
Display unit

A Display
B Status lamp
C OK button
D Back button
E Control knob
F Switch
G USB port

A Display F Switch (SF1)


Instructions, settings and operational information are shown The switch shows three positions:
on the display. The easy-to-read display and menu system, ■ On ( )
make it easy to navigate between various menus and options, ■ Standby ( )
set comfort and get the necessary information. ■ Emergency mode ( )
B Status lamp Emergency mode must only be used in the event of a fault
on the control module. In this mode, the compressor in the
The status lamp indicates the status of the control module.
heat pump is turned off and the immersion heater is
It:
activated.
■ lights green during normal operation.
The control module display is not illuminated and the status
■ lights yellow in emergency mode.
lamp lights yellow.
■ lights red in the event of an alarm.
C OK button G USB port
The USB port is hidden behind the plastic badge of the
The OK button is used to:
product name.
■ confirm selections of sub menus/options/set values/page in
The USB port is used to update the software.
the start guide.
D Back button
The back button is used to:
■ go back to the previous menu.
■ change a setting that has not been confirmed.
E Control knob
The control knob can be turned to the right or left. You can:
■ scroll in menus and between options.
■ increase and decrease values.
■ change pages in multiple page instructions
(for example help text and service info).

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu system Symbols in the display


The following symbols can appear in the display during
Outdoor Indoor temperature- operation.
tempeature (if room sensors are installed)
Symbol Description

-5o This symbol appears when there is informa-


Hot water temp. tion to be noticed in menu 3.1.
22o
INDOOR CLIMATE

54o These two symbols indicate whether the


MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER compressor in the outdoor unit or additional
Estimated amount of heat in the installation is blocked via
hot water
INFO controller.
These functions will be blocked for example,
Information about Temporary lux when either of the operation mode is blocked
operation (if activated)
in menu 4.2, when blocking of either function
is scheduled in menu 4.9.5, or when an alarm
Menu 1 - INDOOR CLIMATE for blocking the operation occurs.
Setting and scheduling the indoor climate. See information in
the help menu or user manual. Blocking the compressor.
Menu 2 - HOT WATER
Blocking additional heat.
Setting and scheduling hot water production. See information
in the help menu or user manual.
This symbol appears if periodic increase or
This menu only appears if a water heater is installed in the lux mode for the hot water is activated.
system.
Menu 3 - INFO This symbol indicates if "holiday setting" is
active in menu 4.7.
Display of temperature and other operating information and
access to the alarm log. See information in the help menu or This symbol indicates if the controller has
user manual. contact with myUpway.
Menu 4 - MY INSTALLATION
This symbol indicates if cooling is active.
Setting time, date, language, display, operating mode etc. See
information in the help menu or user manual.
Menu 5 - SERVICE
Advanced settings. These settings are not available to the end
user. The menu is made visible by pressing the Back button for
7 seconds in the top screen. See page 68 for details.

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu number – marked sub menu Name and menu number – main menu

Symbol –
INDOOR CLIMATE 1
main menu

INDOOR CLIMATE 1.1 temperature 25.0O

scheduling
MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER
advanced

INFO

Marked main
menu
Symbols – sub menus Name – sub menus Status information – sub menus

Operation Setting a value


To move the cursor, turn the control knob to the left time & date 4.4
or the right. The marked position is brighter and/or time
has a light frame. 24 h

Selecting menu 12 h
date
To advance in the menu system select a main menu by marking
day
it and then pressing the OK button. A new window opens with
sub menus. month

Select one of the sub menus by marking it and then pressing year
the OK button.
Selecting options
comfort mode 2.2 Values to be changed

To set a value:
economy
1. Mark the value you want to set using the control
normal knob.
luxury 2. Press the OK button. The background of the value
becomes green, which means that you have accessed
the setting mode.
3. Turn the control knob to the right to increase the
value and to the left to reduce the value.
Alternative 4. Press the OK button to confirm the value you have
set. To change and return to the original value, press
In an options menu the current selected option is
the Back button.
indicated by a green tick.
To select another option:
1. Mark the applicable option. One of the options is pre-
selected (white).
2. Press the OK button to confirm the selected option.
The selected option has a green tick.

64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Use the virtual keyboard Help menu


In many menus there is a symbol that indicates that extra
help is available.
To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press the OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
Different keyboards scroll between using the control knob.

In some menus where text may require entering, a virtual


keyboard is available.

Depending on the menu, you can gain access to different


character sets which you can select using the control knob. To
change character table, press the Back button. If a menu only
has one character set, the keyboard is displayed directly.
When you have finished writing, mark "OK" and press the OK
button.
Scroll through the windows
A menu can consist of several windows. Turn the control knob
to scroll between the windows.

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

Scroll through the windows in the start


guide

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

1. Turn the control knob until one of the arrows in the top left
corner (at the page number) has been marked.
2. Press the OK button to skip between the steps in the start
guide.

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu list
"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
1 INDOOR CLIMATE
1.1 - temperature 1.1.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.1.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.3 - scheduling 1.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9 - advanced 1.9.1 curve 1.9.1.1 heating curve ✔ ✔
1.9.1.2 cooling curve ** ✔ ✔
1.9.2 external adjustment ✔ ✔
1.9.3 min. flow line temp. 1.9.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.4 room sensor settings ✔ ✔
1.9.5 cooling settings * ✔ ✔
1.9.7 own curve 1.9.7.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.7.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.8 point offset ✔ ✔
2 HOTWATER
2.1 temporary lux ✔ ✔
2.2 comfort mode ✔ ✔
2.3 scheduling ✔ ✔
2.9 advanced 2.9.1 periodic increase ✔ ✔
2.9.2 hot water recirc. * ✔ ✔
3 INFO
3.1 service info ✔ ✔
3.2 compressor info ✔ ✔
3.3 add. heat info ✔ ✔
3.4 alarm log ✔ ✔
3.5 indoor temp. log ✔ ✔
4. MY SYSTEM
4.1 plus functions 4.1.3 internet 4.1.3.1 myUpway™ ✔ ✔
4.1.3.8 tcp/ip settings ✔ ✔
4.1.3.9 proxy settings ✔ ✔
4.1.5 SG Ready ✔ ✔
4.1.6 smart price adaption™ ✔ ✔
4.1.8 smart energy source™ 4.1.8.1 settings - ✔
4.1.8.2 set. Price - ✔
4.1.8.3 CO2 impact - ✔
4.1.8.4 tariff periods, electricity - ✔
4.1.8.6 tariff per, ext. shunt add - ✔
4.1.8.7 tariff per, ext. step add - ✔
4.2 op. mode ✔ ✔
4.3 my icons ✔ ✔
4.4 time & date ✔ ✔

66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
4.6 language ✔ ✔
4.7 holiday setting ✔ ✔
4.9 advanced 4.9.1 op. prioritisation ✔ ✔
4.9.2 auto mode setting ✔ ✔
4.9.3 degree minute setting ✔ ✔
4.9.4 factory setting user ✔ ✔
4.9.5 schedule blocking ✔ ✔
4.9.6 schedule silent mode ✔ ✔
5 SERVICE
5.1 operating settings 5.1.1 hot water settings * ✔ ✔
5.1.2 max flow line temperature ✔ ✔
5.1.3 max diff flow line temp. ✔ ✔
5.1.4 alarm actions ✔ ✔
5.1.12 addition ✔ ✔
5.1.14 flow set. climate system ✔ ✔
5.1.22 heat pump testing ✔ ✔
5.1.23 compressor curve ✔ ✔
5.2 system settings 5.2.2 installed slaves ✔ ✔
5.2.3 docking ✔ ✔
5.2.4 accessories ✔ ✔
5.3 accessory settings 5.3.2 shunt controlled add. heat * - ✔
5.3.3 extra climate system * - ✔
5.3.6 step controlled add. Heat - ✔
5.3.8 hot water comfort * - ✔
5.3.20 flow sensor* - ✔
5.4 soft in/outputs ✔ ✔
5.5 factory setting service ✔ ✔
5.6 forced control ✔ ✔
5.7 start guide ✔ ✔
5.8 quick start ✔ ✔
5.9 floor drying function ✔ ✔
5.10 change log ✔ ✔
5.11 slave settings 5.11.1 EB101 5.11.1.1 heat pump ✔ ✔
5.11.1.2 charge pump (GP12) ✔ ✔
5.11.2 EB102 - ✔
5.11.3 EB103 - ✔
5.11.4 EB104 - ✔
5.11.5 EB105 - ✔
5.11.6 EB106 - ✔
5.11.7 EB107 - ✔
5.11.8 EB108 - ✔
5.12 country ✔ ✔

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Sub-menus Menu 5.1 - operating settings


Menu SERVICE has orange text and is intended for the Operating settings can be made for the control module in the
advanced user. This menu has several sub-menus. sub menus.
Status information for the relevant menu can be found on the Menu 5.1.1 - hot water settings
display to the right of the menus.
economy
operating settings: Operating settings for the control
Setting range start temp. economy: 5 – 55 °C
module.
Factory setting start temp. economy: 42 °C
system settings: System settings for the control module, Setting range stop temp. economy: 5 – 60 °C
activating accessories etc. Factory setting stop temp. economy: 48 °C
soft in/outputs: Setting software controlled in and normal
outputs on the input card (AA3) and terminal block (X2). Setting range start temp. normal: 5 – 60 °C
factory setting service: Total reset of all settings (including Factory setting start temp. normal: 46 °C
settings available to the user ) to default values. Setting range stop temp. normal: 5 – 65 °C
forced control: Forced control of the different components in Factory setting stop temp. normal: 50 °C
the indoor module. luxury
start guide: Manual start of the start guide which is run the Setting range start temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
first time when the control module is started. Factory setting start temp. lux: 49 °C
quick start: Quick starting the compressor. Setting range stop temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
Factory setting stop temp. lux: 53 °C
NOTE stop temp. per. increase
Incorrect settings in the service menus can damage the Setting range: 55 – 70 °C
installation. Factory setting: 55 °C
charge method
Setting range: target temp, delta temp
Default value: delta temp
Here you set the start and stop temperature of the hot water for
the different comfort options in menu 2.2 as well as the stop
temperature for periodic increase in menu 2.9.1.
The charge method for hot water mode is selected here. "delta
temp" is recommended for heaters with charge coil, "target
temp" for heaters with domestic coil.
Menu 5.1.2 - max flow line temperature
climate system
Setting range: 5 – 70 °C
Default value: 60 °C
Set the maximum supply temperature for the climate system
here. If the installation has more than one climate system,
individual maximum supply temperatures can be set for each
system. Climate systems 2 – 8 cannot be set to a higher max
supply temperature than climate system 1.

CAUTION
Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
temperature set between 35 and 45°C.
Be careful not to cause low temperature burn if it is set at
35°C or higher.
Check the max floor temperature with your floor supplier.

68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.1.3 - max diff flow line temp. <Add. Type: shurt controlled (RC-HY40 only)>
max diff compressor prioritised additional heat
Setting range: 1 – 25 °C Setting range: on/off
Default value: 10 °C Factory setting: off
max diff addition minimum running time
Setting range: 1 – 24 °C Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 7 °C Default value: 12 h
Here you set the maximum permitted difference between the min temp.
calculated and actual supply temperature during compressor Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
mode and add. heat mode. Max diff. additional heat can never Default value: 55 °C
exceed max diff. compressor
mixing valve amplifier
max diff compressor
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
When the current supply temperature deviates from the set Default value: 1.0
value compared to that calculated, the heat pump is forced to mixing valve step delay
stop irrespective of the degreeminute value.
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
If the current supply temperature exceeds the calculated flow Default values: 30 s
temperature plus the set value, the degree minute value is set to
0. The compressor in the heat pump stops when there is only a fuse size
heating demand. Setting range: 1 – 200 A
Factory setting: 16 A
max diff addition
transformation ratio
If "addition” is selected and activated in menu 4.2 and the
Setting range: 300 – 3000
present supply temp exceeds the calculated temperature plus
Factory setting: 300
the set value, the additional heat is forced to stop.
Select this option if shunt controlled additional heat is
Menu 5.1.4 - alarm actions connected.
Select how to control the heat pump in the event of an alarm. Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
You can choose to stop producing hot water and/or reduce the minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
room temperature. External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
CAUTION You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
If no alarm action is selected, it can result in time.
higher energy consumption in the event of an Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
alarm. external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
Menu 5.1.12 - addition otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
add type: step controlled
max step
TIP
Setting range (binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Setting range (binary stepping activated): 0 – 7
Default value: 3
fuse size Menu 5.1.14 - flow set. climate system
Setting range: 1 – 200 A presettings
Factory setting: 16 A Setting range: radiator, floor heat., rad. + floor heat.
You can set the maximum number of permitted additional Default value: radiator
heat steps, if there is internal additional heat in the tank (only Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C
accessible if the additional heat is positioned after QN10), The factory setting of DOT value depends on the country
whether binary stepping is to be used and the size of the that has been given for the product's location.
fuse. The example below refers to Sweden.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C
own setting
Setting range dT at DOT: 0.0 – 25.0

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Factory setting dT at DOT: 10.0 Menu 5.2 - system settings


Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C Make different system settings for your installation here, e.g.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C activate the connected heat pump and which accessories are
Select the type of heating distribution system. installed.
dT at DOT is the difference in degrees between flow and return
Menu 5.2.2 - installed heat pump
temperatures at dimensioned outdoor temperature.
If a heat pump is connected to the master installation, set it
Menu 5.1.22 - heat pump testing here.
For RC-HY40, you can set slave unit to be connected.
NOTE
There are two ways of activating connected slaves. You can
This menu is intended for testing heat pump according to
different standards. either mark the alternative in the list or use the automatic
Use of this menu for other reasons may result in your function "search installed slaves".
installation not functioning as intended. search installed slaves
Mark “search installed slaves" and press the OK button to
This menu contains several sub-menus, one for each standard. automatically find connected slaves for the master heat pump.
Menu 5.1.23 - compressor curve Menu 5.2.3 – docking (RC-HY 40 only)
Set whether the compressor in the heat pump should work to a Enter how your system is docked regarding pipes, for example
particular curve under specific requirements or if it should to hot water heating and heating the building.
work to predefined curves.
This menu has a docking memory which means that the control
You can set a curve for each operation mode (heat, hot water, system remembers how a particular reversing valve is docked
coolingetc.) by unticking "auto", turning the control knob until and automatically enters the correct docking the next time you
a temperature is marked and pressing OK. You can set at what use the same reversing valve.
temperature max- min frequencies will occur.
This menu consists of several windows (one for each operation Slave (heat pump) Workspace for docking
mode). Use the navigation arrow in the top left corner to
change between the windows. docking 5.2.3
slave 1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8

Compressor Marking frame

Slave: Here you select for which heat pump the docking
setting is to be made.
Compressor: Select if the compressor in the heat pump is
blocked (factory setting), or standard (docked for example to
pool heating, hot water charging and heating the building).
Marking frame: Move around the marking frame using the
control knob. Use the OK button to select what you want to
change and to confirm setting in the options box that appears to
the right.
Workspace for docking: The system docking is drawn
here.

70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Symbol Description Menu 5.3 - accessory settings


Compressor (blocked) The operating settings for accessories that are installed and
activated are made in the sub-menus for this.
Menu 5.3.2 - shunt controlled add. Heat
Compressor (standard)
prioritised additional heat
Setting range: on/off
Reversing valves for hot water, cooling. Factory setting: off
The designations above the reversing valve start diff additional heat
indicate where it is electrically connected
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM
(EB101 = Slave 1, etc.).
Default values: 400 GM
Hot water charging minimum running time
Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 12 h
Heating (heating the building, includes any
extra climate system) min temp.
Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
Cooling Default value: 55 °C
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
Menu 5.2.4 - accessories Default value: 1.0
Set which accessories are installed on the installation here. mixing valve step delay
If the water heater is connected, hot water charging must be Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated here. Default values: 30 s
Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
time.
Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.3 - extra climate system
use in heating mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: on
use in cooling mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
Default value: 1.0
mixing valve step delay
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
Default values: 30 s
Here you select which climate system (2 - 8) you wish to set.
In the next menu you can make settings for the climate system

71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

that you have selected. If this function is activated, you can set Default value: 55 °C
"cooling flow temp. at +20°C" and "cooling flow temp. at mixing valve amplifier
+40°C" for each climate system where the function is
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
activated.
Default value: 1.0
CAUTION mixing valve step delay
This setting option only appears if "cooling permitted" is Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated in menu 5.11.1.1. Default values: 30 s
Make settings for the hot water comfort here.
The shunt amplification and shunt waiting time for the different See the accessory installation instructions for function
extra climate systems that are installed are also set here. description.
See the accessory installation instructions for function activating imm heater: The immersion heater is activated
description. here if installed in the water heater.
Menu 5.3.6 - step controlled add. heat activ. imm heat in heat mode: Activate here whether the
immersion heater in the tank (required if the alternative above
start addition
is activated) will be permitted to charge hot water, if the
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM compressors in the heat pump prioritise heating.
Default values: 400 GM
activating the mixing valve: Activate here whether a mixer
diff. between additional steps valve for limiting the temperature of hot water from the water
Setting range: 0 – 1000 GM heater is installed.
Default values: 30 GM If this alternative has been activated, you can set the outgoing
max step hot water temperature, shunt amplification and shunt waiting
Setting range time for the mixer valve.
(binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 outgoing hot water: Set the temperature at which the
Setting range mixing valve is to restrict hot water from the water heater.
(binary stepping activated): 0 – 7 See the accessory installation instructions for function
Default value: 3 description.
binary stepping
Menu 5.3.20 - flow sensor
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off flow sensor 5.3.20

Make settings for step controlled addition here. Step controlled


addition is for example an external electric boiler.
It is possible, for example, to select when the additional heat is
to start, to set the maximum number of permitted steps and
whether binary stepping is to be used. flow sensor EMK 500
When binary stepping is deactivated (off), the settings refer to
linear stepping.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.8 - hot water comfort
flow sensor
activating imm heater
Setting option: EMK 500, EMK 310 / 300, EMK 150
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: EMK 500
Factory setting: off
Here you select which flow sensor is used for the energy
activ. imm heat in heat mode measurement.
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
activating the mixing valve
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
outgoing hot water
Setting range: 40 – 65 °C

72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.4 – soft in/outputs Menu 5.9 - floor drying function


You can set the function of in/output for each terminal (AUX1- length of period 1 – 7
6 and output). Setting range: 0 – 30 days
Position of the terminal depends on the type of controller. Factory setting, period 1 – 3, 5 – 7: 2 days
RC-HY20: port 11-18 on X2 terminal (AUX1-6), X4 terminal Factory setting, period 4: 3 days
on AA2 board (output) temp. period 1 – 7
RC-HY40: port 9-14 on terminal X6 and port 1-4 on X2 Setting range: 15 – 70 °C
terminal on AA3 board (AUX1-6), X7 terminal on AA3 board Default value:
(output) temp. period 1 20 °C
temp. period 2 30 °C
Menu 5.5 - factory setting service
temp. period 3 40 °C
All settings can be reset (including settings available to the temp. period 4 45 C
user) to default values here. temp. period 5 40 °C
temp. period 6 30 °C
NOTE temp. period 7 20 °C
When resetting, the start guide is displayed the next time Set the function for under floor drying here.
the control module is restarted.
You can set up to seven period times with different calculated
flow temperatures. If less than seven periods
Menu 5.6 - forced control are to be used, set the remaining period times to 0 days.
You can force control the different components in the control Mark the active window to activate the underfloor drying
module and any connected accessories here. function. A counter at the bottom shows the number of days the
function has been active.
Menu 5.7 - start guide
When the control module is started for the first time the start TIP
guide starts automatically. Start it manually here.
If operating mode "add. heat only" is to be used, select it in
See page 25 for more information about the start guide. menu 4.2.
Menu 5.8 - quick start
It is possible to start the compressor from here. Menu 5.10 - change log
Read off any previous changes to the control system here.
CAUTION The date, time and ID no. (unique to certain settings) and the
There must be a heating or hot water demand to start the new set value is shown for every change.
compressor.
NOTE
CAUTION The change log is saved at restart and remains unchanged
after factory setting.
Do not quick start the compressor too many times over a
short period of time as this may damage the compressor
and its surrounding equipment.

73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.11 - heat pump settings Speed in standby mode (only used if "auto" has been selected
Settings for installed heat pump can be made in the submenus. for "Operating mode") means the charge pump operates at the
set speed during the time when there is neither a need for
Menu 5.11.1 - EB101 - EB108 compressor operation nor additional heat.
Make settings specifically for the installed heat pump and 5.12 - country
charge pump here.
Select here where the product was installed. This allows access
For RC-HY40, it is possible to connect up to 8 heat pumps.
to country specific settings in your product.
Menu 5.11.1.1 - heat pump Language settings can be made regardless of this selection.
Make settings for the installed heat pump here. To see what
settings you can make, see installation manual for the heat NOTE
pump. This option locks after 24 hours, restart of display or
program updating.
Menu 5.11.1.2 - charge pump (GP12)
op. mode
Heating/cooling
Setting range: auto / intermittent
Default value: auto
Set the operating mode for the charge pump here.
auto: The charge pump runs according to the current operating
mode for SMO 20.
intermittent: The charge pump starts and stops 20 seconds
before and after the compressor in the heat pump.
speed during operation heating, hot water,
cooling
Setting range: auto / manual
Default value: auto
Manual setting
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 70 %
speed in wait mode
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 30 %
max. allowed speed
Setting range: 80 – 100 %
Default values: 100 %
Set the speed at which the charge pump is to operate in the
present operating mode. Select "auto" if the speed of the charge
pump is to be regulated automatically (factory setting) for
optimal operation.
If "auto" is activated for heating operation, you can also make
the setting "max. allowed speed" which restricts the charge
pump and does not allow it to run at a higher speed than the set
value.
For manual operation of the charge pump deactivate "auto" for
the current operating mode and set the value to between 1 and
100 % (the previously set value for "max. allowed speed" no
longer applies).

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

External additional heat is active if it is connected to the


Service emergency mode relay (K1, terminal block X1).
Service actions Ensure that the heating medium circulates through the external
additional heat.
NOTE
Temperature sensor data
Servicing should only be carried out by persons with the
necessary expertise. Temperature Resistance Voltage
When replacing components on the system, only genuine (°C) (kOhm) (VDC)
replacement parts may be used.
-40 351.0 3.256
-35 251.6 3.240
NOTE -30 182.5 3.218
If an electrical connection has been disconnected and is -25 133.8 3.189
connected, ground must be checked using a suitable -20 99.22 3.150
multimeter.
-15 74.32 3.105
Maintenance -10 56.20 3.047
-5 42.89 2.976
General inspection 0 33.02 2.889
Check the following: 5 25.61 2.789
1. Condition of casing. 10 20.02 2.673
15 15.77 2.541
2. Electrical connections.
20 12.51 2.399
3. Alarm log. 25 10.00 2.245
Correct any fault before continuing. 30 8.045 2.083
35 6.514 1.916
Climate system
40 5.306 1.752
Check the following: 45 4.348 1.587
1. Climate system start and stop temperature. 50 3.583 1.426
2. Heating curve settings. 55 2.968 1.278
3. Function of the room sensor (if installed). 60 2.467 1.136
65 2.068 1.007
4. System pressure.
70 1.739 0.891
5. Flow and return temperature. The difference must be 5-10 °C. 75 1.469 0.785
Correct any fault before continuing. 80 1.246 0.691
85 1.061 0.607
Emergency mode 90 0.908 0.533
95 0.779 0.469
NOTE 100 0.672 0.414
Switch (SF1) must not be put into mode " " or before the
installation is filled with water.
The compressor in the heat pump can be damaged.

Emergency mode is used in event of operational interference


and in conjunction with service. Hot water is not produced in
emergency mode.
Emergency mode is activated by setting switch (SF1) in mode
" ". This means that:
■ The status lamp illuminates yellow.
■ The display is not lit and the control computer is not
connected.
■ Hot water is not produced.
■ The compressors are switched off. Charge pump (EB101-
GP12) is running.
■ The heating medium pump is active.
■ The emergency mode relay (K1) is active.

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

USB service outlet Menu 7.1 - update firmware


update firmware 7.1

start updating

choose another file

This allows you to update the software in RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
For the following functions to work the USB memory must
contain files with software for RC-HY20/40.

This information states which product the software is intended


for, the software version and general information about them.
RC-HY20/40 is equipped with a USB socket in the display If you wish to select another file than the one selected, the
unit. This USB socket can be used to connect a USB memory correct file can be selected by "choose another file".
to update the software, save logged information and handle the start updating
settings in RC-HY20/40. Select “start updating" if you want to start the update.
You are asked whether you really want to update the software.
USB 7 Respond "yes" to continue or "no" to undo.
If you responded"yes" to the previous question the update
starts and you can now follow the progress of the update on the
display. When the update is complete RC-HY20/40 restarts.
update firmware

logging NOTE
manage settings A software update does not reset the menu settings in
RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
If the update is interrupted before it is complete (for
When a USB memory is connected a new menu (menu 7) example power cut etc.) the software can be reset to the
appears in the display. previous version if the OK button is kept pressing during
start up until the green lamp starts to illuminate (takes
about 10 seconds).

76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

choose another file Menu 7.3 - manage settings


update firmware 7.1 manage settings 7.3

save settings

recover settings

Select “choose another file" if you do not want to use the


Here you can manage (save as or retrieve from) all the menu
suggested software. When you scroll through the files,
settings (user and service menus) in RC-HY20/40 with a USB
information about the marked software is shown in a fact box
memory.
just as before. When you have selected a file with the OK
button you will return to the previous page (menu 7.1) where Via "save settings" you save the menu settings to the USB
you can choose to start the update. memory in order to restore them later or to copy the settings to
another RC-HY20/40.
Menu 7.2 - logging
NOTE
logging 7.2
When you save the menu settings to the USB memory you
replace any previously saved settings
on the USB memory.

activated Via "recover settings" you reset all menu settings from the
interval 5 sec
USB memory.

NOTE
Reset of the menu settings from the USB memory cannot be
undone.

Setting range: 1 s – 60 min


Factory setting range: 5 s
You can set the interval of the log data storage and start saving
the log data on the USB memory.
1. Set the desired interval between loggings.
2. Tick “activated".
3. The present values from RC-HY20/40 are saved in a file in
the USB memory at the set interval until “activated" is
unticked.

NOTE
Untick "activated" before removing the USB memory.
Menu 7.3 - manage settings

77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Disturbance in comfort Troubleshooting


In most cases, the control module notes a malfunction and
If the operational interference is not shown in the display the
indicates this with alarms and shows instructions to rectify it in
following tips can be used:
the display. See "Manage alarm" for in- formation about
managing alarms. If the malfunction does not appear in the Basic actions
d i s p l a y, o r i f t h e d i s p l a y i s n o t l i t , t h e f o l l o w i n g Start by checking the following possible fault sources:
troubleshooting guide can be used.
■ The switch's (SF1) position.
■ Group and main fuses of the accommodation.
Manage alarm ■ The property's earth circuit breaker.
■ The control module's miniature circuit breaker (FA1).
Low pressure alarm
Low hot water temperature or a lack of
hot water
alarm
This part of the fault-tracing chapter only applies if the water
heater is installed in the system.
info / action

reset alarm ■ Closed or choked filling valve for the hot water heater.
aid mode – Open the valve.
■ Mixing valve (if there is one installed) set too low.
– Adjust the mixer valve.
In the event of an alarm, some kind of malfunction has
■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
occurred, which is indicated by the status lamp changing from
green continuously to red continuously. In addition, an alarm – If mode "manual" is selected, select "addition".
bell appears in the information window. ■ Large hot water consumption.
Alarm – Wait until the hot water has heated up. Temporarily
increased hot water capacity (temporary lux) can be
In the event of an alarm with a red status lamp a malfunction
activated in menu 2.1.
has occurred that the heat pump and/or control module cannot
remedy itself. In the display, by turning the control knob and ■ Too low hot water setting.
pressing the OK button, you can see the type of alarm it is and – Enter menu 2.2 and select a higher comfort mode.
reset it. You can also choose to set the installation to aid mode. ■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of hot water.
info / action Here you can read what the alarm means and – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when hot
receive tips on what you can do to correct the problem that water is to be prioritised.
caused the alarm.
Low room temperature
reset alarm In most cases it is enough to select "reset alarm"
to correct the problem that caused the alarm. If a green light ■ Closed thermostats in several rooms.
illuminates after selecting "reset alarm" the alarm has been – Set the thermostats to max, in as many rooms as possible.
remedied. If a red light is still visible and a menu called Adjust the room temperature via menu 1.1, instead of
”alarm” is visible in the display, the problem that caused the choking the thermostats.
alarm remains. If the alarm disappears and then returns, see the ■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
troubleshooting section (page 78 and 79).
– Enter menu 4.2. If mode "auto" is selected, select a higher
aid mode ”aid mode” is a type of emergency mode. This value on "stop heating" in menu 4.9.2.
means that the installation produces heat and/or hot water
– If mode "manual" is selected, select "heating". If this is
despite there being some kind of problem. This can mean that
not enough, select "addition".
the heat pump's compressor is not running. In this case any
electrical addition produces heat and/or hot water. ■ Too low set value on the automatic heating control.
– Enter menu 1.1 "temperature" and adjust the offset
NOTE heating curve up. If the room temperature is only low in
To select aid mode an alarm action must be selected in the cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
menu 5.1.4. curve" needs adjusting up.
■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of heat.
CAUTION – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when heating
is to be prioritised.
Selecting "aid mode” is not the same as correcting the
problem that caused the alarm. The status lamp will ■ "Holiday mode" activated in menu 4.7.
therefore continue to be red. – Enter menu 4.7 and select "Off".

78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

■ External switch for changing the room heating activ- ated. Additional heating only
– Check any external switches.
If you are unsuccessful in rectifying the fault and are unable to
■ Air in the climate system.
heat the house, you can, whilst waiting for assistance, continue
– Vent the climate system. running the heat pump in ”add. heat only”. This means that
■ Closed valves to the climate system. additional heating only is used to heat the house.
– Open the valves. Set the installation to additional heat
■ Incorrectly adjusted flow across the heat pump. mode
– Check whether alarm high condenser in (163) or high 1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
condenser out (162) is in the alarm log. Follow the 2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
instructions for adjusting charge flow. OK button.
High room temperature Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button.
■ Too high set value on the automatic heating control.
CAUTION
– Enter menu 1.1 (temperature) and reduce the offset
When commissioning without MTH air/water heat pump an
heating curve. If the room temperature is only high in alarm communication error may appear in the display.
cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
curve" needs adjusting down. in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").
■ External switch for changing the room heating activated.
– Check any external switches.
Low system pressure
■ Not enough water in the climate system.
– Top up the water in the climate system.
The compressor does not start
■ There is no heating requirement.
– The heat pump does not call on heating nor hot water.
■ Temperature conditions tripped.
– Wait until the temperature condition has been re- set.
■ Minimum time between compressor starts has not been
reached.
– Wait 30 minutes and check if the compressor has started.
■ Alarm tripped.
– Follow the display instructions.

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm list

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

157 Low lp cooling Protection against freezing in water HX during ■ Low/no water flow
cooling operation

162 High condenser out Too high temperature out from the condenser. ■ Low flow during heating operation
temperature Self-resetting. ■ Too high set temperatures

163 High condenser in Too high temperature into the condenser. ■ Temperature generated by another heat source
temperature Self-resetting.

183 Defrosting in progress Not an alarm, but an operating status. ■ Set when the heat pump runs the defrosting
procedure

220 High pressure alarm BP4 has been above 4,15MPa 5 times within 60 ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
minutes. exchanger
■ Expansion valve not correctly connected
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Low or no flow during heating operation
■ Defective circulation pump
■ Defective fuse, F(4A)

224 Fan alarm from heat Deviations in the fan speed in FDCW. ■ The fan cannot rotate freely
pump ■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Defective fan motor
■ Control board in FDCW dirty
■ Fuse (F2) blown

228 Failed defrosting 10 aborted defrost due to alarm: 418,419 or 343 ■ Too low water flow
■ Too low return temperatur

230 Hot gas alarm Temperature deviation on the hot gas sensor ■ Sensor does not work (see section "Ambient
(Tho-D) twice within 60 minutes or for 60 temperature sensor")
minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or heat exchanger
■ Blocked
■ If the fault persists during cooling, there may
be an insufficient amount of refrigerant.
■ Defective control board in FDCW

261 High HWX temp Temperature deviation on the heat exchanger ■ Sensor does not work (see section
sensor (Tho-R1/R2) five times within 60 "Disturbances in comfort")
minutes or for 60 minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
exchanger
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Too much refrigerant

262 Inv. err. When IPM (Intelligent power module) displays Can occur when 15V power supply to the
FO-signal (Fault Output) five times during a inverter PCB is unstable.
60-minute period.

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

263 Inv. err. Voltage from the inverter outside the parameters ■ Incoming power supply interference
four times within 30 minutes. ■ Service valve closed
■ Insufficient amount of refrigerant
■ Compressor fault
■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

265 Inv. err. Continuous deviation on power transistor for 15 ■ Defective fan motor
minutes. ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

267 Inv. err. Failed start for compressor ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Compressor fault

268 Inv. err. Overcurrent, Inverter A/F module ■ Sudden power failure

271 Lw otd tmp Temperature of BT28 below the value that ■ Cold weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

272 High otd tmp Temperature of BT28 above the value that ■ Warm weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

277 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, heat exchanger in FDCW(Tho-R). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

278 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, outdoor temperature sensor in ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump FDCW (Tho-A). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

279 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, hot gas in FDCW (Tho-D). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

294 Incompatible heat pump Heat pump and indoor module do not work ■ Outdoor module and indoor module are not
properly together due to technical parameters. compatible.

343 Low temp water out Low water out temperature during cooling or ■ Too low water flow
tank defrost operation ■ Too low return temperatur

347 Temp high press Temporary high pressure alarm ■ No/low water flow
■ Air in water system

403 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor incoming water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT3). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

404 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor high pressure heating/ ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 low pressure cooling in indoor unit (BP4). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

412 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor outgoing water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT12). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

415 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor fluid pipe in indoor unit ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 (BT15). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

418 Low temp water out Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water flow
during defrost.

419 Freeze prot. exch. defr. Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water return temperature
during defrost.

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Accessories

Anode M300
Accessories
Part no. MCD291A026
EMK300M
Anode M500
Part no. MCD291A013
Part no. MCD291A027
EMK500M
Part no. MCD291A014
Charge pump CPD 11
Charge pump for heat pump
CPD 11-25M/55
Part no. MCD291A016
CPD 11-25M/75
Part no. MCD291A017
External electric additional heat ELK
These accessories may require accessories card AXC 30 (step
controlled addition).
ELK 9M
Immersion heater
9 kW 3 x 400 V
Part no. MCD291A015
Hot water control
VST 05M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø22
Max heat pump size 8 kW
Part no. MCD291A018
VST 11M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø28
(Max recommended output, 17 kW)
Part no. MCD291A019
VST 20M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø35
(Max recommended output, 40 kW)
Part no. MCD291A020
Reversing valve for cooling
VCC 05M
Part no. MCD291A021
VCC 11M
Part no. MCD291A022
Electrical model
MEL 1030M
Part no. MCD291A023
Anode
Anode for tank
Anode T300
Part no. MCD291A024
Anode T500
Part no. MCD291A025

83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Technical data
Dimensions and setting-out coordinates

110

10
70 215

360

35
310
410

RC-HY 40
110

84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Electrical circuit diagram

HSB60

85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

HMK60 FDCW60VNX-A-2
FDCW60VNX-A-3 ,

FDCW60VNX-A
RC-HY

86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

RC-HY
RC-HY
RC-HY
FDCW60VNX-A-2
FDCW60VNX-A-3

87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

RC-HY
RC-HY
RC-HY

88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RC-HY20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

sheet 1

89
90
Technical data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INDOOR
UNIT

Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire


located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RC-HY40

INDOOR INDOOR
UNIT UNIT
(HSB) (HSB)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

sheet 1

93
94
Technical data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire
located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 5

INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT
INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT

97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 6

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES THERMAL SYSTEMS, LTD.
16-5 Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-8215, Japan
http://www.mhi-mth.co.jp/

MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES AIR-CONDITIONING EUROPE, LTD.


5 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, United Kingdom
Tel: +44-333-207-4072
Fax: +44-333-207-4089
http://www.mhiae.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INSTALLATION MANUAL
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES
Air to Water Heat Pump
Hydrolution (HM)
HSB100/HMK100/FDCW71VNX/FDCW100VNX
PT300/PT500/RC-HY20/RC-HY40

HK 200S

English:Original instruction

This heat pump complies with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU,


LV Directive 2014/35/EU.
CE marking is applicable to the area of 50 Hz power supply.

PSC012D085BM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2

FDCW71VNX

FDCW100VNX
LEK

LEK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table of Contents

Safety precautions 2 HSB100 with RC-HY20 40


HSB100 with RC-HY40 40
General information for installer 7 HMK100 with RC-HY20 41
HMK100 with RC-HY40 42
Over view and design 7
Connection between controller and sensors 42
Transport and storage 10
RC-HY20 with HSB100 42
Supplied components 10
RC-HY20 with HMK100 43
Assembly 10
RC-HY40 with HSB100 45
Hanging indoor unit 12
RC-HY40 with HMK100 46
Hanging control unit 12
Optional connections 48
Dimensioning expansion vessel 13
RC-HY20 48
Recommended installation order 13
Room sensor BT50 48
Step controlled additional heat 49
Pipe installation 14 Connection example with HMK100 49
General 14 Relay output for emergency mode 50
Installation diagram 14 Connection example with HMK100 50
HSB100 14 External circulation pump 51
HMK100 15 AUX inputs/outputs 51
System requirements 16 myUpway™ 53
Overflow valve 16 RC-HY40 53
Pump capacity diagram 16 Load monitor 53
Pressure drop in indoor unit 17 Room sensor BT50 54
Dimensions and pipe connections 17 Step controlled additional heat 54
HSB100 17 Relay output for emergency mode 54
HMK100 17 External circulation pump 54
PT300/500 18 AUX inputs/outputs 54
Water circuit 19 myUpway™ 55
Connection to heating system 19
Connection to hot water heater 19 Commissioning and adjusting 56
Housing disassembly of tank unit 19 Preparation 56
Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit 20 Filling and venting 56
Connecting hot water tank to water main 21 Hot water tank 56
Hot water circulation circuit 22 Climate system 56
Connection of external heat source 23 Inspection of installation 56
Refrigerant circuit 23 Start-up and inspection 57
Connecting refrigerant pipes 23 Before start-up 57
Piping insulation 23 Commissioning with heat pump 57
Drain connection 23 Commissioning with additional heater only 57
Dockings 24 3-way valve operation check 57
AUX function check 57
Electrical installation 29 Cooling mode 57
General 29 Cleaning particle filter 57
Electrical components 30 Secondary adjustment 57
Accessibility, electrical connection for controller 32 Start guide 58
Cable lock 34 Heating/cooling curve setting 59
Connection 34 Hot water circulation setting 60
<HSB100> 34 SG ready 61
Power supply 34
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit 34 Control 62
Connection between indoor unit and controller 35 Display unit 62
Cascade connection setting 35 Menu system 63
Recommended fuse size for HSB100 35 Menu list 66
Recommended cable size for HSB1000 35 Menu 1 – Indoor climate 66
<HMK100> 35 Menu 2 – Hot water 66
Circuit breaker 35 Menu 3 – Info 66
Power supply 35 Menu 4 – My system 66
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit 36 Menu 5 – Service 67
Connection between indoor unit and controller 36
Recommended fuse size for HMK100 36 Service 75
<RC-HY20/40> 36
Power supply 36 Disturbances in comfort 78
Connection between controller and indoor unit 37 Manage alarm 78
HSB100 with RC-HY20 37 Troubleshooting 78
HSB100 with RC-HY40 37 Additional heating only 79
HMK100 with RC-HY20 38 Alarm list 80
HMK100 with RC-HY40 38
Connection between controller and circulation pump (GP12) 38 Accessories 83
HSB100 with RC-HY20 38
HSB100 with RC-HY40 39 Technical data 84
HMK100 with RC-HY20 39 Dimensions and setting-out coordinates 84
HMK100 with RC-HY40 40 Electrical circuit diagram 85
Connection between controller and 3-way valve (QN10/QN12) 40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Safety precautions
When installing the unit, be sure to check shall not play with the appliance. Cleaning
whether the selection of installation and user maintenance shall not be made
place, power supply specifications, by children without supervision.
usage limitation (piping length, height This in accordance to applicable parts of
differences between indoor and outdoor the low voltage directive 2014/35/EU, LVD.
units, power supply voltage and etc.) and This appliance is also intended for use by
installation spaces. experts or trained users in shops, hotels,
z We recommend you to read this light industry, on farms and in similar
“SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully environments.
before installation in order to gain full CE marking is applicable to the area of 50
advantage of the functions of the unit Hz power supply.
and to avoid malfunction due to The emission sound pressure level from
mishandling. each Indoor and Outdoor unit is under 70
z The precautions described below are dB(A).
divided into WARNING and CAUTION .
The matters with possibilities leading
to serious consequences such as
death or serious personal injury due WARNING
to erroneous handling are listed in Installation must be carried out by
the WARNING and the matters with the qualified installer.
possibilities leading to personal injury If you install the system by yourself, it may cause
or damage of the unit due to erroneous serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
handling including probability leading to shocks, fire and personal injury, as a result of a
serious consequences in some cases system malfunction.
are listed in CAUTION . These are very Install the system in full accordance
important precautions for safety. Be with the instruction manual.
sure to observe all of them without fail. Incorrect installation may cause bursts, personal
z Be sure to confirm no anomaly on the injury, water leaks, electric shocks and fire.
equipment by commissioning after Use the original accessories and the
completed installation and explain the specified components for installation.
operating methods as well as the If parts other than those prescribed by us are used,
maintenance methods of this equipment It may cause water leaks, electric shocks, fire and
to the user according to the owner’s personal injury.
manual. When installing in small rooms, take
z Keep the installation manual together prevention measures not to exceed
with owner’s manual at a place where the density limit of refrigerant in the
any user can read at any time. Moreover event of leakage.
if necessary, ask to hand them to a new Consult the expert about prevention measures. If
user. the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the
event of leakage, lack of oxygen can occur, which
This heat pump complies with EMC can cause serious accidents.
Directive 2014/30/EU.
Ventilate the working area well in the
This appliance is designed for use in a
event of refrigerant leakage during
home environment and can be used by
installation.
children aged from 8 years and above and
If the refrigerant comes into contact with naked
persons with reduced physical, sensory or
flames, poisonous gas is produced.
mental capabilities or lack of experience
and knowledge if they have been given After completed installation, check that
supervision or instruction concerning use no refrigerant leaks from the system.
of the appliance in a safe way and If refrigerant leaks into the room and comes into
understand the hazards involved. Children contact with an oven or other hot surface, poisonous
gas is produced.
2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Hang up the unit at the specified points the box. Install the service panel correctly.
with ropes which can support the Incorrect installation may result in overheating
weight in lifting for portage. And to and fire.
avoid jolting out of alignment, be sure to Do not perform brazing work in the
hang up the unit at 4-point support. airtight room.
An improper manner of portage such as 3-point It can cause lack of oxygen.
support can cause death or serious personal injury Use the prescribed pipes, flare nuts
due to falling of the unit. and tools for R410A.
Install the unit in a location with good Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can
support. cause the unit failure and serious accidents due to
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the burst of the refrigerant circuit.
unit to fall and cause material damage and Tighten the flare nut by using double
personal injury. spanners and torque wrench according
Ensure the unit is stable when installed, to prescribed method. Be sure not to
so that it can withstand earthquakes tighten the flare nut too much.
and strong winds. Loose flare connection or damage on the flare part
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the by tightening with excess torque can cause burst
unit to fall and cause material damage and or refrigerant leaks which may result in lack of
personal injury. oxygen.
Ensure that no air enters in the refriger- Do not open the service valves for
ant circuit when the unit is installed liquid line and gas line until completed
and removed. refrigerant piping work, air tightness
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure test and evacuation.
in the refrigerant circuit becomes too high, which If the compressor is operated in state of opening
can cause burst and personal injury. service valves before completed connection of
The electrical installation must be refrigerant piping work, air can be sucked into
carried out by the qualified electrician refrigerant circuit, which can cause bust or
in accordance with “the norm for personal injury due to anomalously high pressure
electrical work” and “national wiring in the refrigerant.
regulation”, and the system must be Do not put the drainage pipe directly into
connected to the dedicated circuit. drainage channels where poisonous
Power supply with insufficient capacity and gases such as sulphide gas can occur.
incorrect function done by improper work can Poisonous gases will flow into the room through
cause electric shocks and fire. drainage pipe and seriously affect the user’s
Be sure to shut off the power before health and safety.
starting electrical work. Only use prescribed optional parts.
Failure to shut off the power can cause electric The installation must be carried out by
shocks, unit failure or incorrect function of the qualified installer.
equipment. If you install the system by yourself, it can cause
Be sure to use the cables conformed serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
to safety standard and cable ampacity shocks, fire.
for power distribution work. Do not run the unit with removed panels
Unconformable cables can cause electric leak, or protections
anomalous heat production or fire. Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or
Use the prescribed cables for electrical high voltage parts can cause personal injury due
connection, tighten the cables securely to entrapment, burn or electric shocks.
in terminal block and relieve the Be sure to fix up the service panels.
cables correctly to prevent overloading the Incorrect fixing can cause electric shocks or
terminal blocks. fire due to intrusion of dust or water.
Loose connections or cable mountings can cause Do not perform any repairs or modifi-
anomalous heat production or fire. cations by yourself. Consult the dealer
Arrange the wiring in the control box so if the unit requires repair.
that it cannot be pushed up further into If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

leaks, electric shocks or fire. cause fire.


Do not perform any change of protec- Do not install the unit where corrosive
tive device itself or its setup condition gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or
The forced operation by short-circuiting protective combustible gas (such as thinner and
device of pressure switch and temperature petroleum gases) can accumulate or collect,
controller or the use of non specified component or where volatile combustible substances
can cause fire or burst. are handled.
Be sure to switch off the power supply Corrosive gas can cause corrosion of heat
in the event of installation, inspection exchanger, breakage of plastic parts and etc. And
or servicing. combustible gas can cause fire.
If the power supply is not shut off, there is a risk Secure a space for installation, inspec-
of electric shocks, unit failure or personal injury tion and maintenance specified in the
due to the unexpected start of fan. manual.
Consult the dealer or an expert regar- Insufficient space can result in accident such as
ding removal of the unit. personal injury due to falling from the installation
Incorrect installation can cause water leaks, place.
electric shocks or fire. When the outdoor unit is installed on a
Stop the compressor before disconnec- roof or a high place, provide permanent
ting refrigerant pipes in case of pump ladders and handrails along the access
down operation. route and fences and handrails around the
If disconnecting refrigerant pipes in state of outdoor unit.
opening service valves before compressor If safety facilities are not provided, it can cause
stopping, air can be sucked, which can cause burst personal injury due to falling from the installation
or personal injury due to anomalously high place.
pressure in the refrigerant circuit. Do not use the indoor unit at the place
where water splashes may occur.
CAUTION Since the indoor unit is not waterproof, it
can cause electric shocks and fire.
Carry out the electrical work for ground Do not install or use the system close
lead with care. to the equipment that generates elec-
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, tromagnetic fields or high frequency
water line, lightning conductor or telephone line’s harmonics.
ground lead. Incorrect grounding can cause unit Equipment such as inverters, standby generators,
faults such as electric shocks due to short- medical high frequency equipments and
circuiting. telecommunication equipments can affect the
Use the circuit breaker with sufficient system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns.
breaking capacity. The system can also affect medical equipment and
If the breaker does not have sufficient breaking telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its
capacity, it can cause the unit malfunction and function or cause jamming.
fire. Do not install the outdoor unit in a
Earth leakage breaker must be insta- location where insects and small animals
lled. can inhabit.
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can Insects and small animals can enter the electric
cause electric shocks. parts and cause damage or fire. Instruct the user to
Do not use any materials other than a keep the surroundings clean.
fuse with the correct rating in the Do not use the base flame for outdoor
location where fuses are to be used. unit which is corroded or damaged due
Connecting the circuit with copper wire or other to long periods of operation.
metal thread can cause unit failure and fire. Using an old and damage base flame can cause
Do not install the unit near the location the unit falling down and cause personal injury.
where leakage of combustible gases Do not install the unit in the locations
can occur. listed below.
If leaked gases accumulate around the unit, it can ‚ Locations where carbon fiber, metal powder or
4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

any powder is floating. Do not install the remote controller at


‚ Locations where any substances that can affect the direct sunlight.
the unit such as sulphide gas, chloride gas, acid It can cause malfunction or deformation of the
and alkaline can occur. remote controller.
‚ Vehicles and ships. Do not use the unit for special purposes
‚ Locations where cosmetic or special sprays are such as storing foods, cooling precision
often used. instruments and preservation of
‚ Locations with direct exposure of oil mist and animals, plants or art.
steam such as kitchen and machine plant. It can cause the damage of the items.
‚ Locations where any machines which generate Take care when carrying the unit by
high frequency harmonics are used. hand.
‚ Locations with salty atmospheres such as If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be
coastlines. carried by two or more persons. Do not carry by
‚ Locations with heavy snow (If installed, be sure the plastic straps, always use the carry handle
to provide base flame and snow hood mentioned when carrying the unit by hand. Use gloves to
in the manual). minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum fins.
‚ Locations where the unit is exposed to chimney Dispose of any packing materials cor-
smoke. rectly.
‚ Locations at high altitude (more than 1000m Any remaining packing materials can cause
high). personal injury as it contains nails and wood. And
‚ Locations with ammonic atmospheres. to avoid danger of suffocation, be sure to keep the
‚ Locations where heat radiation from other heat plastic wrapper away from children and to dispose
source can affect the unit. after tear it up.
‚ Locations without good air circulation. Pay attention not to damage the drain
‚ Locations with any obstacles which can prevent pan by weld spatter when welding
inlet and outlet air of the unit. work is done near the indoor unit.
‚ Locations where short circuit of air can occur (in If weld spatter entered into the indoor unit during
case of multiple units installation). welding work, it can cause pin-hole in drain pan
‚ Locations where strong air blows against the air and result in water leakage. To prevent such
outlet of outdoor unit. damage, keep the indoor unit in its packing or
It can cause remarkable decrease in performance, cover it.
corrosion and damage of components,
malfunction and fire. Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes
so as not to condense the ambient air
Do not install the outdoor unit in the moisture on them.
locations listed below. Insufficient insulation can cause condensation,
‚ Locations where discharged hot air or operating which can lead to moisture damage on the ceiling,
sound of the outdoor unit can bother floor, furniture and any other valuables.
neighborhood.
‚ Locations where outlet air of the outdoor unit Be sure to perform air tightness test
blows directly to plants. by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after
‚ Locations where vibration can be amplified and completed refrigerant piping work.
transmitted due to insufficient strength of If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in
structure. the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room,
lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious
‚ Locations where vibration and operation sound
generated by the outdoor unit can affect accidents.
seriously. (on the wall or at the place near bed Do not touch any buttons with wet hands.
room) It can cause electric shocks.
‚ Locations where an equipment affected by high Do not shut off the power supply imme-
harmonics is placed. (TV set or radio receiver is diately after stopping the operation.
placed within 5m) Wait at least 5 minutes, otherwise there is a risk
‚ Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. of water leakage or breakdown.
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a Do not control the system with main
claim. power switch.
It can cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the
5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

fan can start unexpectedly, which can cause Notabilia for units designed for R410A
personal injury. Only use R410A refrigerant. R410A is the
Do not touch any refrigerant pipes refrigerant whose pressure is 1.6 times as high as
when the system is in operation. that of conventional refrigerant.
During operation the refrigerant pipes become
extremely hot or extremely cold depending the The size of charging port of service valve and
operating condition, and it can cause burn injury check joint for R410A are altered from that for
or frost injury. conventional refrigerant in order to prevent the
This manual is only for outdoor units system being charged with the incorrect
connected to HSB series and HMK refrigerant by mistake. And the protruding
series. dimension of pipe for flare processing and flare
When you connect other indoor units to outdoor nut size for R410A are also altered from that for
units, please refer to other manual. conventional refrigerant in order to reinforce
strength against the pressure for R410A.
Accordingly the dedicated tools for R410A listed
in the below mentioned table should be prepared
for installation and servicing.
Dedicated tools for R410A
a) Gauge manifold
b) Charge hose
c) Electronic scale for refrigerant charge
d) Torque wrench
e) Flare tool
f) Protrusion control gauge for copper pipe
g) Vacuum pump adapter
h) Gas leak detector
Do not use charging cylinder. Using charging
cylinder may alter the composition of refrigerant,
which results in making the performance of the
system worse.

Refrigerant must be charged always in liquid state


from the bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

General information for installer


For outdoor unit installation information, see Installation
manual for Outdoor unit.

Over view and design


HSB100
UB1 UB2 UB3 EP2 XL14 XL1 XL2

AA23-X1

XL13
A23-F3

AA23-X4

AA23-S3

AA23

PF3 BT3

AA23-X100

BP4
HZ2
BT15

BT12

Pipe connections Sensor, thermostats


XL1(Red mark) Climate system supply BP4 Pressure sensor, high pressure
XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system return BT3 Temperature sensor, heating medium, return
XL14 Connection, gas line BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser, supply
XL13 Connection, liquid line BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe

Valves etc. Miscellaneous


EP2 Heat exchanger UB1 Cable gland
HQ1 Particle filter (supplied) UB2 Cable gland
HZ2 Drying filter UB3 Cable gland

Electrical components
AA23 Communication board
AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection
of KVR
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
module / control module
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
module

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

HMK100
XL10 XL4 XL13 XL14 XL3 XL2

XL1
BT12
XL11
BT64
QN12 GP12

EP2
CM1 BP4
BT15
EB1 BT25
BT3
BT63
QN10
BT71
BT7

EB2

EB15

BT6

Pipe connections Sensors


XL1 ( ) Connection, heating medium, supply BP4 Pressure sensor, high pressure
XL2 ( ) Connection, heating medium, return BT3 Temperature sensor, heating medium return
XL3 Connection, cold water BT6 Temperature sensor, hot water loading
XL4 Connection, hot water BT7 Temperature sensor, top of the hot water heater
XL10 Connection, cooling BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser outlet
XL11 Connection, safety group, manometer BT15 Temperature sensor, liquid
XL13 Connection, liquid cooling medium BT25 Temperature sensor, heating medium supply
XL14 Connection, gas cooling medium BT63 Temperature sensor, heating medium supply
downstream the submersible heater
HVAC elements BT64 Temperature sensor, cooling medium supply
BT71 Temperature sensor, heating medium re- turn
CM1 Diaphragm expansion vessel, closed
QN10 Isolation valve, domestic hot water/central heating
QN12 Isolation valve, cooling/heating Others
GP12 Circulation pump EB15 HMK 100
EP2 Heat exchanger PF3 Serial number
EB2 Domestic hot water tank

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

PT300/500

1
11
8

12
13

2
9
3
14

4 13

10 15

16
6

Section of the PT storage tanks. Side view of the PT storage tanks.


8. Thermometer
1. Upper insulation of the storage tank 9. Connector pipe for mounting electric heating unit
2. Protective magnesium anode 10. Inspection opening
3. Enamelled tank 11. Hot water intake connector pipe
4. Side insulation of the storage tank 12. Hot water circulation connector pipe
5. Coil 13. Temperature sensor cover
6. Lower insulation of the storage tank 14. Coil supply connector pipe
7. Adjustable foot 15. Connection of return line from the coil
16. Cold water supply connector pipe

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Transport and storage Assembly


■ It is recommended that indoor unit is installed in a room
Indoor unit and tank unit must be transported and stored
with existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room
vertically in dry conditions.
or boiler room.
■ For indoor unit and control unit, the mounting surface must
Supplied components be firm, flat and vertical, preferably a concrete wall.
■ Indoor unit with tank and tank unit must be set on a solid
HSB100 Indoor unit
waterproof base that would keep the weight of the unit. The
height-adjusting legs allow for levelling and stable setting.

HMK100



 


Wrench size 13
Particle filter R25 (HQ1). Brackets kit 20-40 mm

HMK100 Indoor unit with tank

PT300/500

Safety valve with pressure gauge

RC-HY20/40 Control unit


0-15 mm

Outside sensor Room sensor (RC-HY40 only)


LEK

Insulation tape Temperature sensor

■ For indoor unit with tank, floor drain port is required to


connect drain hose in case cooling function is used.
■ Install indoor unit with its back to an outside wall, ideally
LEK

in a room where noise does not matter. If this is not


possible, avoid placing it against a wall behind a bedroom
Aluminium tape Cable ties or other room where noise may be a problem.
■ Route pipes so they are not fixed to an internal wall that
backs on to a bedroom or living room.
LE
K

LE
K

■ Install indoor unit with tank, tank unit and its pipings to
indoor unit indoors in order to avoid icing.
LE
K

■ Ensure free space described in the following figures for


future maintenance.
Heating pipe paste Current sensor (RC-HY40 only)

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

HSB100 HMK100
Recommendation for positioning on wall

Min. 300mm
800 mm
Min. 200mm Min. 200mm

IMPORTANT
For HMK100, leave 10 – 25 mm free space between the
indoor module and the back wall for cables and piping.

PT300/500

A min
Recommendation for positioning in corner
Min. 400mm

Mi
n. 4
00m
m
Amin is required on top to replace anode bar, and 500 mm is
required in front to replace immersion heater if equipped.
Application Connector pipe dia. Type of anode Amin
*Min 800mm is required in front 1" Chain ø26 × 8 150 mm
PT300
¾" Titanium anode 200 mm
1¼" Chain ø33 × 5 150 mm
PT500
¾" Titanium anode 400 mm

RC-HY20/40
100 mm

100 mm 100 mm

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Hanging indoor unit Hanging control unit


It is recommended that the split box is installed in a room with Use all mounting points and install control unit upright against
existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room or boiler a flat wall. Make sure whole back surface faces the wall.
room.
1. The bracket for the split box is mounted to the wall by use
Mounting point Mounting point
of appropriate screws.
ø10
4-

2. Insert HSB100 in the bracket mounted to the wall.

Mounting point Mounting point

NOTE
Indoor unit weigh18 kg excluding water inside.

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Dimensioning expansion vessel Recommended installation order


The expansion vessel volume must be at least 5% of total water 1. Hang indoor unit and control unit to appropriate position
volume in the circulation system. and connect indoor unit and tank unit.
HMK100 is equipped with an expansion vessel with a volume 2. Connect indoor unit to climate system, cold and hot water
of 10 liters. lines as well as any external heat sources. See page 14, 15.
Also see docking descriptions on page 26-28 and further
Initial pressure and max height difference on.
Recommended maximum height difference between expansion 3. Install refrigerant pipes according to the description on the
vessel and the highest point in the system is 5m. Installation manual for outdoor unit.
The initial pressure of the pressure expansion vessel must be 4. Connect current limiter, any centralised load control and
dimensioned according to the maximum height (H) between external contacts as well as the cable between indoor unit
the vessel and the highest positioned radiator, see figure. An and outdoor unit.
initial pressure of 0.5 bar (5 mvp) means a maximum permitted 5. Connect incoming electricity to indoor unit and/or outdoor
height difference of 5 m. unit. See page 34-36.
If the standard initial pressure in the pressure vessel is not high 6. Follow the commissioning instructions on page 37-55.
enough it can be increased by filling via the valve in the
expansion vessel. The expansion vessel’s standard initial
pressure must be entered in the check list on User’s manua1.
Any change in the initial pressure affects the ability of the
expansion vessel to handle the expansion of the water.
Consult local distributor in case height difference exceeds 5m.
H

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Pipe installation
General
Pipe installation must be carried out in accordance with current return at lowest design outdoor temperature (DOT) though
norms and directives. indoor unit can operate with a return temperature of up to 65°C
A following table shows plumbing necessary for each product. and an outgoing temperature from the unit of 65°C.
Indoor unit is not equipped with shut off valves; these must be
Refrigerant Plumbing
installed outside the heat pump to facilitate any future
HSB Necessary Necessary
servicing.
HMK Necessary Necessary
PT ⸺ Necessary Indoor unit can be connected to the radiator system, floor
PC-HY ⸺ ⸺ heating system and/or fan convectors.
Safety valve is not equipped with in indoor unit. Make sure to
This heat pump system is designed for low or medium
install safety valve in the circuit.
temperature heating system. It is recommended water
temperature must not exceed 55°C on supply and 45°C on

Installation diagram
FDCW71/100VNX outdoor unit provides heat for space heating and domestic hot water using free energy in the outdoor air within
the range of low temperature up to -20°C. Connection is different according to the type of indoor unit (see below figures). The system
is controlled by RC-HY20 or RC-HY40 control unit.

HSB100
HSB100 indoor unit is equipped with plate heat exchanger. It needs to install expansion vessel, shut-off valves, safety valve, electric
heater and circulation pump to make a complete heating system. In case domestic hot water is required, 3 way valve and tank is also
necessary.

AA25

XL14 BT12 XL1


BP4 P
BT15 BT3 XL2
XL13

HSB100

FDCW71/100 PT300/500

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

HMK100
HMK100 indoor unit is equipped with coil water heater, expansion vessel, safety valve, electric heater, plate heat exchanger,
sensors and gauge, and circulation pump.

XL11
XL10

XL14 XL1
BP4
EH
XL13 XL2
XL4
XL3

FDCW71/100
HMK100

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Vent P Manometer

Cut-off valve Circulation pump

Water tap Particulate filter

Non-return valve Compressor

Balancing valve Heat exchanger

Three-way valve Cooling

Safety valve Central heating system

T Thermometer Domestic hot water

Temperature sensor Heating systems Floor


heating

Diaphragm expansion
Cooling system
vessel

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

System requirements Pump capacity diagram


The minimum water volume in the climate system is subject to HSB100
the values in the table below. If it is not fulfilled, volume
HSB100 is not equipped with circulation pump.
vessel must be installed.
This graph shows the characteristic of CPD11-25M/65 or 75.
For more options, see the docking description on Page 24.
(liter) Pressure
With underfloor Without underf l oor [kPa]
cooling application cooling application 80
HSB100, HMK100,
80 50 70
FDCW71VNX
HSB100, HMK100, 60
100 80
FDCW100VNX 50
40
30
Overflow valve
20
NOTE 10
A free flow is required for all docking options, which 0
means that an overflow valve must be installed. 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Flow [l / s]
The circulation pump may become damaged.
CPD 11-25M/65 CPD 11-25M/75

HMK100
Pressure
[kPa]

Flow [l / s]

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Pressure drop in indoor unit Dimensions and pipe connections


HSB100 HSB100
Tryckfall HBS05
[kPa]
30

25
XL1
20
XL2
15
XL13
10

5
XL14
0
0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
HSB100 HSB60, 140 Flow [l / s] Pipe connections
XL1 (Red mark) Climate system, flow ø28 mm
XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system, return ø28 mm
XL14 Gas line refrigerant, flare ⅝ ̋
HMK100
XL13 Liquid line refrigerant, flare ⅜ ̋
[kPa]
25 HMK100
20 XL4 XL5 XL3 XL2 XL1
93.5 92.5 87 63 55
15
44

152
155

10 156

5 65 XL14
XL13
XL10

610.5
0
300

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6


Flow [l / s]

PF3
Connection of extra circulation pump XL11
When connecting extra circulation pumps, requirements for
pressure, maximum flow etc must be met. See page 27 for 600.5
location.

NOTE Pipe connections


XL1 ( ) Connection, Heating medium supply ø22 mm
Non-return valve must be installed in case extra circulation XL2 ( ) Connection, Heating medium return ø22 mm
pump is used. See page 27 for the position. XL3 Connection, cold water ø22 mm
The circlulation pump may become damaged. XL4 Connection, hot water ø22 mm
XL5 Connection, circulation ø15 mm
XL13 Connection, liquid cooling medium Ǫ ࡉ
XL14 Connection, gas cooling medium ǫ ࡉ
XL10 Connection, cooling ø22 mm
XL11 Connection, safety valve ø22 mm, manometer

Other information
PF3 Serial number plate

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

PT300/500

N
F

L
K

E
J





H
D

G


Connection U/m PT300/500 Dimensions


D Inspection opening mm ø120 PT300 PT500
E Heating unit connection inch 1½ ̋ Female ① mm 315 337
F Thermometer enclosure mm ø10 Female ② mm 930 967
N Hot water outlet inch 1 ̋ Male ③ mm 1325 1477
L Hot water circulation inch ¾ ̋ Male ④ mm 167 188
K Temp. sensor enclosure (BT7) mm ø16 Female ⑤ mm 336 288
J Coil supply inch 1 ̋ Male ⑥ mm 588 387
I Temp. sensor enclosure (BT6) mm ø16 Female ⑦ mm 840 805
H Return from coil inch 1 ̋ Male ⑧ mm 1107 1234
G Cold water input inch 1 ̋ Male ⑨ mm 1187 1302
⑩ mm 1398 1545
⑪ mm 1634 1835
⑫ mm 21-0/+15

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Water circuit HMK100

Connection to heating system XL8 XL9 XL3 XL5 XL4 XL2 XL1
XL11
Connect XL1 to supply line and X2 to return line from
heating system. XL10
■ All required safety devices and shut-off valves must be
installed as close to the indoor unit as possible.
■ Install bleed valves where necessary, highest point of the
water system in usual case.
■ When connecting to a system with thermostats on all
radiators, install an overflow valve or remove some of the
thermostats to ensure sufficient flow.
■ See section Dockings on page 25 for outline diagram.
■ Install a safety valve with manometer on heating circuit and
hot water circuit. (FL2)
For HSB100 install a safety valve for heating circuit on the
water pipe returning to indoor unit since it doesn’t have
port for FL2.
The entire length of the overflow water pipe from the safety Install safety valve FL2 on XL11.
valves must be inclined to prevent water pockets and must
also be frost proof.
Connection to hot water heater
■ The end of overflow water pipe from the safety valves must be
For HSB100 indoor unit, it is necessary to connect PT storage
left open to the atmosphere. The water may drip from the pipe.
tank unit applying 3 way valve in order to use domestic hot
water function.
For HMK100 indoor unit, 180L tank unit is integrated in
HSB100
indoor unit.
XL14 XL1 XL13 XL2
Housing disassembly of tank unit
Removable housing with thermal insulation facilitates trans-
port and installation of the storage tank. Disassembly the ho-
using in the following order (see next pages figure):
1. Remove the Temperature gauge, plug of the heating ele-
ment connector pipe and blanking plate of the inspection
opening.
2 Remove the upper cover of the housing together with
thermal insulation.
3. Remove the plugs from the connector pipes and black
bushings.
4. Remove the fixing screws and the strip connecting the
housing jacket.
5. Remove the jacket surrounding the tank (housing jacket.)
6. Remove the four-piece thermal insulation.
After the installation of the storage tank in its final location,
reinstall the removed components in the reverse order.
Install safety valve as close to XL2 as possible.

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Housing and thermal insulation disassembly

3 4 5 6

Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit ■ Tank unit can be aligned using the adjustable feet.
■ Protection against overpressure shall be made in accordance
CAUTION with the relevant regulations.
Installation and commissioning of the storage tank ■ Connect the heating system according to the installation
shall only be done by appropriately qualified installer. diagram (see figure).
The installer should inform the user of the functions of Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil.
the product and provide the necessary in formation on its
safe use.
1

Information 1. PT storage tank


2. Cut-off valve
We recommend installing a strainer in order to protect the
pumps, check valve and the components of the heating
system. 2
supply from heat
pump
■ Tank and its pipings to indoor unit must be installed
indoors where the temperature wouldn't drop below 15°C 2
return to heat pump
in order to prevent pipings from icing.
■ Maximum piping length between indoor unit and tank is
10 m.
■ Tank unit should be placed on firm, preferably a concrete
f l oor or foundation.

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Connecting hot water tank to water main


■ Install a mixing valve if the temperature exceeds 60 °C.
Information
In order to minimize the flow of water from the safety valve
■ It is recommended to install a thermostatic mixing valve associated with the thermal expansion of the liquid, it is
for stable temperature hot water supply. advisable to install a suitable expansion vessel at the cold
■ Connect the storage tank to the water supply system of water connection (see item 8.)
water pressure at least 1 bar and max 10 bar. Install a
pressure reducer if the pressure at the cold water inlet to the CAUTION
tank is higher than allowed.
Installation of the appropriate safety valve in the cold
■ Install a safety valve which have a maximum 10.0 bar water supply line protecting the unit against
opening pressure on the incoming domestic water line overpressure is mandatory!
according to outline diagram in order to protect the storage
tank against overpressure. Pressure increases during heating
the water. CAUTION
■ During heating the water, small and temporary water flow Installation of necking of any kind (such as reducers, dirt pockets,
from the safety valve can occur, which indicates that the etc.) and cut-off valves between the storage tank and the safety
pressure has increased above the rated value, which valve is not allowed. Only a T-pipe with a drain valve and a T-pipe
triggered the valve. This may in no way be prevented. with an expansion vessel may be installed in these line sections.
■ Safety valve drain line should be installed with a decline, in
an environment free of freezing and remain open to the
atmosphere. The manufacturer is not responsible for CAUTION
flooding the room through the safety valve.
Never block the safety valve or drain line. This can cause
■ Blocked safety valve can cause equipment failure. Drain a dangerous overpressure in the storage tank.
the outflow from the safety valve to the sewerage or drain
grate.
■ See section Dockings on page 25 for outline diagram.
CAUTION
■ Connect the water supply system according to the When heating water, slight, temporary discharge from
installation diagram. the safety valve can occur. This is a correct safety valve
function. Any attempt to interfere in its operati on can
Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil. lead to the danger and destruction of the storage tank.
1

2
DHW CAUTION
2 7 6 2 Never use the equipment with clogged safety valves.
hot water circulation
(optional)

Connection
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the proce-
dure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page 19):
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
3 8
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
4 5 2
water supply system 3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
to sewerage
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect
1. PT storage tank it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
2. Cut-off valve 5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating
3. Safety valve medium to the coil.
4. Drain valve
5. Pressure reducer (option, if the pressure in the system CAUTION
exceeds the allowable value) If there is an electric heating module installed in the
6. Strainer storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.
7. Hot water circulating pump
8. Hot water expansion vessel

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Hot water circulation circuit 3. Remove the plug from the circulation pipe (XL5).
Hot water circulation function is available for HMK100 and
XL5
PT300/500.

HMK100

4. Install the elbow, facing the rear housing, on the circulation


pipe.
5. Connect the pipe to the elbow, with the dimensions shown
in the figure below, leading pipe in the top of the housing,
in place of the XL5 plug. Mount the pipe insulation.

To connect the circulation:


1. Remove the XL5 plug from the top of the housing.

XL5
520

2. Remove the front panel, then slide the control panel down 120
to access the hydraulic connections.
Circulation pipe dimensions (*) Elbow 15x15 (*)

6. At the outlet of the circulation tube, install the circulation


pump and then connect its control to the RC-HY (Chapter 5
Electrical connection).
7. Install the control panel and the front panel.
(*) Prepared on site.

PT300/500
If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect it to
the port L (see page 21).
Then install the Cut-off valves, circulation pump and strainer.

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Connection of external heat source Refrigerant circuit


External heat source, e.g. a gas or oil boiler or electric heater,
can be connected on supply line of heating system (XL1). Connecting refrigerant pipes
See Installation manual for outdoor unit.

Piping insulation
Install insulation on all piping in order to avoid condensation
during cooling operation.
It is also strongly recommended to insulate piping for heating
only application in order to avoid getting burned or reducing
the heating capacity.
The thickness of the insulation should be 20mm where the
relative humidity exceeds 70%.

Drain connection
HMK 100 is equipped with a condensate hose in the heat
exchanger section. The hose drains all condensate away from
the device to minimize the risk of damage. If necessary, the
hose can be extended.

Condensate hose

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Dockings
General
Installation requirements
Hydrolution can be connected in several different ways, some of which are shown on the following pages.

HSB100 HMK100 HSB100 HMK100


FDCW71VNX FDCW100VNX
Max pressure, climate system 0.25 MPa (2.5 Bar)
Highest recommended supply/return temperature 55/45°C
Max temperature, climate system 65 °C
Max temperature in indoor unit 65 °C
Max temperature from external heat source 65 °C
Max supply temperature with compressor at outdoor temp -15°C 58 °C
Min supply temp. cooling 7 °C
Max supply temp. cooling 25 °C
Min volume, climate system during heating, cooling 50 L 80 L
Min volume, climate system during underf l oor cooling 80 L 100 L
Max flow, climate system 0.38 L/s 0.57 L/s
Min flow, climate system, at 100% circulation pump speed 0.19 L/s 0.29 L/s
Min flow, climate system 0.12 L/s 0.15 L/s
Nominal system flow heating (ѬT=5K) 0.38 L/s (8kW, 7/45°C) 0.43 L/s (9kW, 7/45°C)
Nominal system flow cooling (ѬT=5K) 0.34 L/s (7.1kW, 35/7°C) 0.38 L/s (8kW, 35/7°C)

External circulation pump must be used when the pressure drop in the system is greater than the available external pressure. In such
cases, a bypass line with non-return valve must be installed.
Use an overflow valve if system flow cannot be guaranteed.

Symbol key
Symbol Meaning
Venting valve

Shut-off valve

Non-return valve

Control valve

Safety valve
Temperature sensor

Expansion vessel
P Pressure gauge
Circulation pump

Shunt / shuttle valve


Fan

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Docking alternatives Explanation


Heating system can be constructed in several different ways AA25 Controller
combining indoor unit, tank, control unit and other accessories.
BT1 Outdoor sensor1)
For further option information, see page 84.
BT6 Temperature sensor, hotwater charging1)
In the system example shown on the following page, heating,
BT7 Temperature sensor, hot water top1)
hot water as well as cooling operation are available.
BT25 Temperature sensor, external supply line1)
Additional heating is helpful on the cold day of the year as the
energy from the air is reduced. It is also recommended as back- BT50 Room sensor
up in case the heat pump operation is blocked for any reason BT63 Temperature sensor, external supply line after
(e.g. ambient temperature exceeds the operation limit of heat electric heater
pump). BT71 Temperature sensor, external return line1)
GP10 Circulation pump, Heating medium
NOTE QN10 Reversing valve, Hot water/Heating medium2)
The heating medium side and the hot water side must be
EB1 Additional heat
fitted with the necessary safety equipment in accordance
with the applicable regulations. EB1 Immersion heater
This is the outline diagram. Actual installations KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor2)
must be planned according to applicable EB101 Heat pump system
standards.
BP4 Pressure sensor, condensor3)
BT3 Temperature sensor, return line3)
BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser supply line3)
BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe3)
EB101 Heat pump
FL10 Safety valve
GP12 Charge pump2)
HQ1 Particle filter3)
QM1 Drain valve, Heating medium
QM31 Shut-off valve, Heating medium, Flow
QM32 Shut off valve, Heating medium, Return
QM43 Shut-off valve
EQ1 Cooling system
BT64 Temperature sensor, cooling supply line2)
CP6 Single jacket accumulator tank, cooling
GP13 Circulation pump, cooling
QN12 Reversing valve, Cooling/Heating2)
Miscellaneous
CM1 Expansion vessel closed, Heating medium
CP5 Buffer vessel
CP10 Accumulator tank with hotwater heating
EB20 Immersion heater
FL2 Safety valve, Heating medium
KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor
RN10 Trim valve

1) Included in and supplied with controller


2) Included in and supplied with accessory
3) Included in indoor unit

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Installation with indoor unit HSB100, tank PT300/500, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional
heat before reversing valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EQ1
-AA25 -AA25 -RN10
-CP6
-AA25-QN10

-EB1
-EB1 -FL2
-KA1 -BT63 -CM1
-GP13
-CP10

-BT64 -AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101

-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE
Not all components are shown in this
outline diagram.

Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to The additional heat can also be used for water heater when a
meet the heating and hot water demand. higher temperature is required than the heat pump can produce.
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand, the reversing During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on automatically when the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity. This is used reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
for both heating and charging hot water. heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Indoor unit HSB100, tank PT300/500, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional heat after
reversing valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EB1
-EB1
-KA1

-CP5 -AA25
-GP10 -BT25
-BT71
-EQ1
-AA25
-CP6
-AA25 -RN10
-AA25-QN10

-GP13 -FL2
-CM1
-BT64
-CP10

-AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101
-KA1
-EB20
-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE Immersion heater (EB20) in the water heater/accumulator tank


Not all components are shown in this is used during the time to produce hot water if the heat pump is
outline diagram. used for heating at the same time.
The immersion heater (EB20) can also be used if a higher
This installations alternative is suitable for more complex temperature of hot water is required than the heat pump can
installations with a focus on comfort. produce.
Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
meet the heating and hot water demand of the installation. switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand the reversing demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on, automatically when the
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity.

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Installation with indoor unit HMK100 for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

AA25

P
XL10

-BT64
XL14 -BT12 -GP12
-QN12 -BT25
-BT63 XL1
-BT15 XL2
XL13 -QN10
-BP4 -CM1
-EB1
BT71
-BT3
XL4
XL3
-BT7

-BT6

-XL14
-XL13

Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to Cooling is controlled by the sensor BT64, and the reversing
meet the heating and hot water demand. At simultaneous valve (QN12) swithes to the cooling system. If several
heating and hot water demand, the reversing valve (QN10) simultaneous demands occur while there is a cooling demands,
swithes periodically between the climate system and the hot the system reacts differently. In the event of a hot water
water heater. When the hot water heater is fully charged, the demand, the reversing valve switches back and hot water is
reversing valve swithes to the climate system. produced until the demand is fulfilled. In the event of heating
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on automatically when the demand, the reversing valve switches periodically between
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity. This is used cooling and heating. If the cooling demand is met, the
for both heating and charging water heater. reversing valve switches back to basic mode (heating/hot
water).
The additional heat can also be used for water heater when a
higher temperature is required than the heat pump can produce.

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical installation
General Principle diagram, electrical installation
Indoor unit must be installed via an isolator switch in accordance HSB100
with the local codes and regulations. PEN L1 L2 L3 Electrical
distribution unit
For HMK100, electrical equipments, except outdoor air sensor,
room sensor, current transformers and outdoor unit has been
connected at the factory.
■ Disconnect the indoor unit, outdoor unit and control unit Isolator switch
before insulation testing of the house wiring.
■ If the building is equipped with an earth-fault breaker,
Hydrolution should be equipped with a separate one.
■ For the electrical wiring diagram, see page 85.
■ Do not lay communication, sensor or signal cables for Circulation 3way
FDCW71/100 HSB100 RC-HY20/40 Electric pump valve
external connection close to high voltage lines. (Outdoor unit) (Indoor unit) (Controller) heater

■ Minimum cross section of communication, sensor or signal Power and sensor cable
Communication cable
cables for external connection must be 0.5mm2 up to 50 m,
for example EKKX, LiYY or equivalent. Cable size
■ Use screened three core cable for communication between Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
controller (RC-HY20/40) and indoor unit (HSB100/ Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 2.5mm2 (power cable)
HMK100). 2core, 1.5mm2
■ When laying cables into indoor units and controllers, be Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
sure to route the cable grommet (UB1 AND UB2). 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
Indoor unit – Controller equivalent (communication cable)
■ Be careful to route cables not to be damaged by metal edge
or trapped by panels. The cable size shown on the above table is reference value.
■ Outdoor unit is equipped with a single phase compressor. Choose appropriate size according to local laws and regulations.
This means that phase L3 is loaded with up to α A during
compressor operation. HMK100
PEN L1 L2 L3 Electrical
Outdoor unit α distribution unit
FDCW71VNX 16
FDCW100VNX 23

NOTE
Isolator switch
Electrical installation and service must be carried out
under the supervision of a qualified electrician.
Turn off the circuit breaker before carrying out any
servicing.
Electrical installation and wiring must be carried out in
accordance with the stipulations in force.
Make sure to turn off the power supply during
installation. FDCW71/100 HMK100 RC-HY20/40
(Outdoor unit) (Indoor unit) (Controller)
Power and sensor cable
Communication cable
NOTE
Do not turn on the power on control until the boiler is Cable size
filled with water. Power – Indoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
(power/communication cable)
The circulation pump and immersion heater
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
may become damaged.
(power/communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
NOTE 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)
If the power supply cable is damaged, only authorised
person may replace it to avoid danger or damage. The cable size shown on the above table is reference value.
Choose appropriate size according to local laws and regulations.

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical components HMK100


HSB100 X2
F1
X1 F2
AA23-X1

AA23-F3 AA23
X3
K1-K3
AA23 AA8

T1 F3-SF2
AA23-X4

AA23-S3

AA23-X100

Explanation
AA23 Communication board
AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection
of KVR
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
module / control module
Explanation
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
X1 Terminal block, sensors
module FDCW
X2 Terminal block, power supply
X3 Terminal block
SF1 Controller switch
K1-K3 Submersible heater contact
T1 Thermostat, standby mode
F3 Temperature limiter
AA8 Titanium anode board
AA23 Communication board
F1 Circuit breaker, outdoor unit
F2 Circuit breaker, controller
UB1 Cable grommet
UB2 Cable grommet
F3-SF2 Reset botton, temperature limiter

30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Temperature limiter RC-HY20


Temperature limiter (F3) cuts off the power supply of the PF3 AA4
electrical heating module if the temperature increases to the
range of approximately 87 °C, and can be reset manually.

X2

1
2
3
5 4
6
Resetting

7
8
9
10
13 12 11
Temperature limiter (F3) is accessible behind the front cover.

14
17 16 15
Temperature limiter is reset by strong pressing of the button

18
SF1

21 20 19
(F3-SF2) using a small screwdriver.
X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

Press the button, max. 15 N (approx. 1.5 kg).


AA4-XJ3 AA7
F3
AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

UB1 UB2

FA1

F3-SF2

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7

AA2 LEK

Explanation
AA2 Base card
AA4 Display unit
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, control signal circulation pump,
sensors AUX inputs and heat pump
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

RC-HY40 Accessibility, electrical connection


PF3 AA4
for controller
The cover of the control module is opened using a Torx 25
screwdriver. Assembly takes place in the reverse order.
AA5 AA3
3

SF1 X2
1 2 3 4

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA4-XJ3 AA7

AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

UB1 UB2

FA1

K2
2

1
X2
1 2 3 44

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

NOTE
AA7 The cover to access the base board is opened
AA2 LEK
using a Torx 25 screwdriver

Explanation
AA2 Base card
AA3 Input circuit board
AA4 Display unit
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA5 Accessory card
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
K2 Emergency mode relay
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, AUX4 - AUX6
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal
The display may need to be moved for easier access when
connecting electrics. This is easily done by following these
steps.

32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

4. Secure the display on the panel.

1. Press in the catch on the upper rear side of the display unit
5. When the electrical connection is ready the display must be
towards you (a) and move the display unit upwards (b) so
reinstalled with three mounting points again, otherwise the
that the mountings unhook from the panel.
front cover cannot be installed.

2. Lift the display unit from its mountings.

3. Align the two lower mountings on the reverse of the


display unit with the two upper holes in the panel as
illustrated.

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Cable lock Connection


Use a suitable tool to release/lock cables in the terminal block.
NOTE
HSB100, RC-HY20/40 To prevent interference, unscreened communication and/
Terminal block on the electrical card or sensor cables to external connections must not be laid
closer than 20 cm from high voltage cables.

HSB100
2

1
2

1
Power supply
2
In case of HSB100, power supply is made to indoor unit,
4 LE
K
outdoor unit and controller separately. 230V 1AC 50Hz is
1
applied.
3 For indoor unit, incoming supply is connected on AA23-X1
2 terminal.

AA23-X1

Terminal block AA23-F3

AA23

AA23-X4
LEK

AA23-S3

3,5 mm AA23-X100

1 mm

HMK100 For outdoor unit, incoming supply is connected on TB terminal.


See figure on Connection between indoor and outdoor unit.
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit
The communication cable between indoor and outdoor unit is
connected between terminal AA23-X100 in indoor unit and TB
3 in outdoor unit. Screened 2 core cable is recommended.

1 <HSB100 with FDCW71VNX>

FDCW 71
N L 1 2 3 (AMS
TB 10:TB)
2
HSB 100
Communication AA23-X100
AA23-X100

1
Communication

2
Electrical distribution
Central 3
unit

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HSB100 with FDCW100VNX> HMK100


Circuit breaker
FDCW 100
L N HMK100 is equipped with internal circuit breakers to protect
1 2 3 (AMS
TB 10:TB)
the system and components. The circuit breaker F1 protects
outdoor unit and F2 protects controller.
HSB 100
Communication AA23-X100
AA23-X100 Power supply
In case of HMK100, power supply is made to indoor unit, and
1
Communication further connected to outdoor unit and controller. 400V 3NAC
50Hz is applied.
2
Connect power supply cable to the port for power supply on
Electrical distribution X2 terminal as shown below.
Central 3
unit
L L1 L2 L3 N N PE
4
Connection between indoor unit and controller
See Connection for RC-HY20/40
Cascade connection setting
In case of cascade connection system, it is necessary to allot
unique address to each indoor unit. Set the dip switch S3-1, -2
and -3 according to the following table.
Address S3:1 S3:2 S3:3
1 OFF OFF OFF
2 On OFF OFF
3 OFF On OFF
4 On On OFF
5 OFF OFF On
EMERGENCY

6 On OFF On RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

7 OFF On On
8 On On On

Recommended fuse size for HSB100


The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Fuse size
Indoor unit (HSB100) 6A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Outdoor unit (FDCW71VNX) 20A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Outdoor unit (FDCW100VNX) 30A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Controller (RC-HY20/40) 10A/ 230V 1AC 50Hz
Electric heater (ELK9M)
16 A/400V 3NAC 50Hz
(reference)

Recommended cable size for HSB100


The recommended cable size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Cable size
Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 2.5mm2 (power cable)
2core, 1.5mm2
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between indoor and outdoor unit Fuse size


For interconnection cable between indoor unit and outdoor Indoor unit (HMK100) 25A / 400V 3NAC 50Hz
unit, connect 2, 3, L, N and PE port for outdoor unit on X2
Recommended cable size for HMK100
terminal on HMK100 to 2, 3, L, N, and port on FDCW71/100
respectively according to the below figure. The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
<HMK100 with FDCW71VNX> laws and regulations.
5 x 2,5 mm2
3
Cable size
2
Power – Indoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
1
FDCW71 (power/communication cable)
L
TB Indoor unit – Outdoor unit 5core, 2.5mm2
N (power/communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)

HMK100 RC-HY20/40
X2
Cable connection is different according to the system structure.
Refer to the connection method according to the indoor unit.
HY FDCW

Power supply
HSB100
X1 X2
Connect power cable on X1 terminal as shown below.
RC-HY 20/40 must be installed via an isolator switch with a
minimum breaking gap of 3 mm. Minimum cable area must be
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

sized according to the fuse rating used.

<HMK100 with FDCW100VNX>


5 x 2,5 mm2 X1
3
2
1
FDCW100 L N
N
TB
L

HMK100
RC-HY20/40 X1
X2

HY FDCW

X1 X2
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

Connection between indoor unit and controller


See Connection for RC-HY20/40.
Recommended fuse size for HMK100
The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.

36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

HMK100 <HSB100 with RC-HY40>


Power is supplied through indoor unit. Connect the port L, N Connect the port 1(A), 2(B) and 3(GND) on X4 terminal on
and on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to the port L, N and AA5 board on RC-HY40 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal
PE for controller on X2 terminal on HMK100 respectively as on AA23 board on HSB100 respectively.
shown below. In case several systems are connected to one controller, connect
RC-HY20/40 the port 4, 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA23 board on HSB100
X1 close to the controller to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on
AA23 board on another HSB100.

HSB100 HSB100
GND 6
AA23-X4 GND 6
L N 1 B 5 B 5 AA23-X4
A 4 A 4
GND 3 GND 3
B 2 B 2
A 1 A 1

HMK100
RC-HY40
SMO
X2

L N PE GND B A

AA5-X4
5 4 3 2 1
-X8

-X4
1 2 3
8 7 6
4
5 4 3 2
5
1

AA5-X4
X1 X2
ON

-X2 24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
EMERGENCY

12
11
10

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

-X1 -X10 -X9


PE PE L N 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RC-HY40
Connection between controller and indoor unit
HSB100 HMK100

Signal cable is connected between controller and indoor unit Communication cable and pump cable are connected between
with screened 3 core cable for HSB100. Choose correct controller and indoor unit. with screened 3 core cable for
terminal according to the type of controller as shown below. HMK100. Choose correct terminal according to the type of
controller as shown below.
<HSB100 with RC-HY20>
Connect the port 19(A), 20(B) and 21(GND) on X2 terminal
on RC-HY20 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on AA23
board on HSB100 respectively.

GND 6
B 5 AA23-X4
A 4
GND 3
B 2
A 1

HSB100

RC-HY20 RC-HY20
SMO
X2 18

19 A

20 B

21 GND

X2

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HMK100 with RC-HY20> Connection between controller and circulation


Communication cable pump (GP12)
Connect the port 19(A), 20(B) and 21(GND) on X2 terminal HSB100
on RC-HY20 to the port A, B and GND for EB101 on X1 For HSB100, circulation pump (GP12) is installed outside of
terminal on HMK100 respectively. indoor unit. Choose correct terminal according to the type of
controller.
<HSB100 with RC-HY20>
RC-HY20
X2 Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on
RC-HY20/40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump
18
A
respectively. Control signal cable is connected between the
19
20 B port 1 and 2 on X2 terminal on RC-HY20 and PWM and GND
21 GND
on circulation pump respectively as shown below.

RC-HY20 AA2-X4 4 5 6 7 8 9

X2
SMO 20
RC-HY
GND
A
B

HMK100
Externt
External
X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

PE

L
N
X1
LEK

RC-HY20
EB101-GP12

AA2-X4
EMERGENCY

RC - HY PWM
1
GND
2
3
4
<HMK100 with RC-HY40>
X2
Connect the port 1(A), 2(B) and 3(GND) on X4 terminal on
AA5 board on RC-HY40 to the port A, B and GND for EB101 SMO 20
RC-HY

on X1 on HMK100 respectively. Externt


External

RC-HY20
AA5-X4 RC-HY40
X2
EB101-GP12
-X4
1 2 3
8 7 6
-X8
4
5 4 3 2
5
1
GND B A
ON

-X2 24
23
22
21
5 4 3 2 1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
AA5-X4
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2

RC-HY40 PE PE L
-X1
N 1
-X10
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1

-X9
9
GND
A
B

HMK100
X1

X1
EMERGENCY

RC - HY

38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HSB100 with RC-HY40> HMK100


Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on HMK100 is equipped with circulation pump (GP12). Choose
RC-HY40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump correct terminal according to the type of controller.
(EB101-GP12) respectively. Control signal cable is connected <HMK100 with RC-HY20>
between the port 7 and 8 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC-
HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board to
shown below. the port L, N and PE for GP12 on X2 terminal on HMK100
respectively.
4 5 6 7 8 9
AA2-X4

SMO 40
RC-HY
4 5 6 7 8 9 RC-HY20/40
1 2 3 4

External
Externt
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

N
PE
PE

L
L
N 1 2 3 4

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

LEK

RC-HY40 LEK

EB101-GP12 RC-HY20/40

AA2-X4
AA2-X4 HMK100
10 9 8 7 6 5
X2
AA3-X4 L N PE
GP12
SMO 40
RC-HY
PWM
GND

External
Externt X1 X2

AA3-X4
RC-HY40
EB101-GP12

EMERGENCY
RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

RC-HY40 can connect and control up to two pumps. Connect


the port 12, 13 and 15 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-
HY40 to the port PE, N and L on second circulation pump
Also, connect the port 1 and 2 on X2 terminal to the port PWM
(EB102-GP12) respectively. Control cable is connected
and GND for GP12 on X1 terminal on HMK100 respectively
between the port 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC-
as shown below.
HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as
shown below.

11 12 13 14 15 16
AA2-X4
RC-HY20
X2
PWM
SMO 40
RC-HY 1
GND
2
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

External
Externt 3
4
PE

L
N

LEK

RC-HY40
RC-HY20
EB102-GP12
X2
AA2-X4
HMK100
X1
GND
PWM

8 7 6 5 4 3
AA3-X4 GP12
X1
SMO 40
RC-HY
PWM
GND

External
Externt
EMERGENCY

AA3-X4 RC - HY

RC-HY40
EB102-GP12

39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HMK100 with RC-HY40> Connection between controller and 3-way valve


Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board to (QN10/QN12)
the port L, N and PE for GP12 on X2 terminal on HMK100 3-way valve is used for switching heating / hot water
respectively (same as with RC-HY20). production (QN10), or switching heating / cooling (QN12).
Also, connect the port 7 and 8 on X4 terminal on AA3 board to Install appropriate valves according to the system structure on
the port PWM and GND for GP12 on X1 terminal on HMK100 site.
respectively as shown below. HSB100
HSB100 is not equipped with 3-way valve. Install the valves
on right position according to the diagram and connect wires
on appropriate port according to the type of controller.
RC-HY 40
<HSB100 with RC-HY20>
AA3-X4
• 3-way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10)

PWM
GND
Connect the N, Control and L wire on 3-way valve to the port
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
2, 3 and 4 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20/40
respectively as shown below.
AA3-X4
RC-HY40 AA2-X4 1 2 3 4 5 6

HMK100
SMO
RC-HY20/40
X1
GND
PWM

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
Externt
External
GP12

L
N
X1 LEK

RC-HY20/40
QN10

AA2-X4
RC - HY
• 3-way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)
QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay.
Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port 15 and
16 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20 respectively.
Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below.
Additional setting is necessary in menu 5.4. See Menu system
for details.

14 15 16 17
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
L
N
L N
AA2-X4
QN12

CAUTION
The relay outputs can have a max load of 2 A
at resistive load (230V AC).

40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HSB100 with RC-HY40> HMK100


• 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10) HMK100 is equipped with both QN10 (for switching heating /
Refer to 3-way valve connection for HSB100 with RC-HY20. hot water) and QN12 (for switching heating / cooling). Connect
wires on appropriate port according to the type of controller.
• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)
QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay. <HMK100 with RC-HY20>
Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port C and • 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10)
NO on X7 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 respectively. Connect the port 2, 3 and 4 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on
Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below. RC-HY20/40 to the port N, Black and Brown for QN10 on X2
terminal on HMK100 respectively as shown below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
AA2-X4
QN12
AA3-X7 NL
N
L

External
Externt L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 40
LEK

RC-HY20/40
AA3-X7 NC NO C

HMK100
AA2-X4 X2
RC-HY40

Brown
Black
N
QN10
CAUTION
X1 X2
The relay outputs may be subjected to a max
load of 2A at resistive load (230V AC).

EMERGENCY
RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)


Connect the port 15 and 16 on X3 terminal on AA2 board on
RC-HY20 to the port Brown and Black for QN12 on X2
terminal on HMK100 respectively. Also, connect to the port 0 on
X1 terminal on RC-HY20 to N port for QN12 on X2 terminal on
HMK100. In addition, connect the port 1 on X1 terminal to the
port 15 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20.
X1

1 0 PE 2 3

15 1 6 17
AA2-X4

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

LEK

RC-HY20

X1
HMK100
AA2-X4 X2
N L 1 1 0 PE 4
Brown
Black
N

QN12
X1 X2
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HMK100 with RC-HY40> Connection between controller and sensors


• 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10) Sensor connection is different according to the combination of
Refer to 3-way valve connection for HMK100 with RC-HY20. indoor unit and controller. Refer to the appropriate combination
• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12) mentioned below.

Connect the port C and NO on X7 terminal on AA3 board on Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section.
RC-HY40 to the port Brown and Black for QN12 on X2 Regarding other sensors not mentioned in this chapter, refer to
terminal on HMK100 respectively. Also, connect the port 0 on page 49, Optional connections.
X1 terminal on RC-HY40 to N port for QN12 on X2 terminal
on HMK100. In addition, connect the port 1 on X1 terminal to <RC-HY20 with HSB100>
the port C on X7 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40.
• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1
X1
Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a
1 0 PE 2 3
wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the
C NO NC
AA3-X7
morning sun.
Connect the sensor to the port 3 and 6 on X2 terminal.
AA3X7
If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation
RC-HY40 in the sensor capsule.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External
HMK100
X2 1
2
Brown
Black
N

3
X1 QN12 4
5 BT1
6
RC-HY20
X1 X2 7
X2
X2

• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)


The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in
EMERGENCY

RC - HY RC - HY FDCW
the submerged tube on the water heater.
Connect the sensor to the port 5 and 6 on X2 terminal.
Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start
guide.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

1
2
3
4
5

6
BT6
RC-HY20 7

X2 X2

• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)


A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected
to RC-HY20 to show the water temperature at the top of the
tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
Connect the sensor to the port 4 and 6 on X2 terminal.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

1
2
3
4
5
BT7
6

RC-HY20 7

X2 X2

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater <RC-HY20 with HMK100>


This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before • Ambient air temperature sensor BT1
3-way valve (QN10) for switching heating/hot water (see page
Refer to the connection RC-HY20 with HSB100.
26 for diagram).
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)
Connect temperature sensor, external supply after electric
heater (BT63) to the port 9 and 10 on terminal X2. The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed at
the bottom part of the water heater. Connect the port 5 and 6 on
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External
X2 terminal on RC-HY20 to the port BT6 on X1 terminal on
HMK100.
6

7
8
9
1
2
10
BT63 3
11
RC-HY20 4
X2 X2 5

6
RC-HY20
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating 7
X2
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way X2
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
diagram).

BT6
Connect temperature sensor, external supply (BT25) to the port
8 and 10 on X2 terminal. HMK100
X1
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

7
8
X1
9
BT25
10

11
RC-HY20
X2 X2
RC - HY

• Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating


This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
diagram).
For connection, see page 50, AUX inputs.
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
This sensor is used in case cooling application is required.
For connection, see page 51, AUX inputs.

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top) • Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater
The temperature sensor, hot water top (BT7) is placed at the The temperature sensor BT63 is placed on the outlet at
top of the water heater. Connect the port 4 and 6 on X2 additional heater. Connect the port 9 and 10 on X2 terminal on
terminal on RC-HY20 to the port BT7 on X1 terminal on RC-HY20 to the port BT63 on X1 terminal on HMK100.
HMK100.

1
6
2
7
3
4 8

5 9

6 10
RC-HY20 RC-HY20
7 11
X2 X2
X2 X2

BT63
BT7

HMK100 HMK100
X1 X1

X1 X1

RC - HY RC - HY

44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating <RC-HY40 with HSB100>


The temperature sensor BT 25 is placed on the supply line for • Ambient air temperature sensor BT1
heating. Connect the port 8 and 10 on X2 terminal on RC-
Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a
HY20 to the port BT25 on X1 terminal on HMK100.
wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the
morning sun for example.
Connect the sensor to the port 1 and 2 on X6 terminal on AA3
6 board.
7 If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation
8
9
in the sensor capsule.
10 SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
RC-HY20
11 1
X2 2
X2 3
4
BT1
5
6
BT25

7
8

HMK100 AA3-X6 AA3-X6


RC-HY40
X1

• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)


The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in
the submerged tube on the water heater.
X1
Connect the sensor to the port 7 and 8 on X6 terminal on AA3
board.
Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start
guide.
RC - HY

SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External

• Temperature sensor BT71, return pipe 6


7
8
The temperature sensor BT71 is placed on the return pipe line 9 BT6
for water heater. For connection, see page 50, AUX inputs. 10
11
12
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling 13

The temperature sensor BT64 is placed on the supply line for AA3-X6 AA3-X6
cooling. For connection, see page 51, AUX inputs. RC-HY40

• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)

A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected


to RC-HY40 to show the water temperature at the top of the
tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
Connect the sensor to the port 15 and 16 on X6 terminal on
AA3 board.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External

11
12
13
14
15
16
17 BT7
18

AA3-X6 AA3-X6
RC-HY40

45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater <RC-HY40 with HMK100>


This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before 3 • Ambient air temperature sensor BT1
way valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hotwater (see page
Refer to the connection RC-HY40 with HSB100.
26 for diagram).
• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)
For connection, see page54, AUX inputs.
The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed at
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
the bottom part of the water heater. Connect the port 7 and 8 on
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way X6 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT6 on
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for X1 terminal on HMK100.
diagram).
Connect temperature sensor, external supply line (BT25) to the
port 5 and 6 on X6 terminal on AA3 board. 6
7
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External 8
9
4 10
5 11
6 12
7 BT25 13
8 AA3-X6
9
10
RC-HY40 AA3-X6
11
AA3-X6 AA3-X6
RC-HY40

BT6
• Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating
HMK100
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way X1
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 27 for
diagram).
Connect temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) to the
port 17 and 18 on X6 terminal on AA3 board. X1
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External

11
12
13
14
15 RC-HY
16
17
18

AA3-X6 BT71
AA3-X6
RC-HY40
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
This sensor is used in case cooling application is required.
For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs.

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top) • Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater
The temperature sensor, hot water top (BT7) is placed at the The temperature sensor BT63 is placed on the outlet at
top of the water heater. Connect the port 15 and 16 on X6 additional heater. For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs.
terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT7 on X1
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
terminal on HMK100.
The temperature sensor BT 25 is placed on the supply line for
heating. Connect the port 5 and 6 on X6 terminal on RC-HY40
11 to the port BT25 on X1 terminal on HMK100.
12
13
14
15
16 4
17 5
18 6
AA3-X6 7
RC-HY40 AA3-X6 8
9
10
AA3-X6 11
RC-HY40
BT7

AA3-X6
HMK100
X1

BT25
HMK100
X1
X1

X1
EMERGENCY

RC - HY

RC - HY

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT71, return pipe Optional connections


The temperature sensor BT71 is placed on the return pipe line
RC-HY20
for water heater. Connect the port 17 and 18 on X6 terminal on
AA3 board on RC-HY40 to the port BT71 on X1 terminal on Room sensor BT50
HMK100. Room sensor can be connected to controller.
The room temperature sensor has up to three functions:
11 1. Show current room temperature in the control module
12
13 display.
14
15 2. Option of changing the room temperature in °C.
16
17
3. Makes it possible to change/stabilise the room temperature.
AA3-X6 18 Install the sensor in a neutral position where the set temperature
RC-HY40
AA3-X6 is required. A suitable location is on a free inner wall in a hall
approx. 1.5 m above the floor.
Do not install the sensor where correct room temperature
cannot be detected such as in a recess, between shelves, behind
BT71

a curtain, above or close to a heat source, in a draft from an


external door or in direct sunlight.
HMK100
Closed radiator thermostats can also cause problems.
X1
The control module can operate without the sensor, but if user
wants to read off the accommodation's indoor temperature in
controller display, the sensor must be installed.
Connect the room sensor to the port 7 and 10 on X2 terminal.
X1
If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in
°C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor
must be activated in menu 1.9.4.
If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it
RC-HY
should only have an indicatory function, not control of the
room temperature.
RC-HY 20 External
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling
The temperature sensor BT64 is placed on the supply line for 6

cooling. For connection, see page 54, AUX inputs. 7


8
9

10 BT50
11
RC-HY20
X2 X2

CAUTION
Changes of temperature in accommodation
take time. For example, short time periods in
combination with underfloor heating will not
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.

Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section.

48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Step controlled additional heat <Connection example with HMK100>

NOTE Connect the port 2, 4, 6 on X2 terminal on AA7 board on RC-


HY20/40 to the port K1, K2, K3 on X2 terminal on HMK100
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for
respectively.
external voltage.

External step controlled additional heat can be controlled by up X1 AA7-X2


to three potential-free relays in the control module (3 step -X1

12 34 56
linear or 7 step binary). Alternatively two relays (2 step linear 1 2 3 4 5 6
-X2
or 3 step binary) can be used for step controlled additional 1 0 PE
6
heat, which means that the third relay can be used to control
1 2 3 4

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7-X2
the immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator tank.
LEK

Step in occurs with at least 1 minute intervals and step outs RC-HY
SMO 20/40
with at least 3 seconds intervals.
Step 1 is connected to terminal block X2:2 on the additional N L 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

relay board (AA7).


RC-HY 20/40
Step 2 is connected to terminal block X2:4 on the additional X1
relay board (AA7).
Step 3 or immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator
tank is connected to terminal block X2:6 on the additional HMK100
relay board (AA7).
The settings for step controlled additional heat are made in
X2
menu 4.9.3 and menu 5.1.12.
K1 K2 K3
All additional heat can be blocked by connecting a potential-
free switch function to the software controlled input on
terminal block X2 which is selected in menu 5.4. X1 X2

X1 AA7-X2
-X1
12 34 56

MERGENCY
1 2 3 4 5 6
-X2
1 0 PE RC - HY RC - HY F

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
6
AA7-X2
LEK

RC-HY
SMO
20/40
External
E
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3
A2 A2 A2
RC-HY20/40 X1

If the relays are to be used for control voltage, bridge the


supply from terminal block X1:1 toX2:1, X2:3 and X2:5 on
additional relay board (AA7). Connect the neutral from the
external additional heat to terminal block X1:0.
Use a cable with appropriate cross section.
For connection, see the installation manual for additional
heater.

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Relay output for emergency mode <Connection example with HMK100>


Connect the port 4 on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to
NOTE EMERGENCY on X2 terminal on HMK100, as well as the
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for port 0 on X1 terminal on RC-HY20/40 to Neutral on HMK100.
external voltage.
A2
X1 A1
When the switch (SF1) is in " " mode (emergency mode) the
circulation pump is activated (EB101-GP12).
1 0 PE 2 3

CAUTION
No hot water is produced when emergency RC-HY
SMO 20/40
mode is activated.

The emergency mode relay can be used to activate external RC-HY20/40 X1


additional heat. Between the port 2 and 4 is closed during N
HMK100
emergency mode. An external thermostat must be connected to
the control circuit (port 4) to control the temperature. Ensure
that the heating medium circulates through the external X2
additional heating.

K1
K2
K3
EMERGENCY
X1 X2

PE 2 3 4 X1

EMERGENCY
RC - HY RC - HY

RC-HY
SMO 20/40
External
Externt
Set the supply temperature with the thermostat T1 in case of
emergency mode. The setting range is 6-67℃. For floor
heating, the setting must be min.20℃ to max. 35-45℃ in order
RC-HY20/40 X1 to preserve heat comfort in the room and ensure effective
system operation. When the temperature is set at 35℃ or
If the relay is to be used for control voltage, bridge the supply higher, be careful not to cause low temperature burn.
from terminal block X1:1 to X1:2 and connect neutral and
control voltage from the external additional heat to X1:0 (N)
and X1:4 (L).

X1

1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20/40
Externt
External

N L
RC-HY20/40 X1

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

External circulation pump ■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64)


Connect the external circulation pump (GP10) to terminal Temperature sensor BT64 is required in case 4-pipe system
block X4:9 (PE), X4:10 (N) and X4:11 (230 V) on the base is used for cooling operation. (see page 26-28 for diagram)
board (AA2) as illustrated. This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is
AA2-X4 8 9 10 11 12 13 activated.
■ Contact for external tariff blocking
RC-HY
SMO 20/40 In cases where external tariff blocking is required it must be
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
External
Externt connected to terminal block X2.
Tariff blocking means that the additional heat, the

PE

L
N
LEK

compressor, heating and cooling are disconnected by


RC-HY20/40
connecting a potential free switch function to the input
GP10
selected in menu 5.4.
AA2-X4
A closed contact results in the electrical output being
AUX inputs disconnected.
Other external inputs are available on the port 11 through 18 ■ Switch for “SG ready”
on X2 terminal on RC-HY20.
AUX1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 correspond to the port 11, 12, 13, 15,
NOTE
16 and 17 respectively. Port 14 and 18 are GND and are This function can only be used in mains networks
common to the all auxiliary circuit. Connect a sensor or switch that support the "SG Ready"-standard .
between AUX and GND with a two-core cable with a minimum "SG Ready" requires two AUX inputs.
cross section of 0.5mm2.
This function can only be used in power supply networks that
11
AUX1 support the “SG Ready” standard. “SG Ready” requires two
12 AUX2
13 AUX3 AUX inputs.
1
2
3
5 4

14
GND
6
7

“SG Ready” is a smart tariff management scheme in which


8
9
10
13 12 11

15
AUX4
14
17 16 15

16
AUX5 electricity supplier can affect indoor and hot water temperature
18
21 20 19

17 AUX6
or simply prohibits additional heat and/or the compressor
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

18 GND
LEK
19
20
operation in heat pump at certain period of the day. You can
RC-HY20 21 choose which operation mode is affected by this function in
X2 menu 4.1.5 after the function is activated.
Choose two external input circuits and connect potential-free
Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4. switches, and set “SG Ready A” and “SG Ready B” in menu
5.4. The system works differently according to the combination
soft in/outputs 5.4
of the circuit open/closed.

block heating
Blocking (A: Closed, B: Open)
“SG Ready” is active. Compressor operation and additional
activate temp lux
heat is prohibited.
not used
Normal mode (A: Open, B: Open)
not used
“SG Ready” is not active. No effect on the system.
not used Low price mode (A: Open, B: Closed)
not used "SG Ready" is active. The system operates to provide higher
capacity than normal mode by using lower tariff electricity.
■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74) You can select the operation mode (heating/hot water/
Additional room sensor (BT74) is applied in case user wants cooling) affected by this function in menu 4.1.5.
to determine the operation mode (cooling/heating) with a Overcapacity mode (A: Closed, B: Closed)
temperature in a particular room. “SG Ready” is active. The system supplies higher capacity
This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is than Low price mode since the electricity price is supposed
available. to be very low in this mode. You can select the operation
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) mode (heating/hot water/cooling) affected by this function in
menu 4.1.5.
Temperature sensor BT71 is applied in case additional heater
is placed after 3-way valve (see page 27 and 28 for diagram).

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

■Contact for activation of “temporary lux” • AUX outputs


Temporary hot water production function “temporary lux” is External output is available on the port 15 to 17 on X4 terminal
activated with this signal. Connect the terminals with a on AA2 board on RC-HY20. The relay output can have a max
potential-free switch and choose the function in menu 5.4. load of 2A at resistive load.
“Temporary lux” is activated only when the switch is closed.
■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
Target temperature offset for supply temperature or room
14 15 16 17
temperature can be done with this signal. AA2-X4

When a room sensor is connected and activated, the target


L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
room temperature is offset in ℃ if the switch is closed. LEK

When a room sensor is not connected, target supply water RC-HY20 External
Externt
temperature (heat curve) is offset instead. The degree of
offset can be set in menu 5.4. AA2-X4
■Switch for external alarm
Alarms from external devices can be connected to the control Following functions are available. Select the function in menu
and appear as an info alarm. Potential-free signal of NO or 5.4.
NC type can be connected. Indication of buzzer alarm
■Switch for external blocking When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between
This function is used in case certain operation mode needs to the port 15 and 16. During normal operation, the port 15 and
be prohibited. The operation at selected operation mode is 17 is closed.
prohibited when the switch is closed. Following functions Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
can be managed. cooling)
Additional heat When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
compressor operation becomes closed between the port 15 and 16. By using this
heating mode signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
cooling mode
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 40 to 41.
hot water mode
External pump control (GP10)
External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 27 for diagram).
Connect the circulation pump as shown below using the port
15 and 16 on X4 terminal.

14 15 16 1 7
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
L
N
PE L N PE
AA2-X4

Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
(refer to page 22 for diagram).

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump RC-HY40


control (GP10).
Load monitor
In case many power electrical appliances are connected in the
NOTE property and the electric heater is energised at the same time,
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external there is a risk of tripping the main fuse of the property.
voltage.
The control module has an integrated load monitor that controls
the power steps of the electric heater by disconnecting step by
step in the event of overload in a phase. It will be reconnected
myUpway™ if other current consumption is reduced.
Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP) Connecting current sensors
with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display A current sensor (BE1 - BE3) should be installed on each
unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the incoming phase conductor in to the electrical distribution unit
control module for cable routing. to measure the current. This is best done in the electrical
distribution unit.
Connect the current sensors to a multi-core cable in an
enclosure next to the electrical distribution unit. Use a multi-
core cable of at least 0.5 mm² from the enclosure to the heat
pump.
Connect the cable to terminal block X4:1 to 4.
AA4-X9
-
X4:1 is the common terminal block for the three current
sensors.
Set the size of the property's main fuse in menu 5.1.12.
Incoming electricity
Inkommande el
P EN L1 L2 L3

Electrical distribution unit

Control module
Värmepump

AA3-X4
6 5 4 3 2 1

RC-HY
SMO 40
External
Externt
AA3-X4
RC-HY40
BE3 BE1
BE2

53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Room sensor BT50 AUX inputs
Refer to Room sensor BT50 for RC-HY20 for function and Up to 6 other external inputs are available on RC-HY40.
installation place. AUX1 through 3 correspond to the port 9/10, 11/12, 13/14
Connect the room sensor to terminal block X6:3 and X6:4 on respectively on X6 terminal on AA3 board. AUX4 through 6
the input board (AA3). correspond to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X2 terminal on RC-HY40.
If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in Port 4 on X2 terminal is GND and is common to AUX4
°C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor through 6. Connect a sensor or switch between AUX and GND
must be activated in menu 1.9.4. with a two-core cable with a minimum cross section of
0.5mm2.
If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it
should only have an indicatory function, not control of the
AUX1
room temperature.
SMO External
RC-HY40 Externt AUX2 AA3-X6

2 AUX3
3
4
5
6
7 BT50
8
9
RC-HY40
AA3-X6 X2
AA3-X6 RC-HY40

AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
GND
CAUTION
Changes of temperature in accommodation
take time. For example, short time periods in Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4.
combination with underfloor heating will not
soft in/outputs 5.4
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.
block heating

activate temp lux


• Step controlled additional heat
not used
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
not used
• Relay output for emergency mode
not used
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
not used
• External circulation pump
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
■ Temperature sensor, external supply at additional heat before
reversing valve (BT63)
Temperature sensor BT63 is applied in case additional heater
is placed before 3-way valve (see page 26 for diagram)
The following functions are available. For details, see AUX
inputs for RC-HY20.
■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74)
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71)
■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64)
■ Contact for external tariff blocking
■ Switch for “SG ready”
■Contact for activation of “temporary lux”
■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
■Switch for external alarm
■Switch for external blocking

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

AUX outputs Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


External output is available on the port NC, NO and C on X7 In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40. The relay output can storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
have a max load of 2A at resistive load. likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
X1 AA7-X2 applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
-X1
(refer to page 22 for diagram).
12 34 56

-X2
1 2 3 4 5 6
For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump
1 0 PE
1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6
control (GP10).
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7-X2
LEK

RC-HY
SMO 40
NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external
External
Externt
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4 voltage.
A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3
A2 A2 A2
RC-HY40 X1
myUpway™
Following functions are available. Select the function in menu Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP)
5.4. with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display
Indication of buzzer alarm unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the
When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between control module for cable routing.
the port NO and C. During normal operation, the port NC
and C is closed.
Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
cooling)
When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
becomes closed between the port NO and C. By using this AA4-X9
-
signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 40 and
41.
External pump control (GP10)
External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 27 and 28 for diagram).
Connect the circulation pump using the port NO and C on
X7 terminal on AA3 board as shown below.

PE N L
PE
N
L

External
Externt
AA3-X7
RC-HY40 RC-HY
SMO 40

AA3-X7 NC NO C

55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Commissioning and adjusting


Preparations CAUTION
Open the hot water intake valves before heating the system
Before starting commissioning, check the followings; up for the first time or after a longer break in its operation
The signal cable is connected between indoor unit and in order to check whether the storage tank is filled with
water and the cut-off valve at the cold water inlet is not
outdoor unit as well as indoor unit and controller according closed.
to the instruction.
The power cable is connected to indoor unit, outdoor unit
and controller according to the instruction.
Climate system
Operation switch in controller is in the position .
1. Open the vent at the top of the heating system.
The service valves on outdoor unit (QM35 and QM36) are
open. 2. Open all shut-off valves, where installed, so that water flows
into all circuits.
Drain valve is closed before filling water in the system.
3. Open the valve for filling the heating circuit and fill it with
Temperature limiter and electrical switch are not tripped.
water.
The system is filled with water and well vented.
4. Close the vent when water comes out continuously without
There are no leaks on the water pipe. bubbles.
5. Check the manometer and close the filling valve when the
Filling and venting pressure reaches the required value (2 bar is recommended).
6. Start the circulation pump of the heating system, and open
Hot water tank the vent from time to time and release the all remaining air
1. Open the hot water tap as well as venting valve if applicable, in the heating system.
and then open the cold water cut-off valve at the inlet. 7. Open safety valve until the pressure of the heating system
2. Fill the storage tank until obtaining uniform water outflow at drops down to about 1 bar. If the pressure drops below 1 bar
the hot water tap, and then close the hot water tap and during venting, add additional water in the circuit.
venting valve.
3. Fill the water heater coil in the tank. See Climate system for Inspection of installation
details.
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the Current regulations require that the climate system is inspected
procedure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page before it is commissioned. The inspection must be carried out
18): by a suitably qualified person and must be documented. Do not
replace any part of the system without carrying out new
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
checks.
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulati on system, connect
it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating medium
to the coil.

CAUTION
If there is an electric heating module installed in the
storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start-up and inspection Cooling mode


In case the climate system contains a cooling circuit, activate
Before start-up cooling function in menu 5.11.1.1. After that, you can choose
1 In case of cascade connection, check if each indoor unit has cooling mode indication in menu 5.4 for the AUX output.
a unique address. See Cascade connection setting on page
Cleaning particle filter
35 for details.
Clean the particle filter (HQ1) after installation.
2. For an outdoor unit equipped with a crank case heater, it is
necessary to supply power 6-8 hours before starting 1. Close valve QM31 and the valve by the particle filter (HQ1).
compressor operation to heat the compressor with the heater. 2. Open the safety valve (QM20) to ensure that the pressure in
To do this, supply power to whole system and disable the HSB60 drops.
compressor operation from menu 5.2.2 on the controller. 3. Clean the particle filter (HQ1) as illustrated.
Disable additional heater as well if necessary.
3. After 6-8 hours, enable the compressor operation in menu 1

LEK
5.2.2 on the controller and enable the additional heater in
menu 4.9.2 and 4.9.3 on the controller.
4. Start commissioning by the following steps.
*Step 2 and 3 are not necessary for FDCW60VNX-A.

Commissioning with heat pump


Start guide is shown on the display on the controller when it is
turned ON for the first time. Follow the start guide in the 2

LEK
display, or choose menu 5.7 to show the start guide. For details,
see Start guide on page 58.
Commissioning with additional heater
only
Follow the start guide in the display as same as commissioning
with heat pump, and then follow the list below.
1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
Secondary adjustment
2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
Air is initially released from the hot water and venting may be
the OK button.
necessary. If bubbling sounds can be heard from the heat pump,
3. Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button. the circulation pump and radiators the entire system will
require further venting. When the system is stable (correct
CAUTION pressure and all air eliminated) the automatic heating control
When commissioning without MHI air/water heat pump an system can be set as required
alarm communication error may appear in the display.
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").

3-way valve operation check


1. Activate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
2. Check that the reversing valve opens or is open for hot water
charging.
3. Deactivate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
AUX function check
To check any function connected to the AUX socket,
1. Activate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-HY40)”
in menu 5.6.
2. Check the desired function.
3. Deactivate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-
HY40)” in menu 5.6.

57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start guide Operation in the start guide


A. Page B. Name and menu number
NOTE
Fill in the climate system with water before the switch is set language 4.6
to " "

1. Set the control module's switch to " ".


2. Follow the instructions in the start guide in the control
module display. If the start guide does not start when you
start the control module, start it manually in menu 5.7.

TIP
See page 63 for a more in-depth introduction to the If the start guide is left on this page it closes
installation’s control system (operation, menus etc.). automatically in
60 min

C. Option / setting
Commissioning
The start guide is displayed when installation is started, It A. Page
describes what needs to carry out at the first start together with
basic settings during installation. You can see the current page of the start guide.
The start guide is displayed so that it cannot be bypassed in Scroll between the pages of the start guide as follows:
order to carry out the start-up correctly. You can start the start 1. Turn the control knob until the arrow is marked in the top
guide later in menu 5.7. left corner (at the page number).
During the start-up guide, reversing valves and the shunt are 2. Press OK button to proceed to the next page in the start
run back and forth to help vent the heat pump. guide.
B. Name and menu number
CAUTION
As long as the start guide is active, no function in the heat You can see the menu name of this page. The number refers to
pump will start automatically. the menu number in the control system.
Each time the controller is ON, the guide will appear until it To read more about affected menus, see the help menu or read
is completed on the last page. the user manual.

C. Option / setting
Make settings for the system here.

D. Help menu
In many menus there is a symbol indicating that extra help
is available.
To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
scroll between using the control knob.

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Heating/cooling curve setting The optimum slope depends on the climate conditions in your
location, the type of heating device (radiators or under floor
heating curve 1.9.1.1 heating) and how well insulated the house is.
system
The curve is set when the heating installation is installed, but
flow temperature °C may need adjusting later. Normally, the curve will not need
further adjustment.

CAUTION
In the event of making fine adjustments of the indoor
temperature, the curve must be offset up or down instead,
outdoor temp. °C
this is done in menu 1.1 temperature .

cooling curve 1.9.1.2 Curve offset


system
The target temperature can be offset in parallel over the entire
flow temperature °C
outdoor temperature range by this function. This is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
The target temperature can be parallel offset in the entire
outdoor temperature range with this function. It is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
outdoor temp. °C
Supply temperature
°C
70
Offset
Förskju tenheating curve
vär mekurva

heating curve 60

Setting range: 0 – 15 50

Default value: 9 40

30
cooling curve (accessory required)
Setting range: 0 – 9 10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
UTETEMPERATUR
Outdoor temperature
Default value: 0
Flow line temperature – maximum and
The prescribed heating curve for your house can be viewed in minimum values
the menu heating curve . The task of the heating curve is to This function is used in order to limit max-min supply
give an even indoor temperature, regardless of the outdoor temperature. The heating / cooling curve becomes flat beyond
temperature, and thereby energy efficient operation. From this max / min target temperature.
heating curve, the control module determines the temperature
of the water to the heating system, supply temperature, and CAUTION
there by the indoor temperature. Select the heating curve and Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
read off how the supply temperature changes at different temperature set between 35 and 45°C. Take care not to
outdoor temperatures here. If there is cooling function, the cause low temperature burns in case it is set higher than
35°C.
same settings can be made for the cooling curve.
Must be restricted with underfloor cooling min. flow line
Curve coefficient temp. to prevent condensation.
The heating/cooling curve shows the relation between the Check the max temperature for your floor with your
target supply temperature and the corresponding outdoor installer/floor supplier.
temperature. A steep curve indicates that supply temperature
becomes higher at low outdoor air temperature in heating and
it becomes lower at high outdoor air temperature in cooling. Supply temperature
°C
70
Supply temperature
°C
70 60
Steeper
Brantare curve slope
kur vlutning Maximum value
Maximivärde
60
50

50
40

40
30 Minimum value
Minimivärde
30

10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
Outdoor temperature
UTETEMPERATUR
10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40°C
Outdoor tempera
UTETEMPERATUR

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

The figure at the end of the curve indicates the curve number. Hot water circulation setting
The figure beside the thermometer icon gives the curve offset.
Use the control knob to set a new value. hot water recirc.
Confirm the new setting by pressing the OK button. operating time
Curve 0 is an own curve created in menu 1.9.7.
Setting range: 1 – 60 min
To select another curve (slope): Default value: 60 min
1. Press OK button to access the setting mode downtime
2. Select a new curve. The curves are numbered from 0 to 15, Setting range: 0 – 60 min
and the bigger number curve has steeper slope.
Default value: 0 min
Curve 0 means that own curve (menu 1.9.7) is used.
3. Press OK button to exit the setting.
Set the hot water circulation for up to three periods per day
To read off a curve: here. During the set periods the hot water circulation pump will
1. Turn the control knob so that the ring on the shaft with the run according to the settings above.
outdoor temperature is marked. "operating time" decide how long the hot water circulation
2. Press OK button. pump must run per operating instance.
3. Follow the grey line up to the curve and out to the left to "downtime" decide how long the hot water circulation pump
read off the value for the supply temperature at the selected must be stationary between operating instances.
outdoor temperature. Hot water circulation is activated in menu 5.4 "soft inputs and
4. You can now select to take read outs for different outdoor outputs".
temperatures by turning the control knob to the right or left
and read off the corresponding flow temperature.
5. Press OK or Back button to exit read off mode.

TIP
Wait 24 hours before making a new setting, so that the
room temperature has time to stabilise.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve slope by one increment.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve slope by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve offset by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve offset by one increment.

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

SG Ready
This function can only be used in mains networks that support
the "SG Ready"-standard .
Make settings for the function "SG Ready" here.
Low price mode means that the electricity supplier has a low
tariff and the system uses this to reduce costs.
Over capacity mode means that the electricity supplier has set
the tariff very low and the system uses this to reduce the costs
as much as possible.
affect room temperature
Here you set whether room temperature should be affected
when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset of the
indoor temperature is increased by "+1". If a room sensor is
installed and activated, the desired room temperature increases
by 1 °C.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset for
the indoor temperature is increased by"+2".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature increases by 2 °C.
affect hot water
Here you set whether the temperature of the hot water should
be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode on "SG Ready" the stop temperature of
the hot water is set as high as possible at only compressor
operation (immersion heater not permitted).
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the hot water is set to
"luxury" (immersion heater permitted).
affect cooling (accessory required)
Here you set whether room temperature during cooling
operation should be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation the
indoor temperature is not affected.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation
the parallel offset for the indoor temperature is reduced by"-1".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature decreases by 1 °C.

NOTE
The function must be connected to two AUX inputs and
activated in menu 5.4.

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Control
Display unit

A Display
B Status lamp
C OK button
D Back button
E Control knob
F Switch
G USB port

A Display F Switch (SF1)


Instructions, settings and operational information are shown The switch shows three positions:
on the display. The easy-to-read display and menu system, ■ On ( )
make it easy to navigate between various menus and options, ■ Standby ( )
set comfort and get the necessary information. ■ Emergency mode ( )
B Status lamp Emergency mode must only be used in the event of a fault
on the control module. In this mode, the compressor in the
The status lamp indicates the status of the control module.
heat pump is turned off and the immersion heater is
It:
activated.
■ lights green during normal operation.
The control module display is not illuminated and the status
■ lights yellow in emergency mode.
lamp lights yellow.
■ lights red in the event of an alarm.
C OK button G USB port
The USB port is hidden behind the plastic badge of the
The OK button is used to:
product name.
■ confirm selections of sub menus/options/set values/page in
The USB port is used to update the software.
the start guide.
D Back button
The back button is used to:
■ go back to the previous menu.
■ change a setting that has not been confirmed.
E Control knob
The control knob can be turned to the right or left. You can:
■ scroll in menus and between options.
■ increase and decrease values.
■ change pages in multiple page instructions
(for example help text and service info).

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu system Symbols in the display


The following symbols can appear in the display during
Outdoor Indoor temperature- operation.
tempeature (if room sensors are installed)
Symbol Description

-5o This symbol appears when there is informa-


Hot water temp. tion to be noticed in menu 3.1.
22o
INDOOR CLIMATE

54o These two symbols indicate whether the


MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER compressor in the outdoor unit or additional
Estimated amount of heat in the installation is blocked via
hot water
INFO controller.
These functions will be blocked for example,
Information about Temporary lux when either of the operation mode is blocked
operation (if activated)
in menu 4.2, when blocking of either function
is scheduled in menu 4.9.5, or when an alarm
Menu 1 - INDOOR CLIMATE for blocking the operation occurs.
Setting and scheduling the indoor climate. See information in
the help menu or user manual. Blocking the compressor.
Menu 2 - HOT WATER
Blocking additional heat.
Setting and scheduling hot water production. See information
in the help menu or user manual.
This symbol appears if periodic increase or
This menu only appears if a water heater is installed in the lux mode for the hot water is activated.
system.
Menu 3 - INFO This symbol indicates if "holiday setting" is
active in menu 4.7.
Display of temperature and other operating information and
access to the alarm log. See information in the help menu or This symbol indicates if the controller has
user manual. contact with myUpway.
Menu 4 - MY INSTALLATION
This symbol indicates if cooling is active.
Setting time, date, language, display, operating mode etc. See
information in the help menu or user manual.
Menu 5 - SERVICE
Advanced settings. These settings are not available to the end
user. The menu is made visible by pressing the Back button for
7 seconds in the top screen. See page 68 for details.

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu number – marked sub menu Name and menu number – main menu

Symbol –
INDOOR CLIMATE 1
main menu

INDOOR CLIMATE 1.1 temperature 25.0O

scheduling
MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER
advanced

INFO

Marked main
menu
Symbols – sub menus Name – sub menus Status information – sub menus

Operation Setting a value


To move the cursor, turn the control knob to the left time & date 4.4
or the right. The marked position is brighter and/or time
has a light frame. 24 h

Selecting menu 12 h
date
To advance in the menu system select a main menu by marking
day
it and then pressing the OK button. A new window opens with
sub menus. month

Select one of the sub menus by marking it and then pressing year
the OK button.
Selecting options
comfort mode 2.2 Values to be changed

To set a value:
economy
1. Mark the value you want to set using the control
normal knob.
luxury 2. Press the OK button. The background of the value
becomes green, which means that you have accessed
the setting mode.
3. Turn the control knob to the right to increase the
value and to the left to reduce the value.
Alternative 4. Press the OK button to confirm the value you have
set. To change and return to the original value, press
In an options menu the current selected option is
the Back button.
indicated by a green tick.
To select another option:
1. Mark the applicable option. One of the options is pre-
selected (white).
2. Press the OK button to confirm the selected option.
The selected option has a green tick.

64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Use the virtual keyboard Help menu


In many menus there is a symbol that indicates that extra
help is available.
To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press the OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
Different keyboards scroll between using the control knob.

In some menus where text may require entering, a virtual


keyboard is available.

Depending on the menu, you can gain access to different


character sets which you can select using the control knob. To
change character table, press the Back button. If a menu only
has one character set, the keyboard is displayed directly.
When you have finished writing, mark "OK" and press the OK
button.
Scroll through the windows
A menu can consist of several windows. Turn the control knob
to scroll between the windows.

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

Scroll through the windows in the start


guide

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

1. Turn the control knob until one of the arrows in the top left
corner (at the page number) has been marked.
2. Press the OK button to skip between the steps in the start
guide.

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu list
"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
1 INDOOR CLIMATE
1.1 - temperature 1.1.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.1.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.3 - scheduling 1.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9 - advanced 1.9.1 curve 1.9.1.1 heating curve ✔ ✔
1.9.1.2 cooling curve ** ✔ ✔
1.9.2 external adjustment ✔ ✔
1.9.3 min. flow line temp. 1.9.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.4 room sensor settings ✔ ✔
1.9.5 cooling settings * ✔ ✔
1.9.7 own curve 1.9.7.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.7.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.8 point offset ✔ ✔
2 HOTWATER
2.1 temporary lux ✔ ✔
2.2 comfort mode ✔ ✔
2.3 scheduling ✔ ✔
2.9 advanced 2.9.1 periodic increase ✔ ✔
2.9.2 hot water recirc. * ✔ ✔
3 INFO
3.1 service info ✔ ✔
3.2 compressor info ✔ ✔
3.3 add. heat info ✔ ✔
3.4 alarm log ✔ ✔
3.5 indoor temp. log ✔ ✔
4. MY SYSTEM
4.1 plus functions 4.1.3 internet 4.1.3.1 myUpway™ ✔ ✔
4.1.3.8 tcp/ip settings ✔ ✔
4.1.3.9 proxy settings ✔ ✔
4.1.5 SG Ready ✔ ✔
4.1.6 smart price adaption™ ✔ ✔
4.1.8 smart energy source™ 4.1.8.1 settings - ✔
4.1.8.2 set. Price - ✔
4.1.8.3 CO2 impact - ✔
4.1.8.4 tariff periods, electricity - ✔
4.1.8.6 tariff per, ext. shunt add - ✔
4.1.8.7 tariff per, ext. step add - ✔
4.2 op. mode ✔ ✔
4.3 my icons ✔ ✔
4.4 time & date ✔ ✔

66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
4.6 language ✔ ✔
4.7 holiday setting ✔ ✔
4.9 advanced 4.9.1 op. prioritisation ✔ ✔
4.9.2 auto mode setting ✔ ✔
4.9.3 degree minute setting ✔ ✔
4.9.4 factory setting user ✔ ✔
4.9.5 schedule blocking ✔ ✔
4.9.6 schedule silent mode ✔ ✔
5 SERVICE
5.1 operating settings 5.1.1 hot water settings * ✔ ✔
5.1.2 max flow line temperature ✔ ✔
5.1.3 max diff flow line temp. ✔ ✔
5.1.4 alarm actions ✔ ✔
5.1.12 addition ✔ ✔
5.1.14 flow set. climate system ✔ ✔
5.1.22 heat pump testing ✔ ✔
5.1.23 compressor curve ✔ ✔
5.2 system settings 5.2.2 installed slaves ✔ ✔
5.2.3 docking ✔ ✔
5.2.4 accessories ✔ ✔
5.3 accessory settings 5.3.2 shunt controlled add. heat * - ✔
5.3.3 extra climate system * - ✔
5.3.6 step controlled add. Heat - ✔
5.3.8 hot water comfort * - ✔
5.3.20 flow sensor* - ✔
5.4 soft in/outputs ✔ ✔
5.5 factory setting service ✔ ✔
5.6 forced control ✔ ✔
5.7 start guide ✔ ✔
5.8 quick start ✔ ✔
5.9 floor drying function ✔ ✔
5.10 change log ✔ ✔
5.11 slave settings 5.11.1 EB101 5.11.1.1 heat pump ✔ ✔
5.11.1.2 charge pump (GP12) ✔ ✔
5.11.2 EB102 - ✔
5.11.3 EB103 - ✔
5.11.4 EB104 - ✔
5.11.5 EB105 - ✔
5.11.6 EB106 - ✔
5.11.7 EB107 - ✔
5.11.8 EB108 - ✔
5.12 country ✔ ✔

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Sub-menus Menu 5.1 - operating settings


Menu SERVICE has orange text and is intended for the Operating settings can be made for the control module in the
advanced user. This menu has several sub-menus. sub menus.
Status information for the relevant menu can be found on the Menu 5.1.1 - hot water settings
display to the right of the menus.
economy
operating settings: Operating settings for the control
Setting range start temp. economy: 5 – 55 °C
module.
Factory setting start temp. economy: 42 °C
system settings: System settings for the control module, Setting range stop temp. economy: 5 – 60 °C
activating accessories etc. Factory setting stop temp. economy: 48 °C
soft in/outputs: Setting software controlled in and normal
outputs on the input card (AA3) and terminal block (X2). Setting range start temp. normal: 5 – 60 °C
factory setting service: Total reset of all settings (including Factory setting start temp. normal: 46 °C
settings available to the user ) to default values. Setting range stop temp. normal: 5 – 65 °C
forced control: Forced control of the different components in Factory setting stop temp. normal: 50 °C
the indoor module. luxury
start guide: Manual start of the start guide which is run the Setting range start temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
first time when the control module is started. Factory setting start temp. lux: 49 °C
quick start: Quick starting the compressor. Setting range stop temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
Factory setting stop temp. lux: 53 °C
NOTE stop temp. per. increase
Incorrect settings in the service menus can damage the Setting range: 55 – 70 °C
installation. Factory setting: 55 °C
charge method
Setting range: target temp, delta temp
Default value: delta temp
Here you set the start and stop temperature of the hot water for
the different comfort options in menu 2.2 as well as the stop
temperature for periodic increase in menu 2.9.1.
The charge method for hot water mode is selected here. "delta
temp" is recommended for heaters with charge coil, "target
temp" for heaters with domestic coil.
Menu 5.1.2 - max flow line temperature
climate system
Setting range: 5 – 70 °C
Default value: 60 °C
Set the maximum supply temperature for the climate system
here. If the installation has more than one climate system,
individual maximum supply temperatures can be set for each
system. Climate systems 2 – 8 cannot be set to a higher max
supply temperature than climate system 1.

CAUTION
Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
temperature set between 35 and 45°C.
Be careful not to cause low temperature burn if it is set at
35°C or higher.
Check the max floor temperature with your floor supplier.

68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.1.3 - max diff flow line temp. <Add. Type: shurt controlled (RC-HY40 only)>
max diff compressor prioritised additional heat
Setting range: 1 – 25 °C Setting range: on/off
Default value: 10 °C Factory setting: off
max diff addition minimum running time
Setting range: 1 – 24 °C Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 7 °C Default value: 12 h
Here you set the maximum permitted difference between the min temp.
calculated and actual supply temperature during compressor Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
mode and add. heat mode. Max diff. additional heat can never Default value: 55 °C
exceed max diff. compressor
mixing valve amplifier
max diff compressor
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
When the current supply temperature deviates from the set Default value: 1.0
value compared to that calculated, the heat pump is forced to mixing valve step delay
stop irrespective of the degreeminute value.
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
If the current supply temperature exceeds the calculated flow Default values: 30 s
temperature plus the set value, the degree minute value is set to
0. The compressor in the heat pump stops when there is only a fuse size
heating demand. Setting range: 1 – 200 A
Factory setting: 16 A
max diff addition
transformation ratio
If "addition” is selected and activated in menu 4.2 and the
Setting range: 300 – 3000
present supply temp exceeds the calculated temperature plus
Factory setting: 300
the set value, the additional heat is forced to stop.
Select this option if shunt controlled additional heat is
Menu 5.1.4 - alarm actions connected.
Select how to control the heat pump in the event of an alarm. Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
You can choose to stop producing hot water and/or reduce the minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
room temperature. External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
CAUTION You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
If no alarm action is selected, it can result in time.
higher energy consumption in the event of an Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
alarm. external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
Menu 5.1.12 - addition otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
add type: step controlled
max step
TIP
Setting range (binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Setting range (binary stepping activated): 0 – 7
Default value: 3
fuse size Menu 5.1.14 - flow set. climate system
Setting range: 1 – 200 A presettings
Factory setting: 16 A Setting range: radiator, floor heat., rad. + floor heat.
You can set the maximum number of permitted additional Default value: radiator
heat steps, if there is internal additional heat in the tank (only Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C
accessible if the additional heat is positioned after QN10), The factory setting of DOT value depends on the country
whether binary stepping is to be used and the size of the that has been given for the product's location.
fuse. The example below refers to Sweden.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C
own setting
Setting range dT at DOT: 0.0 – 25.0

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Factory setting dT at DOT: 10.0 Menu 5.2 - system settings


Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C Make different system settings for your installation here, e.g.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C activate the connected heat pump and which accessories are
Select the type of heating distribution system. installed.
dT at DOT is the difference in degrees between flow and return
Menu 5.2.2 - installed heat pump
temperatures at dimensioned outdoor temperature.
If a heat pump is connected to the master installation, set it
Menu 5.1.22 - heat pump testing here.
For RC-HY40, you can set slave unit to be connected.
NOTE
There are two ways of activating connected slaves. You can
This menu is intended for testing heat pump according to
different standards. either mark the alternative in the list or use the automatic
Use of this menu for other reasons may result in your function "search installed slaves".
installation not functioning as intended. search installed slaves
Mark “search installed slaves" and press the OK button to
This menu contains several sub-menus, one for each standard. automatically find connected slaves for the master heat pump.
Menu 5.1.23 - compressor curve Menu 5.2.3 – docking (RC-HY 40 only)
Set whether the compressor in the heat pump should work to a Enter how your system is docked regarding pipes, for example
particular curve under specific requirements or if it should to hot water heating and heating the building.
work to predefined curves.
This menu has a docking memory which means that the control
You can set a curve for each operation mode (heat, hot water, system remembers how a particular reversing valve is docked
coolingetc.) by unticking "auto", turning the control knob until and automatically enters the correct docking the next time you
a temperature is marked and pressing OK. You can set at what use the same reversing valve.
temperature max- min frequencies will occur.
This menu consists of several windows (one for each operation Slave (heat pump) Workspace for docking
mode). Use the navigation arrow in the top left corner to
change between the windows. docking 5.2.3
slave 1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8

Compressor Marking frame

Slave: Here you select for which heat pump the docking
setting is to be made.
Compressor: Select if the compressor in the heat pump is
blocked (factory setting), or standard (docked for example to
pool heating, hot water charging and heating the building).
Marking frame: Move around the marking frame using the
control knob. Use the OK button to select what you want to
change and to confirm setting in the options box that appears to
the right.
Workspace for docking: The system docking is drawn
here.

70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Symbol Description Menu 5.3 - accessory settings


Compressor (blocked) The operating settings for accessories that are installed and
activated are made in the sub-menus for this.
Menu 5.3.2 - shunt controlled add. Heat
Compressor (standard)
prioritised additional heat
Setting range: on/off
Reversing valves for hot water, cooling. Factory setting: off
The designations above the reversing valve start diff additional heat
indicate where it is electrically connected
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM
(EB101 = Slave 1, etc.).
Default values: 400 GM
Hot water charging minimum running time
Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 12 h
Heating (heating the building, includes any
extra climate system) min temp.
Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
Cooling Default value: 55 °C
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
Menu 5.2.4 - accessories Default value: 1.0
Set which accessories are installed on the installation here. mixing valve step delay
If the water heater is connected, hot water charging must be Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated here. Default values: 30 s
Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
time.
Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.3 - extra climate system
use in heating mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: on
use in cooling mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
Default value: 1.0
mixing valve step delay
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
Default values: 30 s
Here you select which climate system (2 - 8) you wish to set.
In the next menu you can make settings for the climate system

71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

that you have selected. If this function is activated, you can set Default value: 55 °C
"cooling flow temp. at +20°C" and "cooling flow temp. at mixing valve amplifier
+40°C" for each climate system where the function is
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
activated.
Default value: 1.0
CAUTION mixing valve step delay
This setting option only appears if "cooling permitted" is Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated in menu 5.11.1.1. Default values: 30 s
Make settings for the hot water comfort here.
The shunt amplification and shunt waiting time for the different See the accessory installation instructions for function
extra climate systems that are installed are also set here. description.
See the accessory installation instructions for function activating imm heater: The immersion heater is activated
description. here if installed in the water heater.
Menu 5.3.6 - step controlled add. heat activ. imm heat in heat mode: Activate here whether the
immersion heater in the tank (required if the alternative above
start addition
is activated) will be permitted to charge hot water, if the
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM compressors in the heat pump prioritise heating.
Default values: 400 GM
activating the mixing valve: Activate here whether a mixer
diff. between additional steps valve for limiting the temperature of hot water from the water
Setting range: 0 – 1000 GM heater is installed.
Default values: 30 GM If this alternative has been activated, you can set the outgoing
max step hot water temperature, shunt amplification and shunt waiting
Setting range time for the mixer valve.
(binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 outgoing hot water: Set the temperature at which the
Setting range mixing valve is to restrict hot water from the water heater.
(binary stepping activated): 0 – 7 See the accessory installation instructions for function
Default value: 3 description.
binary stepping
Menu 5.3.20 - flow sensor
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off flow sensor 5.3.20

Make settings for step controlled addition here. Step controlled


addition is for example an external electric boiler.
It is possible, for example, to select when the additional heat is
to start, to set the maximum number of permitted steps and
whether binary stepping is to be used. flow sensor EMK 500
When binary stepping is deactivated (off), the settings refer to
linear stepping.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.8 - hot water comfort
flow sensor
activating imm heater
Setting option: EMK 500, EMK 310 / 300, EMK 150
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: EMK 500
Factory setting: off
Here you select which flow sensor is used for the energy
activ. imm heat in heat mode measurement.
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
activating the mixing valve
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
outgoing hot water
Setting range: 40 – 65 °C

72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.4 – soft in/outputs Menu 5.9 - floor drying function


You can set the function of in/output for each terminal (AUX1- length of period 1 – 7
6 and output). Setting range: 0 – 30 days
Position of the terminal depends on the type of controller. Factory setting, period 1 – 3, 5 – 7: 2 days
RC-HY20: port 11-18 on X2 terminal (AUX1-6), X4 terminal Factory setting, period 4: 3 days
on AA2 board (output) temp. period 1 – 7
RC-HY40: port 9-14 on terminal X6 and port 1-4 on X2 Setting range: 15 – 70 °C
terminal on AA3 board (AUX1-6), X7 terminal on AA3 board Default value:
(output) temp. period 1 20 °C
temp. period 2 30 °C
Menu 5.5 - factory setting service
temp. period 3 40 °C
All settings can be reset (including settings available to the temp. period 4 45 C
user) to default values here. temp. period 5 40 °C
temp. period 6 30 °C
NOTE temp. period 7 20 °C
When resetting, the start guide is displayed the next time Set the function for under floor drying here.
the control module is restarted.
You can set up to seven period times with different calculated
flow temperatures. If less than seven periods
Menu 5.6 - forced control are to be used, set the remaining period times to 0 days.
You can force control the different components in the control Mark the active window to activate the underfloor drying
module and any connected accessories here. function. A counter at the bottom shows the number of days the
function has been active.
Menu 5.7 - start guide
When the control module is started for the first time the start TIP
guide starts automatically. Start it manually here.
If operating mode "add. heat only" is to be used, select it in
See page 25 for more information about the start guide. menu 4.2.
Menu 5.8 - quick start
It is possible to start the compressor from here. Menu 5.10 - change log
Read off any previous changes to the control system here.
CAUTION The date, time and ID no. (unique to certain settings) and the
There must be a heating or hot water demand to start the new set value is shown for every change.
compressor.
NOTE
CAUTION The change log is saved at restart and remains unchanged
after factory setting.
Do not quick start the compressor too many times over a
short period of time as this may damage the compressor
and its surrounding equipment.

73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.11 - heat pump settings Speed in standby mode (only used if "auto" has been selected
Settings for installed heat pump can be made in the submenus. for "Operating mode") means the charge pump operates at the
set speed during the time when there is neither a need for
Menu 5.11.1 - EB101 - EB108 compressor operation nor additional heat.
Make settings specifically for the installed heat pump and 5.12 - country
charge pump here.
Select here where the product was installed. This allows access
For RC-HY40, it is possible to connect up to 8 heat pumps.
to country specific settings in your product.
Menu 5.11.1.1 - heat pump Language settings can be made regardless of this selection.
Make settings for the installed heat pump here. To see what
settings you can make, see installation manual for the heat NOTE
pump. This option locks after 24 hours, restart of display or
program updating.
Menu 5.11.1.2 - charge pump (GP12)
op. mode
Heating/cooling
Setting range: auto / intermittent
Default value: auto
Set the operating mode for the charge pump here.
auto: The charge pump runs according to the current operating
mode for SMO 20.
intermittent: The charge pump starts and stops 20 seconds
before and after the compressor in the heat pump.
speed during operation heating, hot water,
cooling
Setting range: auto / manual
Default value: auto
Manual setting
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 70 %
speed in wait mode
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 30 %
max. allowed speed
Setting range: 80 – 100 %
Default values: 100 %
Set the speed at which the charge pump is to operate in the
present operating mode. Select "auto" if the speed of the charge
pump is to be regulated automatically (factory setting) for
optimal operation.
If "auto" is activated for heating operation, you can also make
the setting "max. allowed speed" which restricts the charge
pump and does not allow it to run at a higher speed than the set
value.
For manual operation of the charge pump deactivate "auto" for
the current operating mode and set the value to between 1 and
100 % (the previously set value for "max. allowed speed" no
longer applies).

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

External additional heat is active if it is connected to the


Service emergency mode relay (K1, terminal block X1).
Service actions Ensure that the heating medium circulates through the external
additional heat.
NOTE
Temperature sensor data
Servicing should only be carried out by persons with the
necessary expertise. Temperature Resistance Voltage
When replacing components on the system, only genuine (°C) (kOhm) (VDC)
replacement parts may be used.
-40 351.0 3.256
-35 251.6 3.240
NOTE -30 182.5 3.218
If an electrical connection has been disconnected and is -25 133.8 3.189
connected, ground must be checked using a suitable -20 99.22 3.150
multimeter.
-15 74.32 3.105
Maintenance -10 56.20 3.047
-5 42.89 2.976
General inspection 0 33.02 2.889
Check the following: 5 25.61 2.789
1. Condition of casing. 10 20.02 2.673
15 15.77 2.541
2. Electrical connections.
20 12.51 2.399
3. Alarm log. 25 10.00 2.245
Correct any fault before continuing. 30 8.045 2.083
35 6.514 1.916
Climate system
40 5.306 1.752
Check the following: 45 4.348 1.587
1. Climate system start and stop temperature. 50 3.583 1.426
2. Heating curve settings. 55 2.968 1.278
3. Function of the room sensor (if installed). 60 2.467 1.136
65 2.068 1.007
4. System pressure.
70 1.739 0.891
5. Flow and return temperature. The difference must be 5-10 °C. 75 1.469 0.785
Correct any fault before continuing. 80 1.246 0.691
85 1.061 0.607
Emergency mode 90 0.908 0.533
95 0.779 0.469
NOTE 100 0.672 0.414
Switch (SF1) must not be put into mode " " or before the
installation is filled with water.
The compressor in the heat pump can be damaged.

Emergency mode is used in event of operational interference


and in conjunction with service. Hot water is not produced in
emergency mode.
Emergency mode is activated by setting switch (SF1) in mode
" ". This means that:
■ The status lamp illuminates yellow.
■ The display is not lit and the control computer is not
connected.
■ Hot water is not produced.
■ The compressors are switched off. Charge pump (EB101-
GP12) is running.
■ The heating medium pump is active.
■ The emergency mode relay (K1) is active.

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

USB service outlet Menu 7.1 - update firmware


update firmware 7.1

start updating

choose another file

This allows you to update the software in RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
For the following functions to work the USB memory must
contain files with software for RC-HY20/40.

This information states which product the software is intended


for, the software version and general information about them.
RC-HY20/40 is equipped with a USB socket in the display If you wish to select another file than the one selected, the
unit. This USB socket can be used to connect a USB memory correct file can be selected by "choose another file".
to update the software, save logged information and handle the start updating
settings in RC-HY20/40. Select “start updating" if you want to start the update.
You are asked whether you really want to update the software.
USB 7 Respond "yes" to continue or "no" to undo.
If you responded"yes" to the previous question the update
starts and you can now follow the progress of the update on the
display. When the update is complete RC-HY20/40 restarts.
update firmware

logging NOTE
manage settings A software update does not reset the menu settings in
RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
If the update is interrupted before it is complete (for
When a USB memory is connected a new menu (menu 7) example power cut etc.) the software can be reset to the
appears in the display. previous version if the OK button is kept pressing during
start up until the green lamp starts to illuminate (takes
about 10 seconds).

76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

choose another file Menu 7.3 - manage settings


update firmware 7.1 manage settings 7.3

save settings

recover settings

Select “choose another file" if you do not want to use the


Here you can manage (save as or retrieve from) all the menu
suggested software. When you scroll through the files,
settings (user and service menus) in RC-HY20/40 with a USB
information about the marked software is shown in a fact box
memory.
just as before. When you have selected a file with the OK
button you will return to the previous page (menu 7.1) where Via "save settings" you save the menu settings to the USB
you can choose to start the update. memory in order to restore them later or to copy the settings to
another RC-HY20/40.
Menu 7.2 - logging
NOTE
logging 7.2
When you save the menu settings to the USB memory you
replace any previously saved settings
on the USB memory.

activated Via "recover settings" you reset all menu settings from the
interval 5 sec
USB memory.

NOTE
Reset of the menu settings from the USB memory cannot be
undone.

Setting range: 1 s – 60 min


Factory setting range: 5 s
You can set the interval of the log data storage and start saving
the log data on the USB memory.
1. Set the desired interval between loggings.
2. Tick “activated".
3. The present values from RC-HY20/40 are saved in a file in
the USB memory at the set interval until “activated" is
unticked.

NOTE
Untick "activated" before removing the USB memory.
Menu 7.3 - manage settings

77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Disturbance in comfort Troubleshooting


In most cases, the control module notes a malfunction and
If the operational interference is not shown in the display the
indicates this with alarms and shows instructions to rectify it in
following tips can be used:
the display. See "Manage alarm" for in- formation about
managing alarms. If the malfunction does not appear in the Basic actions
d i s p l a y, o r i f t h e d i s p l a y i s n o t l i t , t h e f o l l o w i n g Start by checking the following possible fault sources:
troubleshooting guide can be used.
■ The switch's (SF1) position.
■ Group and main fuses of the accommodation.
Manage alarm ■ The property's earth circuit breaker.
■ The control module's miniature circuit breaker (FA1).
Low pressure alarm
Low hot water temperature or a lack of
hot water
alarm
This part of the fault-tracing chapter only applies if the water
heater is installed in the system.
info / action

reset alarm ■ Closed or choked filling valve for the hot water heater.
aid mode – Open the valve.
■ Mixing valve (if there is one installed) set too low.
– Adjust the mixer valve.
In the event of an alarm, some kind of malfunction has
■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
occurred, which is indicated by the status lamp changing from
green continuously to red continuously. In addition, an alarm – If mode "manual" is selected, select "addition".
bell appears in the information window. ■ Large hot water consumption.
Alarm – Wait until the hot water has heated up. Temporarily
increased hot water capacity (temporary lux) can be
In the event of an alarm with a red status lamp a malfunction
activated in menu 2.1.
has occurred that the heat pump and/or control module cannot
remedy itself. In the display, by turning the control knob and ■ Too low hot water setting.
pressing the OK button, you can see the type of alarm it is and – Enter menu 2.2 and select a higher comfort mode.
reset it. You can also choose to set the installation to aid mode. ■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of hot water.
info / action Here you can read what the alarm means and – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when hot
receive tips on what you can do to correct the problem that water is to be prioritised.
caused the alarm.
Low room temperature
reset alarm In most cases it is enough to select "reset alarm"
to correct the problem that caused the alarm. If a green light ■ Closed thermostats in several rooms.
illuminates after selecting "reset alarm" the alarm has been – Set the thermostats to max, in as many rooms as possible.
remedied. If a red light is still visible and a menu called Adjust the room temperature via menu 1.1, instead of
”alarm” is visible in the display, the problem that caused the choking the thermostats.
alarm remains. If the alarm disappears and then returns, see the ■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
troubleshooting section (page 78 and 79).
– Enter menu 4.2. If mode "auto" is selected, select a higher
aid mode ”aid mode” is a type of emergency mode. This value on "stop heating" in menu 4.9.2.
means that the installation produces heat and/or hot water
– If mode "manual" is selected, select "heating". If this is
despite there being some kind of problem. This can mean that
not enough, select "addition".
the heat pump's compressor is not running. In this case any
electrical addition produces heat and/or hot water. ■ Too low set value on the automatic heating control.
– Enter menu 1.1 "temperature" and adjust the offset
NOTE heating curve up. If the room temperature is only low in
To select aid mode an alarm action must be selected in the cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
menu 5.1.4. curve" needs adjusting up.
■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of heat.
CAUTION – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when heating
is to be prioritised.
Selecting "aid mode” is not the same as correcting the
problem that caused the alarm. The status lamp will ■ "Holiday mode" activated in menu 4.7.
therefore continue to be red. – Enter menu 4.7 and select "Off".

78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

■ External switch for changing the room heating activ- ated. Additional heating only
– Check any external switches.
If you are unsuccessful in rectifying the fault and are unable to
■ Air in the climate system.
heat the house, you can, whilst waiting for assistance, continue
– Vent the climate system. running the heat pump in ”add. heat only”. This means that
■ Closed valves to the climate system. additional heating only is used to heat the house.
– Open the valves. Set the installation to additional heat
■ Incorrectly adjusted flow across the heat pump. mode
– Check whether alarm high condenser in (163) or high 1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
condenser out (162) is in the alarm log. Follow the 2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
instructions for adjusting charge flow. OK button.
High room temperature Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button.
■ Too high set value on the automatic heating control.
CAUTION
– Enter menu 1.1 (temperature) and reduce the offset
When commissioning without MTH air/water heat pump an
heating curve. If the room temperature is only high in alarm communication error may appear in the display.
cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
curve" needs adjusting down. in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").
■ External switch for changing the room heating activated.
– Check any external switches.
Low system pressure
■ Not enough water in the climate system.
– Top up the water in the climate system.
The compressor does not start
■ There is no heating requirement.
– The heat pump does not call on heating nor hot water.
■ Temperature conditions tripped.
– Wait until the temperature condition has been re- set.
■ Minimum time between compressor starts has not been
reached.
– Wait 30 minutes and check if the compressor has started.
■ Alarm tripped.
– Follow the display instructions.

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm list

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

157 Low lp cooling Protection against freezing in water HX during ■ Low/no water flow
cooling operation

162 High condenser out Too high temperature out from the condenser. ■ Low flow during heating operation
temperature Self-resetting. ■ Too high set temperatures

163 High condenser in Too high temperature into the condenser. ■ Temperature generated by another heat source
temperature Self-resetting.

183 Defrosting in progress Not an alarm, but an operating status. ■ Set when the heat pump runs the defrosting
procedure

220 High pressure alarm BP4 has been above 4,15MPa 5 times within 60 ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
minutes. exchanger
■ Expansion valve not correctly connected
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Low or no flow during heating operation
■ Defective circulation pump
■ Defective fuse, F(4A)

221 Low pressure alarm Tool low value on the low pressure semsor 3 ■ Open circuit or short circuit on input for low
times within 60 minutes pressure sensor
■ Defective low pressure sensor
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Open circuit or short circuit on input for
suction gas sensor (Tho-S)
■ Defective suction gas sensor (Tho-S)

223 Com. flt from the heat Communication between the control board and ■ Any circuit breakers for FDCW off
pump the communication board is interrupted. There ■ Incorrect cable routing
must

224 Fan alarm from heat Deviations in the fan speed in FDCW. ■ The fan cannot rotate freely
pump ■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Defective fan motor
■ Control board in FDCW dirty
■ Fuse (F2) blown

228 Failed defrosting 10 aborted defrost due to alarm: 418,419 or 343 ■ Too low water flow
■ Too low return temperatur

230 Hot gas alarm Temperature deviation on the hot gas sensor ■ Sensor does not work (see section "Ambient
(Tho-D) twice within 60 minutes or for 60 temperature sensor")
minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or heat exchanger
■ Blocked
■ If the fault persists during cooling, there may
be an insufficient amount of refrigerant.
■ Defective control board in FDCW

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

261 High HWX temp Temperature deviation on the heat exchanger ■ Sensor does not work (see section
sensor (Tho-R1/R2) five times within 60 "Disturbances in comfort")
minutes or for 60 minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
exchanger
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Too much refrigerant

262 Inv. err. When IPM (Intelligent power module) displays Can occur when 15V power supply to the
FO-signal (Fault Output) five times during a inverter PCB is unstable.
60-minute period.

263 Inv. err. Voltage from the inverter outside the parameters ■ Incoming power supply interference
four times within 30 minutes. ■ Service valve closed
■ Insufficient amount of refrigerant
■ Compressor fault
■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

264 Communication error Communication between circuit board for ■ Open circuit in connection between boards
with inverter. inverter and control board broken. ■ Defective low pressure sensor
■ Defective circuit board for inverter in FDCW
■ Defective control board in FDCW

265 Inv. err. Continuous deviation on power transistor for 15 ■ Defective fan motor
minutes. ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

266 Low refrig Insufficient refrigerant is detected upon star-up ■ Service valve closed
cooling mode. ■ Loose connection sensor (BT15, BT3)
■ Defective sensor (BT15, BT13)
■ Too little refrigerant

267 Inv. err. Failed start for compressor ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Compressor fault

268 Inv. err. Overcurrent, Inverter A/F module ■ Sudden power failure

271 Lw otd tmp Temperature of BT28 below the value that ■ Cold weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

272 High otd tmp Temperature of BT28 above the value that ■ Warm weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

277 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, heat exchanger in FDCW(Tho-R). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

278 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, outdoor temperature sensor in ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump FDCW (Tho-A). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

279 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, hot gas in FDCW (Tho-D). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

280 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, suction gas in FDCW (Tho-S) ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW

281 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, low pressure transmitter in FDCW. ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Fault in the refrigerant circuit

294 Incompatible heat pump Heat pump and indoor module do not work ■ Outdoor module and indoor module are not
properly together due to technical parameters. compatible.

343 Low temp water out Low water out temperature during cooling or ■ Too low water flow
tank defrost operation ■ Too low return temperatur

347 Temp high press Temporary high pressure alarm ■ No/low water flow
■ Air in water system

403 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor incoming water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT3). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

404 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor high pressure heating/ ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 low pressure cooling in indoor unit (BP4). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

412 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor outgoing water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT12). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

415 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor fluid pipe in indoor unit ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 (BT15). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

418 Low temp water out Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water flow
during defrost.

419 Freeze prot. exch. defr. Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water return temperature
during defrost.

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Accessories

Anode M300
Accessories
Part no. MCD291A026
EMK300M
Anode M500
Part no. MCD291A013
Part no. MCD291A027
EMK500M
Part no. MCD291A014
Charge pump CPD 11
Charge pump for heat pump
CPD 11-25M/65
Part no. MCD291A016
CPD 11-25M/75
Part no. MCD291A017
External electric additional heat ELK
These accessories may require accessories card AXC 30 (step
controlled addition).
ELK 9M
Immersion heater
9 kW 3 x 400 V
Part no. MCD291A015
Hot water control
VST 05M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø22
Max heat pump size 8 kW
Part no. MCD291A018
VST 11M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø28
(Max recommended output, 17 kW)
Part no. MCD291A019
VST 20M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø35
(Max recommended output, 40 kW)
Part no. MCD291A020
Reversing valve for cooling
VCC 05M
Part no. MCD291A021
VCC 11M
Part no. MCD291A022
Electrical model
MEL 1030M
Part no. MCD291A023
Anode
Anode for tank
Anode T300
Part no. MCD291A024
Anode T500
Part no. MCD291A025

83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Technical data
Dimensions and setting-out coordinates

110

10
70 215

360

35
310
410

RC-HY 40
110

84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Electrical circuit diagram

HSB100

85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

HMK100
FDCW
FDCW

FDCW
RC-HY

86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

RC-HY
RC-HY
RC-HY
FDCW
FDCW

87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

RC-HY
RC-HY
RC-HY

88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RC-HY20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

sheet 1

89
90
Technical data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INDOOR
UNIT

Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire


located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RC-HY40

INDOOR INDOOR
UNIT UNIT
(HSB) (HSB)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

sheet 1

93
94
Technical data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire
located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 5

INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT
INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT

97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 6

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES THERMAL SYSTEMS, LTD.
16-5 Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-8215, Japan
http://www.mhi-mth.co.jp/

MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES AIR-CONDITIONING EUROPE, LTD.


5 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, United Kingdom
Tel: +44-333-207-4072
Fax: +44-333-207-4089
http://www.mhiae.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


INSTALLATION MANUAL
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES
Air to Water Heat Pump
Hydrolution (HM)
HSB140/FDCW140VNX
PT500/RC-HY20/RC-HY40

English:Original instruction

This heat pump complies with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU,


LV Directive 2014/35/EU.
CE marking is applicable to the area of 50 Hz power supply.

PSC012D085BN

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table of Contents

Safety precautions 2 RC-HY40 39


Load monitor 39
General information for installer 7 Room sensor BT50 40
Step controlled additional heat 40
Over view and design 7
Relay output for emergency mode 40
Transport and storage 9
External circulation pump 40
Supplied components 9
AUX inputs/outputs 40
Assembly 9
myUpway™ 41
Hanging indoor unit 11
Hanging control unit 11
Dimensioning expansion vessel 12 Commissioning and adjusting 42
Preparation 42
Recommended installation order 12
Filling and venting 42
Hot water tank 42
Pipe installation 13 Climate system 42
General 13 Inspection of installation 42
Installation diagram 13 Start-up and inspection 43
HSB140 14 Before start-up 43
System requirements 15 Commissioning with heat pump 43
Overflow valve 15 Commissioning with additional heater only 43
Pump capacity diagram 15 3-way valve operation check 43
Pressure drop in indoor unit 15 AUX function check 43
Dimensions and pipe connections 16 Cooling mode 43
HSB140 16 Cleaning particle filter 43
PT500 16 Secondary adjustment 43
Water circuit 17 Start guide 44
Connection to heating system 17 Heating/cooling curve setting 45
Connection to hot water heater 17 Hot water circulation setting 46
Housing disassembly of tank unit 17 SG ready 47
Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit 18
Connecting hot water tank to water main 19 Control 48
Hot water circulation circuit 20 Display unit 48
Connection of external heat source 20 Menu system 49
Refrigerant circuit 20 Menu list 49
Connecting refrigerant pipes 20 Menu 1 – Indoor climate 49
Piping insulation 20 Menu 2 – Hot water 49
Dockings 21 Menu 3 – Info 49
Menu 4 – My system 49
Electrical installation 25 Menu 5 – Service 49
General 25
Electrical components 26 Service 61
Accessibility, electrical connection for controller 27
Cable lock 29 Disturbances in comfort 64
Connection 29 Manage alarm 64
<HSB140> 29 Troubleshooting 64
Power supply 29 Additional heating only 65
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit 29 Alarm list 66
Connection between indoor unit and controller 30
Cascade connection setting 30 Accessories 69
Recommended fuse size for HSB140 30
Recommended cable size for HSB140 30 Technical data 70
<RC-HY20/40> 30 Dimensions and setting-out coordinates 70
Power supply 30 Electrical circuit diagram 71
Connection between controller and indoor unit 31
HSB140 with RC-HY20 31
HSB140 with RC-HY40 31
Connection between controller and circulation pump (GP12) 31
HSB140 with RC-HY20 31
HSB140 with RC-HY40 32
Connection between controller and 3-way valve (QN10/QN12) 32
HSB140 with RC-HY20 32
HSB140 with RC-HY40 33
Connection between controller and sensors 33
RC-HY20 with HSB140 33
RC-HY40 with HSB140 34
Optional connections 35
RC-HY20 35
Room sensor BT50 35
Step controlled additional heat 36
Relay output for emergency mode 36
External circulation pump 37
AUX inputs/outputs 37
myUpway™ 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Safety precautions
When installing the unit, be sure to check shall not play with the appliance. Cleaning
whether the selection of installation and user maintenance shall not be made
place, power supply specifications, by children without supervision.
usage limitation (piping length, height This in accordance to applicable parts of
differences between indoor and outdoor the low voltage directive 2014/35/EU, LVD.
units, power supply voltage and etc.) and This appliance is also intended for use by
installation spaces. experts or trained users in shops, hotels,
z We recommend you to read this light industry, on farms and in similar
“SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully environments.
before installation in order to gain full CE marking is applicable to the area of 50
advantage of the functions of the unit Hz power supply.
and to avoid malfunction due to The emission sound pressure level from
mishandling. each Indoor and Outdoor unit is under 70
z The precautions described below are dB(A).
divided into WARNING and CAUTION .
The matters with possibilities leading
to serious consequences such as
death or serious personal injury due WARNING
to erroneous handling are listed in Installation must be carried out by
the WARNING and the matters with the qualified installer.
possibilities leading to personal injury If you install the system by yourself, it may cause
or damage of the unit due to erroneous serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
handling including probability leading to shocks, fire and personal injury, as a result of a
serious consequences in some cases system malfunction.
are listed in CAUTION . These are very Install the system in full accordance
important precautions for safety. Be with the instruction manual.
sure to observe all of them without fail. Incorrect installation may cause bursts, personal
z Be sure to confirm no anomaly on the injury, water leaks, electric shocks and fire.
equipment by commissioning after Use the original accessories and the
completed installation and explain the specified components for installation.
operating methods as well as the If parts other than those prescribed by us are used,
maintenance methods of this equipment It may cause water leaks, electric shocks, fire and
to the user according to the owner’s personal injury.
manual. When installing in small rooms, take
z Keep the installation manual together prevention measures not to exceed
with owner’s manual at a place where the density limit of refrigerant in the
any user can read at any time. Moreover event of leakage.
if necessary, ask to hand them to a new Consult the expert about prevention measures. If
user. the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the
event of leakage, lack of oxygen can occur, which
This heat pump complies with EMC can cause serious accidents.
Directive 2014/30/EU.
Ventilate the working area well in the
This appliance is designed for use in a
event of refrigerant leakage during
home environment and can be used by
installation.
children aged from 8 years and above and
If the refrigerant comes into contact with naked
persons with reduced physical, sensory or
flames, poisonous gas is produced.
mental capabilities or lack of experience
and knowledge if they have been given After completed installation, check that
supervision or instruction concerning use no refrigerant leaks from the system.
of the appliance in a safe way and If refrigerant leaks into the room and comes into
understand the hazards involved. Children contact with an oven or other hot surface, poisonous
gas is produced.
2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

Hang up the unit at the specified points the box. Install the service panel correctly.
with ropes which can support the Incorrect installation may result in overheating
weight in lifting for portage. And to and fire.
avoid jolting out of alignment, be sure to Do not perform brazing work in the
hang up the unit at 4-point support. airtight room.
An improper manner of portage such as 3-point It can cause lack of oxygen.
support can cause death or serious personal injury Use the prescribed pipes, flare nuts
due to falling of the unit. and tools for R410A.
Install the unit in a location with good Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can
support. cause the unit failure and serious accidents due to
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the burst of the refrigerant circuit.
unit to fall and cause material damage and Tighten the flare nut by using double
personal injury. spanners and torque wrench according
Ensure the unit is stable when installed, to prescribed method. Be sure not to
so that it can withstand earthquakes tighten the flare nut too much.
and strong winds. Loose flare connection or damage on the flare part
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the by tightening with excess torque can cause burst
unit to fall and cause material damage and or refrigerant leaks which may result in lack of
personal injury. oxygen.
Ensure that no air enters in the refriger- Do not open the service valves for
ant circuit when the unit is installed liquid line and gas line until completed
and removed. refrigerant piping work, air tightness
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure test and evacuation.
in the refrigerant circuit becomes too high, which If the compressor is operated in state of opening
can cause burst and personal injury. service valves before completed connection of
The electrical installation must be refrigerant piping work, air can be sucked into
carried out by the qualified electrician refrigerant circuit, which can cause bust or
in accordance with “the norm for personal injury due to anomalously high pressure
electrical work” and “national wiring in the refrigerant.
regulation”, and the system must be Do not put the drainage pipe directly into
connected to the dedicated circuit. drainage channels where poisonous
Power supply with insufficient capacity and gases such as sulphide gas can occur.
incorrect function done by improper work can Poisonous gases will flow into the room through
cause electric shocks and fire. drainage pipe and seriously affect the user’s
Be sure to shut off the power before health and safety.
starting electrical work. Only use prescribed optional parts.
Failure to shut off the power can cause electric The installation must be carried out by
shocks, unit failure or incorrect function of the qualified installer.
equipment. If you install the system by yourself, it can cause
Be sure to use the cables conformed serious trouble such as water leaks, electric
to safety standard and cable ampacity shocks, fire.
for power distribution work. Do not run the unit with removed panels
Unconformable cables can cause electric leak, or protections
anomalous heat production or fire. Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or
Use the prescribed cables for electrical high voltage parts can cause personal injury due
connection, tighten the cables securely to entrapment, burn or electric shocks.
in terminal block and relieve the Be sure to fix up the service panels.
cables correctly to prevent overloading the Incorrect fixing can cause electric shocks or
terminal blocks. fire due to intrusion of dust or water.
Loose connections or cable mountings can cause Do not perform any repairs or modifi-
anomalous heat production or fire. cations by yourself. Consult the dealer
Arrange the wiring in the control box so if the unit requires repair.
that it cannot be pushed up further into If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

leaks, electric shocks or fire. cause fire.


Do not perform any change of protec- Do not install the unit where corrosive
tive device itself or its setup condition gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or
The forced operation by short-circuiting protective combustible gas (such as thinner and
device of pressure switch and temperature petroleum gases) can accumulate or collect,
controller or the use of non specified component or where volatile combustible substances
can cause fire or burst. are handled.
Be sure to switch off the power supply Corrosive gas can cause corrosion of heat
in the event of installation, inspection exchanger, breakage of plastic parts and etc. And
or servicing. combustible gas can cause fire.
If the power supply is not shut off, there is a risk Secure a space for installation, inspec-
of electric shocks, unit failure or personal injury tion and maintenance specified in the
due to the unexpected start of fan. manual.
Consult the dealer or an expert regar- Insufficient space can result in accident such as
ding removal of the unit. personal injury due to falling from the installation
Incorrect installation can cause water leaks, place.
electric shocks or fire. When the outdoor unit is installed on a
Stop the compressor before disconnec- roof or a high place, provide permanent
ting refrigerant pipes in case of pump ladders and handrails along the access
down operation. route and fences and handrails around the
If disconnecting refrigerant pipes in state of outdoor unit.
opening service valves before compressor If safety facilities are not provided, it can cause
stopping, air can be sucked, which can cause burst personal injury due to falling from the installation
or personal injury due to anomalously high place.
pressure in the refrigerant circuit. Do not use the indoor unit at the place
where water splashes may occur.
CAUTION Since the indoor unit is not waterproof, it
can cause electric shocks and fire.
Carry out the electrical work for ground Do not install or use the system close
lead with care. to the equipment that generates elec-
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, tromagnetic fields or high frequency
water line, lightning conductor or telephone line’s harmonics.
ground lead. Incorrect grounding can cause unit Equipment such as inverters, standby generators,
faults such as electric shocks due to short- medical high frequency equipments and
circuiting. telecommunication equipments can affect the
Use the circuit breaker with sufficient system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns.
breaking capacity. The system can also affect medical equipment and
If the breaker does not have sufficient breaking telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its
capacity, it can cause the unit malfunction and function or cause jamming.
fire. Do not install the outdoor unit in a
Earth leakage breaker must be insta- location where insects and small animals
lled. can inhabit.
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can Insects and small animals can enter the electric
cause electric shocks. parts and cause damage or fire. Instruct the user to
Do not use any materials other than a keep the surroundings clean.
fuse with the correct rating in the Do not use the base flame for outdoor
location where fuses are to be used. unit which is corroded or damaged due
Connecting the circuit with copper wire or other to long periods of operation.
metal thread can cause unit failure and fire. Using an old and damage base flame can cause
Do not install the unit near the location the unit falling down and cause personal injury.
where leakage of combustible gases Do not install the unit in the locations
can occur. listed below.
If leaked gases accumulate around the unit, it can ‚ Locations where carbon fiber, metal powder or
4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

any powder is floating. Do not install the remote controller at


‚ Locations where any substances that can affect the direct sunlight.
the unit such as sulphide gas, chloride gas, acid It can cause malfunction or deformation of the
and alkaline can occur. remote controller.
‚ Vehicles and ships. Do not use the unit for special purposes
‚ Locations where cosmetic or special sprays are such as storing foods, cooling precision
often used. instruments and preservation of
‚ Locations with direct exposure of oil mist and animals, plants or art.
steam such as kitchen and machine plant. It can cause the damage of the items.
‚ Locations where any machines which generate Take care when carrying the unit by
high frequency harmonics are used. hand.
‚ Locations with salty atmospheres such as If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be
coastlines. carried by two or more persons. Do not carry by
‚ Locations with heavy snow (If installed, be sure the plastic straps, always use the carry handle
to provide base flame and snow hood mentioned when carrying the unit by hand. Use gloves to
in the manual). minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum fins.
‚ Locations where the unit is exposed to chimney Dispose of any packing materials cor-
smoke. rectly.
‚ Locations at high altitude (more than 1000m Any remaining packing materials can cause
high). personal injury as it contains nails and wood. And
‚ Locations with ammonic atmospheres. to avoid danger of suffocation, be sure to keep the
‚ Locations where heat radiation from other heat plastic wrapper away from children and to dispose
source can affect the unit. after tear it up.
‚ Locations without good air circulation. Pay attention not to damage the drain
‚ Locations with any obstacles which can prevent pan by weld spatter when welding
inlet and outlet air of the unit. work is done near the indoor unit.
‚ Locations where short circuit of air can occur (in If weld spatter entered into the indoor unit during
case of multiple units installation). welding work, it can cause pin-hole in drain pan
‚ Locations where strong air blows against the air and result in water leakage. To prevent such
outlet of outdoor unit. damage, keep the indoor unit in its packing or
It can cause remarkable decrease in performance, cover it.
corrosion and damage of components,
malfunction and fire. Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes
so as not to condense the ambient air
Do not install the outdoor unit in the moisture on them.
locations listed below. Insufficient insulation can cause condensation,
‚ Locations where discharged hot air or operating which can lead to moisture damage on the ceiling,
sound of the outdoor unit can bother floor, furniture and any other valuables.
neighborhood.
‚ Locations where outlet air of the outdoor unit Be sure to perform air tightness test
blows directly to plants. by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after
‚ Locations where vibration can be amplified and completed refrigerant piping work.
transmitted due to insufficient strength of If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in
structure. the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room,
lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious
‚ Locations where vibration and operation sound
generated by the outdoor unit can affect accidents.
seriously. (on the wall or at the place near bed Do not touch any buttons with wet hands.
room) It can cause electric shocks.
‚ Locations where an equipment affected by high Do not shut off the power supply imme-
harmonics is placed. (TV set or radio receiver is diately after stopping the operation.
placed within 5m) Wait at least 5 minutes, otherwise there is a risk
‚ Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. of water leakage or breakdown.
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a Do not control the system with main
claim. power switch.
It can cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the
5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety precautions

fan can start unexpectedly, which can cause Notabilia for units designed for R410A
personal injury. Only use R410A refrigerant. R410A is the
Do not touch any refrigerant pipes refrigerant whose pressure is 1.6 times as high as
when the system is in operation. that of conventional refrigerant.
During operation the refrigerant pipes become
extremely hot or extremely cold depending the The size of charging port of service valve and
operating condition, and it can cause burn injury check joint for R410A are altered from that for
or frost injury. conventional refrigerant in order to prevent the
This manual is only for outdoor units system being charged with the incorrect
connected to HSB series and HMK refrigerant by mistake. And the protruding
series. dimension of pipe for flare processing and flare
When you connect other indoor units to outdoor nut size for R410A are also altered from that for
units, please refer to other manual. conventional refrigerant in order to reinforce
strength against the pressure for R410A.
Accordingly the dedicated tools for R410A listed
in the below mentioned table should be prepared
for installation and servicing.
Dedicated tools for R410A
a) Gauge manifold
b) Charge hose
c) Electronic scale for refrigerant charge
d) Torque wrench
e) Flare tool
f) Protrusion control gauge for copper pipe
g) Vacuum pump adapter
h) Gas leak detector
Do not use charging cylinder. Using charging
cylinder may alter the composition of refrigerant,
which results in making the performance of the
system worse.

Refrigerant must be charged always in liquid state


from the bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

General information for installer


For outdoor unit installation information, see Installation
manual for Outdoor unit.

Over view and design


HSB140
UB1 UB2 UB3 EP2 XL14 XL1 XL2

AA23-X1

XL13
A23-F3

AA23-X4

AA23-S3

AA23

PF3 BT3

AA23-X100

BP4
HZ2
BT15

BT12

Pipe connections Sensor, thermostats


XL1(Red mark) Climate system supply BP4 Pressure sensor, high pressure
XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system return BT3 Temperature sensor, heating medium, return
XL14 Connection, gas line BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser, supply
XL13 Connection, liquid line BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe

Valves etc. Miscellaneous


EP2 Heat exchanger UB1 Cable gland
HQ1 Particle filter (supplied) UB2 Cable gland
HZ2 Drying filter UB3 Cable gland

Electrical components
AA23 Communication board
AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection
of KVR
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
module / control module
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
module

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

PT500

1
11
8

12
13

2
9
3
14

4 13

10 15

16
6

Section of the PT500 storage tanks. Side view of the PT500 storage tanks.
8. Thermometer
1. Upper insulation of the storage tank 9. Connector pipe for mounting electric heating unit
2. Protective magnesium anode 10. Inspection opening
3. Enamelled tank 11. Hot water intake connector pipe
4. Side insulation of the storage tank 12. Hot water circulation connector pipe
5. Coil 13. Temperature sensor cover
6. Lower insulation of the storage tank 14. Coil supply connector pipe
7. Adjustable foot 15. Connection of return line from the coil
16. Cold water supply connector pipe

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Transport and storage Assembly


■ It is recommended that indoor unit is installed in a room
Indoor unit and tank unit must be transported and stored
with existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room
vertically in dry conditions.
or boiler room.
■ For indoor unit and control unit, the mounting surface must
Supplied components be firm, flat and vertical, preferably a concrete wall.
■ Tank unit must be set on a solid waterproof base that would
HSB140 Indoor unit
keep the weight of the unit. The height-adjusting legs allow
for levelling and stable setting.

PT500



 


Particle filter R25 (HQ1). Brackets kit

RC-HY20/40 Control unit


0-15 mm

Outside sensor Room sensor (RC-HY40 only)


LEK

Insulation tape Temperature sensor

■ Install indoor unit with its back to an outside wall, ideally


in a room where noise does not matter. If this is not
possible, avoid placing it against a wall behind a bedroom
LEK

or other room where noise may be a problem.


■ Route pipes so they are not fixed to an internal wall that
Aluminium tape Cable ties
backs on to a bedroom or living room.
LE
K
■ Install tank unit and its pipings to indoor unit indoors in
order to avoid icing.
■ Ensure free space described in the following figures for
LE
K

LE
K
future maintenance.

Heating pipe paste Current sensor (RC-HY40 only)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

HSB140 PT500
Recommendation for positioning on wall

A min

Min. 300mm

Min. 200mm Min. 200mm

Amin is required on top to replace anode bar, and 500 mm is


Recommendation for positioning in corner required in front to replace immersion heater if equipped.
Application Connector pipe dia. Type of anode Amin
1¼" Chain ø33 × 5 150 mm
PT500
¾" Titanium anode 400 mm

RC-HY20/40

100 mm
Min. 400mm

100 mm 100 mm

Mi
n. 4
00m
m

*Min 800mm is required in front

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Hanging indoor unit Hanging control unit


It is recommended that the split box is installed in a room with Use all mounting points and install control unit upright against
existing floor drainage, most suitably in a utility room or boiler a flat wall. Make sure whole back surface faces the wall.
room.
1. The bracket for the split box is mounted to the wall by use
Mounting point Mounting point
of appropriate screws.
ø10
4-

2. Insert HSB140 in the bracket mounted to the wall.

Mounting point Mounting point

NOTE
Indoor unit weigh 23 kg excluding water inside.

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General information for the installer

Dimensioning expansion vessel Recommended installation order


The expansion vessel volume must be at least 5% of total water 1. Hang indoor unit and control unit to appropriate position
volume in the circulation system. and connect indoor unit and tank unit.
Initial pressure and max height difference 2. Connect indoor unit to climate system, cold and hot water
lines as well as any external heat sources. See page 14.
Recommended maximum height difference between expansion Also see docking descriptions on page 23-24 and further
vessel and the highest point in the system is 5m. on.
The initial pressure of the pressure expansion vessel must be 3. Install refrigerant pipes according to the description on the
dimensioned according to the maximum height (H) between Installation manual for outdoor unit.
the vessel and the highest positioned radiator, see figure. An 4. Connect current limiter, any centralised load control and
initial pressure of 0.5 bar (5 mvp) means a maximum permitted external contacts as well as the cable between indoor unit
height difference of 5 m. and outdoor unit.
If the standard initial pressure in the pressure vessel is not high 5. Connect incoming electricity to indoor unit and/or outdoor
enough it can be increased by filling via the valve in the unit. See page 29.
expansion vessel. The expansion vessel’s standard initial 6. Follow the commissioning instructions on page 30-41.
pressure must be entered in the check list on User’s manua1.
Any change in the initial pressure affects the ability of the
expansion vessel to handle the expansion of the water.
Consult local distributor in case height difference exceeds 5m.
H

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Pipe installation
General
Pipe installation must be carried out in accordance with current return at lowest design outdoor temperature (DOT) though
norms and directives. indoor unit can operate with a return temperature of up to 65°C
A following table shows plumbing necessary for each product. and an outgoing temperature from the unit of 65°C.
Indoor unit is not equipped with shut off valves; these must be
Refrigerant Plumbing
installed outside the heat pump to facilitate any future
HSB Necessary Necessary
servicing.
PT ⸺ Necessary
PC-HY ⸺ ⸺ Indoor unit can be connected to the radiator system, floor
heating system and/or fan convectors.
This heat pump system is designed for low or medium
Safety valve is not equipped with in indoor unit. Make sure to
temperature heating system. It is recommended water
install safety valve in the circuit.
temperature must not exceed 55°C on supply and 45°C on

Installation diagram
FDCW140VNX outdoor unit provides heat for space heating and domestic hot water using free energy in the outdoor air within the
range of low temperature up to -20°C. Connection between HSB140 and PT500 is shown on the next page. The system is controlled
by RC-HY20 or RC-HY40 control unit.

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

HSB140
HSB140 indoor unit is equipped with plate heat exchanger. It needs to install expansion vessel, shut-off valves, safety valve, electric
heater and circulation pump to make a complete heating system. In case domestic hot water is required, 3 way valve and tank is also
necessary.

AA25

XL14 BT12 XL1


BP4 P
BT15 BT3 XL2
XL13

HSB140

FDCW140 PT500

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Vent P Manometer

Cut-off valve Circulation pump

Water tap Particulate filter

Non-return valve Compressor

Balancing valve Heat exchanger

Three-way valve Cooling

Safety valve Central heating system

T Thermometer Domestic hot water

Temperature sensor Heating systems Floor


heating

Diaphragm expansion
vessel

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

System requirements Pump capacity diagram


The minimum water volume in the climate system is subject to HSB140
the values in the table below. If it is not fulfilled, volume
HSB140 is not equipped with circulation pump.
vessel must be installed.
This graph shows the characteristic of CPD11-25M/75.
For more options, see the docking description on Page 21.
(liter)
With underfloor Without underfl oor [kPa]
cooling application cooling application 80
HSB140, 150 150 70
FDCW140VNX
60
50
Overflow valve 40
30
NOTE
20
A free flow is required for all docking options, which
10
means that an overflow valve must be installed.
0
The circulation pump may become damaged.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Flow [l / s]

Pressure drop in indoor unit


HSB140
Tryckfall HBS05
[kPa]
30

25

20

15

10

0
0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
HSB100 HSB60, 140 Flow [l / s]

Connection of extra circulation pump


When connecting extra circulation pumps, requirements for
pressure, maximum flow etc must be met. See page 24 for
location.

NOTE
Non-return valve must be installed in case extra circulation
pump is used. See page 24 for the position.
The circlulation pump may become damaged.

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Dimensions and pipe connections PT500

HSB140
N
F

L
K
XL1
XL2 E
J


XL13



I


XL14



H
D
Pipe connections


G
XL1 (Red mark) Climate system, flow ø28 mm



XL2 (Blue mark) Climate system, return ø28 mm
XL14 Gas line refrigerant, flare ⅝ ̋


XL13 Liquid line refrigerant, flare ⅜ ̋
Connection U/m PT500
D Inspection opening mm ø120
E Heating unit connection inch 1½ ̋ Female
F Thermometer enclosure mm ø10 Female
N Hot water outlet inch 1 ̋ Male
L Hot water circulation inch ¾ ̋ Male
K Temp. sensor enclosure (BT7) mm ø16 Female
J Coil supply inch 1 ̋ Male
I Temp. sensor enclosure (BT6) mm ø16 Female
H Return from coil inch 1 ̋ Male
G Cold water input inch 1 ̋ Male

Dimensions
PT500
① mm 337
② mm 967
③ mm 1477
④ mm 188
⑤ mm 288
⑥ mm 387
⑦ mm 805
⑧ mm 1234
⑨ mm 1302
⑩ mm 1545
⑪ mm 1835
⑫ mm 21-0/+15

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Water circuit Connection to hot water heater


For HSB140 indoor unit, it is necessary to connect PT500
Connection to heating system tank unit applying 3 way valve in order to use domestic hot
Connect XL1 to supply line and X2 to return line from water function.
heating system.
Housing disassembly of tank unit
■ All required safety devices and shut-off valves must be Removable housing with thermal insulation facilitates trans-
installed as close to the indoor unit as possible. port and installation of the storage tank. Disassembly the ho-
■ Install bleed valves where necessary, highest point of the using in the following order (see next pages figure):
water system in usual case. 1. Remove the Temperature gauge, plug of the heating ele-
■ When connecting to a system with thermostats on all ment connector pipe and blanking plate of the inspection
radiators, install an overflow valve or remove some of the opening.
thermostats to ensure sufficient flow. 2 Remove the upper cover of the housing together with
■ See section Dockings on page 22 for outline diagram. thermal insulation.
■ Install a safety valve with manometer on heating circuit and 3. Remove the plugs from the connector pipes and black
hot water circuit. (FL2) bushings.
For HSB140 install a safety valve for heating circuit on the 4. Remove the fixing screws and the strip connecting the
water pipe returning to indoor unit since it doesn’t have housing jacket.
port for FL2. 5. Remove the jacket surrounding the tank (housing jacket.)
The entire length of the overflow water pipe from the safety 6. Remove the four-piece thermal insulation.
valves must be inclined to prevent water pockets and must
After the installation of the storage tank in its final location,
also be frost proof.
reinstall the removed components in the reverse order.
■ The end of overflow water pipe from the safety valves must be
left open to the atmosphere. The water may drip from the pipe.

HSB140

XL14 XL1 XL13 XL2

Install safety valve as close to XL2 as possible.

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Housing and thermal insulation disassembly

3 4 5 6

Connecting hot water tank to indoor unit ■ Tank unit can be aligned using the adjustable feet.
■ Protection against overpressure shall be made in accordance
CAUTION with the relevant regulations.
Installation and commissioning of the storage tank ■ Connect the heating system according to the installation
shall only be done by appropriately qualified installer. diagram (see figure).
The installer should inform the user of the functions of Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil.
the product and provide the necessary in formation on its
safe use.
1

Information 1. PT storage tank


2. Cut-off valve
We recommend installing a strainer in order to protect the
pumps, check valve and the components of the heating
system. 2
supply from heat
pump
■ Tank and its pipings to indoor unit must be installed
indoors where the temperature wouldn't drop below 15°C 2
return to heat pump
in order to prevent pipings from icing.
■ Maximum piping length between indoor unit and tank is
10 m.
■ Tank unit should be placed on firm, preferably a concrete
f l oor or foundation.

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Connecting hot water tank to water main


■ Install a mixing valve if the temperature exceeds 60 °C.
Information
In order to minimize the flow of water from the safety valve
■ It is recommended to install a thermostatic mixing valve associated with the thermal expansion of the liquid, it is
for stable temperature hot water supply. advisable to install a suitable expansion vessel at the cold
■ Connect the storage tank to the water supply system of water connection (see item 8.)
water pressure at least 1 bar and max 10 bar. Install a
pressure reducer if the pressure at the cold water inlet to the CAUTION
tank is higher than allowed.
Installation of the appropriate safety valve in the cold
■ Install a safety valve which have a maximum 10.0 bar water supply line protecting the unit against
opening pressure on the incoming domestic water line overpressure is mandatory!
according to outline diagram in order to protect the storage
tank against overpressure. Pressure increases during heating
the water. CAUTION
■ During heating the water, small and temporary water flow Installation of necking of any kind (such as reducers, dirt pockets,
from the safety valve can occur, which indicates that the etc.) and cut-off valves between the storage tank and the safety
pressure has increased above the rated value, which valve is not allowed. Only a T-pipe with a drain valve and a T-pipe
triggered the valve. This may in no way be prevented. with an expansion vessel may be installed in these line sections.
■ Safety valve drain line should be installed with a decline, in
an environment free of freezing and remain open to the
atmosphere. The manufacturer is not responsible for CAUTION
flooding the room through the safety valve.
Never block the safety valve or drain line. This can cause
■ Blocked safety valve can cause equipment failure. Drain a dangerous overpressure in the storage tank.
the outflow from the safety valve to the sewerage or drain
grate.
■ See section Dockings on page 22 for outline diagram.
CAUTION
■ Connect the water supply system according to the When heating water, slight, temporary discharge from
installation diagram. the safety valve can occur. This is a correct safety valve
function. Any attempt to interfere in its operati on can
Installation diagram of the PT storage tank with one coil. lead to the danger and destruction of the storage tank.
1

2
DHW CAUTION
2 7 6 2 Never use the equipment with clogged safety valves.
hot water circulation
(optional)

Connection
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the proce-
dure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page 17):
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
3 8
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
4 5 2
water supply system 3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
to sewerage
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect
1. PT storage tank it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
2. Cut-off valve 5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating
3. Safety valve medium to the coil.
4. Drain valve
5. Pressure reducer (option, if the pressure in the system CAUTION
exceeds the allowable value) If there is an electric heating module installed in the
6. Strainer storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.
7. Hot water circulating pump
8. Hot water expansion vessel

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Hot water circulation circuit Refrigerant circuit


Hot water circulation function is available for PT500.
Connecting refrigerant pipes
See Installation manual for outdoor unit.
PT500
If the system has the hot water circulation system, connect it to
the port L (see page 19).
Piping insulation
Then install the Cut-off valves, circulation pump and strainer.
Install insulation on all piping in order to avoid condensation
during cooling operation.
Connection of external heat source It is also strongly recommended to insulate piping for heating
External heat source, e.g. a gas or oil boiler or electric heater, only application in order to avoid getting burned or reducing
can be connected on supply line of heating system (XL1). the heating capacity.
The thickness of the insulation should be 20mm where the
relative humidity exceeds 70%.

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Dockings
General
Installation requirements
Hydrolution can be connected in several different ways, some of which are shown on the following pages.

HSB140
FDCW140VNX
Max pressure, climate system 0.25 MPa (2.5 Bar)
Highest recommended supply/return temperature 55/45°C
Max temperature, climate system 65 °C
Max temperature in indoor unit 65 °C
Max temperature from external heat source 65 °C
Max supply temperature with compressor at outdoor temp -15°C 58 °C
Min supply temp. cooling 7 °C
Max supply temp. cooling 25 °C
Min volume, climate system during heating, cooling 150 L
Min volume, climate system during underf l oor cooling 150 L
Max flow, climate system 0.79 L/s
Min flow, climate system, at 100% circulation pump speed 0.39 L/s
Min flow, climate system 0.24 L/s
Nominal system flow heating (ѬT=5K) 0.79 L/s (16.5kW, 7/45°C)
Nominal system flow cooling (ѬT=5K) 0.56 L/s (11.8kW, 35/7°C)

External circulation pump must be used when the pressure drop in the system is greater than the available external pressure. In such
cases, a bypass line with non-return valve must be installed.
Use an overflow valve if system flow cannot be guaranteed.

Symbol key
Symbol Meaning
Venting valve

Shut-off valve

Non-return valve

Control valve

Safety valve
Temperature sensor

Expansion vessel
P Pressure gauge
Circulation pump

Shunt / shuttle valve


Fan

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Docking alternatives Explanation


Heating system can be constructed in several different ways AA25 Controller
combining indoor unit, tank, control unit and other accessories.
BT1 Outdoor sensor1)
For further option information, see page 70.
BT6 Temperature sensor, hotwater charging1)
In the system example shown on the following page, heating,
BT7 Temperature sensor, hot water top1)
hot water as well as cooling operation are available.
BT25 Temperature sensor, external supply line1)
Additional heating is helpful on the cold day of the year as the
energy from the air is reduced. It is also recommended as back- BT50 Room sensor
up in case the heat pump operation is blocked for any reason BT63 Temperature sensor, external supply line after
(e.g. ambient temperature exceeds the operation limit of heat electric heater
pump). BT71 Temperature sensor, external return line1)
GP10 Circulation pump, Heating medium
NOTE QN10 Reversing valve, Hot water/Heating medium2)
The heating medium side and the hot water side must be
EB1 Additional heat
fitted with the necessary safety equipment in accordance
with the applicable regulations. EB1 Immersion heater
This is the outline diagram. Actual installations KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor2)
must be planned according to applicable EB101 Heat pump system
standards.
BP4 Pressure sensor, condensor3)
BT3 Temperature sensor, return line3)
BT12 Temperature sensor, condenser supply line3)
BT15 Temperature sensor, fluid pipe3)
EB101 Heat pump
FL10 Safety valve
GP12 Charge pump2)
HQ1 Particle filter3)
QM1 Drain valve, Heating medium
QM31 Shut-off valve, Heating medium, Flow
QM32 Shut off valve, Heating medium, Return
QM43 Shut-off valve
EQ1 Cooling system
BT64 Temperature sensor, cooling supply line2)
CP6 Single jacket accumulator tank, cooling
GP13 Circulation pump, cooling
QN12 Reversing valve, Cooling/Heating2)
Miscellaneous
CM1 Expansion vessel closed, Heating medium
CP5 Buffer vessel
CP10 Accumulator tank with hotwater heating
EB20 Immersion heater
FL2 Safety valve, Heating medium
KA1 Auxiliary relay/Contactor
RN10 Trim valve

1) Included in and supplied with controller


2) Included in and supplied with accessory
3) Included in indoor unit

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Installation with indoor unit HSB140, tank PT500, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional
heat before reversing valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EQ1
-AA25 -AA25 -RN10
-CP6
-AA25-QN10

-EB1
-EB1 -FL2
-KA1 -BT63 -CM1
-GP13
-CP10

-BT64 -AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101

-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE
Not all components are shown in this
outline diagram.

Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to The additional heat can also be used for water heater when a
meet the heating and hot water demand. higher temperature is required than the heat pump can produce.
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand, the reversing During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on automatically when the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity. This is used reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
for both heating and charging hot water. heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pipe installation

Indoor unit HSB140, tank PT500, controller RC-HY20/40 with step controlled additional heat after reversing
valve for hot water and cooling function (4 pipe system)

-EB1
-EB1
-KA1

-CP5 -AA25
-GP10 -BT25
-BT71
-EQ1
-AA25
-CP6
-AA25 -RN10
-AA25-QN10

-GP13 -FL2
-CM1
-BT64
-CP10

-AA25-BT7
-AA25 -AA25
-BT1 -BT50 -EQ1-QN12
-AA25-BT6
-EB101
-EB101
-KA1
-EB20
-GP12 -HQ1 -QM43

-EZ101 -EZ102 -QM31


-BT12 -XL1

-XL14 -QM32
-BT15 -BT3 -HQ1
-XL13 -XL2
-BP4
-FL10
-QM1

NOTE Immersion heater (EB20) in the water heater/accumulator tank


Not all components are shown in this is used during the time to produce hot water if the heat pump is
outline diagram. used for heating at the same time.
The immersion heater (EB20) can also be used if a higher
This installations alternative is suitable for more complex temperature of hot water is required than the heat pump can
installations with a focus on comfort. produce.
Controller (AA25) starts and stops the heat pump (EB101) to During cooling operation, the reversing valve (EQ1-QN12)
meet the heating and hot water demand of the installation. switches to the cooling system (EQ1). If several simultaneous
At simultaneous heating and hot water demand the reversing demands occur while there is a cooling demand, the system
valve (AA25-QN10) switches periodically between the climate reacts differently. In the event of a hot water demand, the
system and the water heater/accumulator tank (CP10). When reversing valve switches back and hot water is produced until
the hot water heater/accumulator tank is fully charged, the the demand is fulfilled. In the event of a heating demand, the
reversing valve switches to the climate system. reversing valve switches periodically between cooling and
heating. If the cooling demand is met, the reversing valve
Additional heat (EB1) is turned on, automatically when the
switches back to basic mode (heating/hot water).
heating demand exceeds the heat pump capacity.

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical installation
General Principle diagram, electrical installation
Indoor unit must be installed via an isolator switch in accordance HSB140
Electrical
with the local codes and regulations. PEN L1 L2 L3
distribution unit
■ Disconnect the indoor unit, outdoor unit and control unit
before insulation testing of the house wiring.
■ If the building is equipped with an earth-fault breaker, Isolator switch
Hydrolution should be equipped with a separate one.
■ For the electrical wiring diagram, see page 71.
■ Do not lay communication, sensor or signal cables for
external connection close to high voltage lines.
■ Minimum cross section of communication, sensor or signal FDCW140 HSB140 RC-HY20/40 Electric
Circulation 3way
pump valve
cables for external connection must be 0.5mm2 up to 50 m, (Outdoor unit) (Indoor unit) (Controller) heater
Power and sensor cable
for example EKKX, LiYY or equivalent. Communication cable
■ Use screened three core cable for communication between
controller (RC-HY20/40) and indoor unit (HSB140). Cable size
■ When laying cables into indoor units and controllers, be Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 6.0mm2 (power cable)
sure to route the cable grommet (UB1 AND UB2).
2core, 1.5mm2
■ Be careful to route cables not to be damaged by metal edge Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
or trapped by panels. 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
Indoor unit – Controller equivalent (communication cable)
■ Outdoor unit is equipped with a single phase compressor.
This means that phase L3 is loaded with up to 25 A during The cable size shown on the above table is reference value.
compressor operation. Choose appropriate size according to local laws and regulations.

NOTE
Electrical installation and service must be carried out
under the supervision of a qualified electrician.
Turn off the circuit breaker before carrying out any
servicing.
Electrical installation and wiring must be carried out in
accordance with the stipulations in force.
Make sure to turn off the power supply during
installation.

NOTE
Do not turn on the power on control until the boiler is
filled with water.
The circulation pump and immersion heater
may become damaged.

NOTE
If the power supply cable is damaged, only authorised
person may replace it to avoid danger or damage.

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Electrical components RC-HY20


PF3 AA4
HSB140

X2

1
2
AA23-X1

3
5 4
6
7
8
AA23-F3

9
10
13 12 11
14
17 16 15
18
SF1

21 20 19
AA23
X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA4-XJ3 AA7
AA23-X4

AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

AA23-S3
UB1 UB2

AA23-X100
FA1

Explanation
AA23 Communication board X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA23-F3 Fuse for external heating cable


AA7
AA23-S3 DIP switch, addressing of outdoor unit
AA23-X1 Terminal block, incoming supply, connection AA2 LEK

of KVR
Explanation
AA23-X4 Terminal block, communication with indoor
AA2 Base card
module / control module
AA4 Display unit
AA23-X100 Terminal block, communication outdoor
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
module FDCW
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, control signal circulation pump,
sensors AUX inputs and heat pump
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

RC-HY40 Accessibility, electrical connection


PF3 AA4
for controller
The cover of the control module is opened using a Torx 25
screwdriver. Assembly takes place in the reverse order.
AA5 AA3
3

SF1 X2
1 2 3 4

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA4-XJ3 AA7

AA2 LEK AA4-XJ4

UB1 UB2

FA1

K2
2

1
X2
1 2 3 44

X1 L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

NOTE
AA7 The cover to access the base board is opened
AA2 LEK
using a Torx 25 screwdriver

Explanation
AA2 Base card
AA3 Input circuit board
AA4 Display unit
AA4-XJ3 USB socket
AA4-XJ4 Service outlet (No function)
AA5 Accessory card
AA7 Extra relay circuit board
FA1 Miniature circuit-breaker
K2 Emergency mode relay
X1 Terminal block, incoming electrical supply
X2 Terminal block, AUX4 - AUX6
SF1 Switch
PF3 Serial number plate
UB1 Cable grommet, incoming supply electricity,
power for accessories
UB2 Cable grommet, signal
The display may need to be moved for easier access when
connecting electrics. This is easily done by following these
steps.

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

4. Secure the display on the panel.

1. Press in the catch on the upper rear side of the display unit
5. When the electrical connection is ready the display must be
towards you (a) and move the display unit upwards (b) so
reinstalled with three mounting points again, otherwise the
that the mountings unhook from the panel.
front cover cannot be installed.

2. Lift the display unit from its mountings.

3. Align the two lower mountings on the reverse of the


display unit with the two upper holes in the panel as
illustrated.

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Cable lock Connection


Use a suitable tool to release/lock cables in the terminal block.
NOTE
HSB140, RC-HY20/40 To prevent interference, unscreened communication and/
Terminal block on the electrical card or sensor cables to external connections must not be laid
closer than 20 cm from high voltage cables.

HSB140
2

1
2

1
Power supply
2
In case of HSB140, power supply is made to indoor unit,
4 LE
K
outdoor unit and controller separately. 230V 1AC 50Hz is
1
applied.
3 For indoor unit, incoming supply is connected on AA23-X1
2 terminal.

AA23-X1

Terminal block AA23-F3

AA23

AA23-X4
LEK

AA23-S3

3,5 mm AA23-X100

1 mm

For outdoor unit, incoming supply is connected on TB


terminal. See figure on Connection between indoor and outdoor
unit.
Connection between indoor and outdoor unit
The communication cable between indoor and outdoor unit is
connected between terminal AA23-X100 in indoor unit and TB
in outdoor unit. Screened 2 core cable is recommended.

FDCW 140
L N 1 2 3 (AMS
TB 10:TB)

HSB 140
Communication AA23-X100
AA23-X100

1
Communication

2
Electrical distribution
Central 3
unit

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between indoor unit and controller RC-HY20/40


See Connection for RC-HY20/40 Cable connection is different according to the system structure.
Refer to the connection method according to the indoor unit.
Cascade connection setting
In case of cascade connection system, it is necessary to allot Power supply
unique address to each indoor unit. Set the dip switch S3-1, -2 HSB140
and -3 according to the following table. Connect power cable on X1 terminal as shown below.
Address S3:1 S3:2 S3:3 RC-HY 20/40 must be installed via an isolator switch with a
1 OFF OFF OFF minimum breaking gap of 3 mm. Minimum cable area must be
2 On OFF OFF sized according to the fuse rating used.
3 OFF On OFF
4 On On OFF
5 OFF OFF On X1
6 On OFF On
7 OFF On On
8 On On On L N

Recommended fuse size for HSB140


The recommended fuse size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Fuse size
Indoor unit (HSB140) 6A / 230V 1AC 50Hz RC-HY20/40 X1
Outdoor unit (FDCW140VNX) 30A / 230V 1AC 50Hz
Controller (RC-HY20/40) 10A/ 230V 1AC 50Hz
Electric heater (ELK9M)
16 A/400V 3NAC 50Hz
(reference)

Recommended cable size for HSB140


The recommended cable size shown in the following table is
reference value. Choose appropriate size according to local
laws and regulations.
Cable size
Power – Indoor unit 3core, 1.5mm2 (power cable)
Power – Outdoor unit 3core, 6.0mm2 (power cable)
2core, 1.5mm2
Indoor unit – Outdoor unit
(communication cable)
Indoor unit – Controller 3core, 0.5mm 2 , LiYY, EKKX or
equivalent (communication cable)

30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Connection between controller and indoor unit Connection between controller and circulation
HSB140 pump (GP12)
Signal cable is connected between controller and indoor unit HSB140
with screened 3 core cable for HSB140. Choose correct For HSB140, circulation pump (GP12) is installed outside of
terminal according to the type of controller as shown below. indoor unit. Choose correct terminal according to the type of
controller.
<HSB140 with RC-HY20>
Connect the port 19(A), 20(B) and 21(GND) on X2 terminal <HSB140 with RC-HY20>
on RC-HY20 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on AA23 Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on
board on HSB140 respectively. RC-HY20/40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump
respectively. Control signal cable is connected between the
GND 6 port 1 and 2 on X2 terminal on RC-HY20 and PWM and GND
B AA23-X4
A
5
4 on circulation pump respectively as shown below.
GND 3
B 2
A 1 4 5 6 7 8 9
AA2-X4

HSB140 SMO 20
RC-HY

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
Externt
External

PE

L
N
RC-HY20 RC-HY20
SMO
LEK

X2 18
RC-HY20
EB101-GP12
19 A

20 B
AA2-X4
21 GND

PWM
X2 1
GND
2
3
<HSB140 with RC-HY40> 4

Connect the port 1(A), 2(B) and 3(GND) on X4 terminal on X2


AA5 board on RC-HY40 to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal
SMO 20
RC-HY
on AA23 board on HSB140 respectively.
Externt
External
In case several systems are connected to one controller, connect
the port 4, 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA23 board on HSB140 RC-HY20
close to the controller to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X4 terminal on X2
AA23 board on another HSB140. EB101-GP12

HSB140 HSB140
GND 6
AA23-X4 GND 6
B 5 B 5 AA23-X4
A 4 A 4
GND 3 GND 3
B 2 B 2
A 1 A 1

RC-HY40
SMO

GND B A

AA5-X4
5 4 3 2 1
-X8

-X4
1 2 3
8 7 6
4
5 4 3 2
5
1

ON AA5-X4
-X2 24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

-X1 -X10 -X9


PE PE L N 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RC-HY40

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HSB140 with RC-HY40> Connection between controller and 3-way valve


Connect the port 5, 6 and 7 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on (QN10/QN12)
RC-HY40 to the port PE, N and L on circulation pump 3-way valve is used for switching heating / hot water
(EB101-GP12) respectively. Control signal cable is connected production (QN10), or switching heating / cooling (QN12).
between the port 7 and 8 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC- Install appropriate valves according to the system structure on
HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as site.
shown below. HSB140

4 5 6 7 8 9
HSB140 is not equipped with 3-way valve. Install the valves
AA2-X4
on right position according to the diagram and connect wires
on appropriate port according to the type of controller.
SMO 40
RC-HY
<HSB140 with RC-HY20>
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

External
Externt
• 3-way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10)
PE

L
N

LEK

Connect the N, Control and L wire on 3-way valve to the port


RC-HY40
2, 3 and 4 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20/40
EB101-GP12
respectively as shown below.
AA2-X4
1 2 3 4 5 6
AA2-X4

10 9 8 7 6 5
AA3-X4
SMO
RC-HY20/40

SMO 40
RC-HY L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
Externt
External
PWM
GND

L
N
External
Externt
LEK

RC-HY20/40
AA3-X4 QN10
RC-HY40
EB101-GP12
AA2-X4

RC-HY40 can connect and control up to two pumps. Connect • 3-way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12)
the port 12, 13 and 15 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC- QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay.
HY40 to the port PE, N and L on second circulation pump Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port 15 and
(EB102-GP12) respectively. Control cable is connected 16 on X4 terminal on AA2 board on RC-HY20 respectively.
between the port 5 and 6 on X4 terminal on AA3 board on RC- Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below.
HY40 and GND and PWM on circulation pump respectively as
Additional setting is necessary in menu 5.4. See Menu system
shown below.
for details.
11 12 13 14 15 16
AA2-X4

SMO 40
RC-HY
14 15 16 17
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
1 2 3 4

External
Externt AA2-X4
PE

L
N

L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

LEK
RC-HY
SMO 20
RC-HY40 LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
EB102-GP12
L
N
AA2-X4
L N
AA2-X4
QN12
8 7 6 5 4 3
AA3-X4

SMO 40
RC-HY
PWM
GND

External
Externt
CAUTION
AA3-X4
RC-HY40 The relay outputs can have a max load of 2 A
EB102-GP12 at resistive load (230V AC).

32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

<HSB140 with RC-HY40> Connection between controller and sensors


• 3way valve for Heating / Hot water (QN10) Sensor connection is different according to the combination of
Refer to 3-way valve connection for HSB140 with RC-HY20. indoor unit and controller. Refer to the appropriate combination
• 3 way valve for Heating / Cooling (QN12) mentioned below.

QN12 can be controlled with potential free variable relay. Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section.
Connect L and Control wire on 3-way valve to the port C and Regarding other sensors not mentioned in this chapter, refer to
NO on X7 terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40 respectively. page 35, Optional connections.
Also, connect L and N wire to power supply as shown below.
<RC-HY20 with HSB140>

• Ambient air temperature sensor BT1


QN12
AA3-X7 Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a
NL
N wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the
L
morning sun.
External
Externt
Connect the sensor to the port 3 and 6 on X2 terminal.
RC-HY
SMO 40
If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation
AA3-X7 in the sensor capsule.
NC NO C

SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External
RC-HY40 1
2
3
4

CAUTION 5

6
BT1

The relay outputs may be subjected to a max RC-HY20


7

load of 2A at resistive load (230V AC). X2


X2

• Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)


The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in
the submerged tube on the water heater.
Connect the sensor to the port 5 and 6 on X2 terminal.
Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start
guide.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

1
2
3
4
5

6
BT6
RC-HY20 7

X2 X2

• Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)


A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected
to RC-HY20 to show the water temperature at the top of the
tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
Connect the sensor to the port 4 and 6 on X2 terminal.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External

1
2
3
4
5
BT7
6

RC-HY20 7

X2 X2

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater <RC-HY40 with HSB140>


This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before • Ambient air temperature sensor BT1
3-way valve (QN10) for switching heating/hot water (see page
Install ambient air temperature sensor (BT1) in the shade on a
23 for diagram).
wall facing north or north-west, so it is unaffected by the
Connect temperature sensor, external supply after electric morning sun for example.
heater (BT63) to the port 9 and 10 on terminal X2.
Connect the sensor to the port 1 and 2 on X6 terminal on AA3
SMO
RC-HY Externt
20 External board.
If a conduit is used it must be sealed to prevent condensation
6

7
in the sensor capsule.
8
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
9

10 1
BT63 2
11
RC-HY20 3
BT1
4
X2 X2 5
6
7
8
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating
AA3-X6 AA3-X6
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way RC-HY40
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 24 for
diagram). • Hot water charging sensor BT6 (tank bottom)
Connect temperature sensor, external supply (BT25) to the port The temperature sensor, hot water charging (BT6) is placed in
8 and 10 on X2 terminal. the submerged tube on the water heater.

SMO Externt
Connect the sensor to the port 7 and 8 on X6 terminal on AA3
RC-HY 20 External
board.
6 Hot water charging is activated in menu 5.2 or in the start
7 guide.
8
9 SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External
BT25
10
6
11
RC-HY20 7
8
X2 X2 9 BT6
10
11
12
• Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating 13

This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way AA3-X6 AA3-X6
RC-HY40
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 24 for
diagram). • Hot water sensor BT7 (tank top)
For connection, see page 37, AUX inputs.
A temperature sensor for hot water top (BT7) can be connected
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling to RC-HY40 to show the water temperature at the top of the
This sensor is used in case cooling application is required. tank (if it is possible to install a sensor at the top of the tank).
For connection, see page 37, AUX inputs. Connect the sensor to the port 15 and 16 on X6 terminal on
AA3 board.
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External

11
12
13
14
15
16
17 BT7
18

AA3-X6 AA3-X6
RC-HY40

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

• Temperature sensor BT63, outlet at additional heater Optional connections


This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed before 3
RC-HY20
way valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hotwater (see page
23 for diagram). Room sensor BT50
For connection, see page54, AUX inputs. Room sensor can be connected to controller.
• Temperature sensor BT25, outlet for heating The room temperature sensor has up to three functions:
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way 1. Show current room temperature in the control module
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 24 for display.
diagram). 2. Option of changing the room temperature in °C.
Connect temperature sensor, external supply line (BT25) to the 3. Makes it possible to change/stabilise the room temperature.
port 5 and 6 on X6 terminal on AA3 board. Install the sensor in a neutral position where the set temperature
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External is required. A suitable location is on a free inner wall in a hall
approx. 1.5 m above the floor.
4
5 Do not install the sensor where correct room temperature
6
7 BT25 cannot be detected such as in a recess, between shelves, behind
8
9
a curtain, above or close to a heat source, in a draft from an
10 external door or in direct sunlight.
11
AA3-X6 Closed radiator thermostats can also cause problems.
AA3-X6
RC-HY40 The control module can operate without the sensor, but if user
wants to read off the accommodation's indoor temperature in
• Temperature sensor BT71, return line for heating controller display, the sensor must be installed.
This sensor is used in case electric heater is placed after 3 way Connect the room sensor to the port 7 and 10 on X2 terminal.
valve (QN10) for switching heating/ hot water (see page 24 for
If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in
diagram).
°C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor
Connect temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) to the must be activated in menu 1.9.4.
port 17 and 18 on X6 terminal on AA3 board.
If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it
SMO
RC-HY Externt
40 External should only have an indicatory function, not control of the
11
room temperature.
12
13 RC-HY 20 External
14
15
16 6
17
18 7

BT71 8
AA3-X6 AA3-X6 9
RC-HY40
10 BT50
• Temperature sensor BT64, outlet for cooling RC-HY20 11

This sensor is used in case cooling application is required. X2 X2


For connection, see page 40, AUX inputs.

CAUTION
Changes of temperature in accommodation
take time. For example, short time periods in
combination with underfloor heating will not
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.

Use two-core cable with a minimum 0.5mm2 cross section.

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Step controlled additional heat Relay output for emergency mode

NOTE NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for
external voltage. external voltage.

External step controlled additional heat can be controlled by up


to three potential-free relays in the control module (3 step When the switch (SF1) is in " " mode (emergency mode) the
linear or 7 step binary). Alternatively two relays (2 step linear circulation pump is activated (EB101-GP12).
or 3 step binary) can be used for step controlled additional
heat, which means that the third relay can be used to control
the immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator tank. CAUTION
Step in occurs with at least 1 minute intervals and step outs No hot water is produced when emergency
with at least 3 seconds intervals. mode is activated.
Step 1 is connected to terminal block X2:2 on the additional
relay board (AA7).
The emergency mode relay can be used to activate external
Step 2 is connected to terminal block X2:4 on the additional additional heat. Between the port 2 and 4 is closed during
relay board (AA7). emergency mode. An external thermostat must be connected to
Step 3 or immersion heater in the water heater/accumulator the control circuit (port 4) to control the temperature. Ensure
tank is connected to terminal block X2:6 on the additional that the heating medium circulates through the external
relay board (AA7). additional heating.
The settings for step controlled additional heat are made in
menu 4.9.3 and menu 5.1.12.
All additional heat can be blocked by connecting a potential-
free switch function to the software controlled input on
PE 2 3 4 X1
terminal block X2 which is selected in menu 5.4.

X1 AA7-X2
-X1
RC-HY
SMO 20/40
12 34 56

External
Externt
1 2 3 4 5 6
-X2
1 0 PE
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
6
AA7-X2
LEK RC-HY20/40 X1
RC-HY
SMO
20/40
External
E
If the relay is to be used for control voltage, bridge the supply
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
from terminal block X1:1 to X1:2 and connect neutral and
A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 control voltage from the external additional heat to X1:0 (N)
A2 A2 A2
RC-HY20/40 X1 and X1:4 (L).

If the relays are to be used for control voltage, bridge the


supply from terminal block X1:1 toX2:1, X2:3 and X2:5 on
X1
additional relay board (AA7). Connect the neutral from the
external additional heat to terminal block X1:0.
Use a cable with appropriate cross section. 1 0 PE 2 3 4

For connection, see the installation manual for additional


heater.
RC-HY
SMO 20/40
Externt
External

N L
RC-HY20/40 X1

36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

External circulation pump ■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64)


Connect the external circulation pump (GP10) to terminal Temperature sensor BT64 is required in case 4-pipe system
block X4:9 (PE), X4:10 (N) and X4:11 (230 V) on the base is used for cooling operation. (see page 23, 24 for diagram)
board (AA2) as illustrated. This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is
AA2-X4 8 9 10 11 12 13 activated.
■ Contact for external tariff blocking
RC-HY
SMO 20/40 In cases where external tariff blocking is required it must be
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4
External
Externt connected to terminal block X2.
Tariff blocking means that the additional heat, the

PE

L
N
LEK

compressor, heating and cooling are disconnected by


RC-HY20/40
connecting a potential free switch function to the input
GP10
selected in menu 5.4.
AA2-X4
A closed contact results in the electrical output being
AUX inputs disconnected.
Other external inputs are available on the port 11 through 18 ■ Switch for “SG ready”
on X2 terminal on RC-HY20.
AUX1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 correspond to the port 11, 12, 13, 15,
NOTE
16 and 17 respectively. Port 14 and 18 are GND and are This function can only be used in mains networks
common to the all auxiliary circuit. Connect a sensor or switch that support the "SG Ready"-standard .
between AUX and GND with a two-core cable with a minimum "SG Ready" requires two AUX inputs.
cross section of 0.5mm2.
This function can only be used in power supply networks that
11
AUX1 support the “SG Ready” standard. “SG Ready” requires two
12 AUX2
13 AUX3 AUX inputs.
1
2
3
5 4

14
GND
6
7

“SG Ready” is a smart tariff management scheme in which


8
9
10
13 12 11

15
AUX4
14
17 16 15

16
AUX5 electricity supplier can affect indoor and hot water temperature
18
21 20 19

17 AUX6
or simply prohibits additional heat and/or the compressor
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

18 GND
LEK
19
20
operation in heat pump at certain period of the day. You can
RC-HY20 21 choose which operation mode is affected by this function in
X2 menu 4.1.5 after the function is activated.
Choose two external input circuits and connect potential-free
Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4. switches, and set “SG Ready A” and “SG Ready B” in menu
5.4. The system works differently according to the combination
soft in/outputs 5.4
of the circuit open/closed.

block heating
Blocking (A: Closed, B: Open)
“SG Ready” is active. Compressor operation and additional
activate temp lux
heat is prohibited.
not used
Normal mode (A: Open, B: Open)
not used
“SG Ready” is not active. No effect on the system.
not used Low price mode (A: Open, B: Closed)
not used "SG Ready" is active. The system operates to provide higher
capacity than normal mode by using lower tariff electricity.
■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74) You can select the operation mode (heating/hot water/
Additional room sensor (BT74) is applied in case user wants cooling) affected by this function in menu 4.1.5.
to determine the operation mode (cooling/heating) with a Overcapacity mode (A: Closed, B: Closed)
temperature in a particular room. “SG Ready” is active. The system supplies higher capacity
This option can be chosen only in case cooling function is than Low price mode since the electricity price is supposed
available. to be very low in this mode. You can select the operation
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71) mode (heating/hot water/cooling) affected by this function in
menu 4.1.5.
Temperature sensor BT71 is applied in case additional heater
is placed after 3-way valve (see page 24 for diagram).

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

■Contact for activation of “temporary lux” • AUX outputs


Temporary hot water production function “temporary lux” is External output is available on the port 15 to 17 on X4 terminal
activated with this signal. Connect the terminals with a on AA2 board on RC-HY20. The relay output can have a max
potential-free switch and choose the function in menu 5.4. load of 2A at resistive load.
“Temporary lux” is activated only when the switch is closed.
■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
Target temperature offset for supply temperature or room
14 15 16 17
temperature can be done with this signal. AA2-X4

When a room sensor is connected and activated, the target


L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
room temperature is offset in ℃ if the switch is closed. LEK

When a room sensor is not connected, target supply water RC-HY20 External
Externt
temperature (heat curve) is offset instead. The degree of
offset can be set in menu 5.4. AA2-X4
■Switch for external alarm
Alarms from external devices can be connected to the control Following functions are available. Select the function in menu
and appear as an info alarm. Potential-free signal of NO or 5.4.
NC type can be connected. Indication of buzzer alarm
■Switch for external blocking When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between
This function is used in case certain operation mode needs to the port 15 and 16. During normal operation, the port 15 and
be prohibited. The operation at selected operation mode is 17 is closed.
prohibited when the switch is closed. Following functions Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
can be managed. cooling)
Additional heat When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
compressor operation becomes closed between the port 15 and 16. By using this
heating mode signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
cooling mode
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 32, 33.
hot water mode
External pump control (GP10)
External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 24 for diagram).
Connect the circulation pump as shown below using the port
15 and 16 on X4 terminal.

14 15 16 1 7
AA2-X4
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

RC-HY
SMO 20
LEK

RC-HY20 External
Externt
L
N
PE L N PE
AA2-X4

Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
(refer to page 20 for diagram).

38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump RC-HY40


control (GP10).
Load monitor
In case many power electrical appliances are connected in the
NOTE property and the electric heater is energised at the same time,
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external there is a risk of tripping the main fuse of the property.
voltage.
The control module has an integrated load monitor that controls
the power steps of the electric heater by disconnecting step by
step in the event of overload in a phase. It will be reconnected
myUpway™ if other current consumption is reduced.
Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP) Connecting current sensors
with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display A current sensor (BE1 - BE3) should be installed on each
unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the incoming phase conductor in to the electrical distribution unit
control module for cable routing. to measure the current. This is best done in the electrical
distribution unit.
Connect the current sensors to a multi-core cable in an
enclosure next to the electrical distribution unit. Use a multi-
core cable of at least 0.5 mm² from the enclosure to the heat
pump.
Connect the cable to terminal block X4:1 to 4.
AA4-X9
-
X4:1 is the common terminal block for the three current
sensors.
Set the size of the property's main fuse in menu 5.1.12.
Incoming electricity
Inkommande el
P EN L1 L2 L3

Electrical distribution unit

Control module
Värmepump

AA3-X4
6 5 4 3 2 1

RC-HY
SMO 40
External
Externt
AA3-X4
RC-HY40
BE3 BE1
BE2

39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

Room sensor BT50 AUX inputs


Refer to Room sensor BT50 for RC-HY20 for function and Up to 6 other external inputs are available on RC-HY40.
installation place. AUX1 through 3 correspond to the port 9/10, 11/12, 13/14
Connect the room sensor to terminal block X6:3 and X6:4 on respectively on X6 terminal on AA3 board. AUX4 through 6
the input board (AA3). correspond to the port 1, 2 and 3 on X2 terminal on RC-HY40.
If the sensor is to be used to change the room temperature in Port 4 on X2 terminal is GND and is common to AUX4
°C and/or to change/stabilise the room temperature, the sensor through 6. Connect a sensor or switch between AUX and GND
must be activated in menu 1.9.4. with a two-core cable with a minimum cross section of
0.5mm2.
If the room sensor is used in a room with underfloor heating, it
should only have an indicatory function, not control of the
AUX1
room temperature.
SMO External
RC-HY40 Externt AUX2 AA3-X6

2 AUX3
3
4
5
6
7 BT50
8
9
RC-HY40
AA3-X6 X2
AA3-X6 RC-HY40

AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
GND
CAUTION
Changes of temperature in accommodation
take time. For example, short time periods in Select the appropriate function in menu 5.4.
combination with underfloor heating will not
soft in/outputs 5.4
give a noticeable difference in room temperature.
block heating

activate temp lux


• Step controlled additional heat
not used
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
not used
• Relay output for emergency mode
not used
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
not used
• External circulation pump
Refer to the explanation for RC-HY20.
■ Temperature sensor, external supply at additional heat before
reversing valve (BT63)
Temperature sensor BT63 is applied in case additional heater
is placed before 3-way valve (see page 23 for diagram)
The following functions are available. For details, see AUX
inputs for RC-HY20.
■ Temperature sensor, cooling/heating (BT74)
■ Temperature sensor, external return line (BT71)
■ Temperature sensor, flow line cooling (BT64)
■ Contact for external tariff blocking
■ Switch for “SG ready”
■Contact for activation of “temporary lux”
■Contact for activation of “external adjustment”
■Switch for external alarm
■Switch for external blocking

40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical installation

AUX outputs Hot water circulation pump control (GP11)


External output is available on the port NC, NO and C on X7 In case the distance between hot water tap and hot water
terminal on AA3 board on RC-HY40. The relay output can storage tank is far, the hot water supply line temperature is
have a max load of 2A at resistive load. likely to drop and it may take time to supply hot water from
the tap. In that case, hot water circulation pump (GP11) is
X1 AA7-X2 applied to maintain hot water supply line temperature warm
-X1
(refer to page 20 for diagram).
12 34 56

-X2
1 2 3 4 5 6
For details of connecting the pump, refer to External pump
1 0 PE
1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6
control (GP10).
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4

AA7-X2
LEK

RC-HY
SMO 40
NOTE
Mark up any junction boxes with warnings for external
External
Externt
L N 1 1 0 PE 2 3 4 voltage.
A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3
A2 A2 A2
RC-HY40 X1
myUpway™
Following functions are available. Select the function in menu Connect the network connected cable (straight, Cat.5e UTP)
5.4. with RJ45-contact (male) to contact AA4-X9 on the display
Indication of buzzer alarm unit (as illustrated). Use the cable grommet (UB2) in the
When an alarm occurs, the circuit becomes closed between control module for cable routing.
the port NO and C. During normal operation, the port NC
and C is closed.
Cooling mode indication / Active cooling mode (4-pipe
cooling)
When the system turns into cooling mode, the circuit
becomes closed between the port NO and C. By using this AA4-X9
-
signal, it is possible to switch 3-way valve for 4-pipe cooling
or to assemble a display circuit indicating cooling mode. For
details of connecting the 3-way valve, refer to page 32, 33.
External pump control (GP10)
External pump (GP10) is used in case additional heater is
placed after 3-way valve that switches heating/hot water
(refer to page 24).
Connect the circulation pump using the port NO and C on
X7 terminal on AA3 board as shown below.

PE N L
PE
N
L

External
Externt
AA3-X7
RC-HY40 RC-HY
SMO 40

AA3-X7 NC NO C

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Commissioning and adjusting CAUTION


Preparations Open the hot water intake valves before heating the system
up for the first time or after a longer break in its operation
Before starting commissioning, check the followings; in order to check whether the storage tank is filled with
water and the cut-off valve at the cold water inlet is not
The signal cable is connected between indoor unit and closed.
outdoor unit as well as indoor unit and controller according
to the instruction.
The power cable is connected to indoor unit, outdoor unit
Climate system
and controller according to the instruction.
1. Open the vent at the top of the heating system.
Operation switch in controller is in the position .
2. Open all shut-off valves, where installed, so that water flows
The service valves on outdoor unit (QM35 and QM36) are
into all circuits.
open.
3. Open the valve for filling the heating circuit and fill it with
Drain valve is closed before filling water in the system.
water.
Temperature limiter and electrical switch are not tripped.
4. Close the vent when water comes out continuously without
The system is filled with water and well vented. bubbles.
There are no leaks on the water pipe. 5. Check the manometer and close the filling valve when the
pressure reaches the required value (2 bar is recommended).
Filling and venting 6. Start the circulation pump of the heating system, and open
the vent from time to time and release the all remaining air
Hot water tank in the heating system.
1. Open the hot water tap as well as venting valve if applicable, 7. Open safety valve until the pressure of the heating system
and then open the cold water cut-off valve at the inlet. drops down to about 1 bar. If the pressure drops below 1 bar
2. Fill the storage tank until obtaining uniform water outflow at during venting, add additional water in the circuit.
the hot water tap, and then close the hot water tap and
venting valve. Inspection of installation
3. Fill the water heater coil in the tank. See Climate system for
details. Current regulations require that the climate system is inspected
before it is commissioned. The inspection must be carried out
After the installation and levelling the tank, follow the
by a suitably qualified person and must be documented. Do not
procedure below (for the connector pipe symbols, refer to page
replace any part of the system without carrying out new
18):
checks.
1. Remove protecting plugs from the connector pipes
2. Connect the hot water intake line (N).
3. Connect the cold water supply line together with the
required safety valves (G).
4. If the system has the hot water circulati on system, connect
it to the connector pipe (L). Otherwise, plug the pipe.
5. Connect the supply (J) and return (H) of the heating medium
to the coil.

CAUTION
If there is an electric heating module installed in the
storage tank, fill the tank with water before connecting
it to the electrical installation.

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start-up and inspection Cooling mode


In case the climate system contains a cooling circuit, activate
Before start-up cooling function in menu 5.11.1.1. After that, you can choose
1 In case of cascade connection, check if each indoor unit has cooling mode indication in menu 5.4 for the AUX output.
a unique address. See Cascade connection setting on page
Cleaning particle filter
25 for details.
Clean the particle filter (HQ1) after installation.
2. For an outdoor unit equipped with a crank case heater, it is
necessary to supply power 6-8 hours before starting 1. Close valve QM31 and the valve by the particle filter (HQ1).
compressor operation to heat the compressor with the heater. 2. Open the safety valve (QM20) to ensure that the pressure in
To do this, supply power to whole system and disable the HSB60 drops.
compressor operation from menu 5.2.2 on the controller. 3. Clean the particle filter (HQ1) as illustrated.
Disable additional heater as well if necessary.
3. After 6-8 hours, enable the compressor operation in menu 1

LEK
5.2.2 on the controller and enable the additional heater in
menu 4.9.2 and 4.9.3 on the controller.
4. Start commissioning by the following steps.
*Step 2 and 3 are not necessary for FDCW60VNX-A.

Commissioning with heat pump


Start guide is shown on the display on the controller when it is
turned ON for the first time. Follow the start guide in the 2

LEK
display, or choose menu 5.7 to show the start guide. For details,
see Start guide on page 58.
Commissioning with additional heater
only
Follow the start guide in the display as same as commissioning
with heat pump, and then follow the list below.
1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
Secondary adjustment
2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
Air is initially released from the hot water and venting may be
the OK button.
necessary. If bubbling sounds can be heard from the heat pump,
3. Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button. the circulation pump and radiators the entire system will
require further venting. When the system is stable (correct
CAUTION pressure and all air eliminated) the automatic heating control
When commissioning without MHI air/water heat pump an system can be set as required
alarm communication error may appear in the display.
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").

3-way valve operation check


1. Activate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
2. Check that the reversing valve opens or is open for hot water
charging.
3. Deactivate "AA2-K1 (QN10)" in menu 5.6.
AUX function check
To check any function connected to the AUX socket,
1. Activate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-HY40)”
in menu 5.6.
2. Check the desired function.
3. Deactivate “AA2-X4 (RC-HY20)” or “AA3-X7 (RC-
HY40)” in menu 5.6.

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Start guide Operation in the start guide


A. Page B. Name and menu number
NOTE
Fill in the climate system with water before the switch is set language 4.6
to " "

1. Set the control module's switch to " ".


2. Follow the instructions in the start guide in the control
module display. If the start guide does not start when you
start the control module, start it manually in menu 5.7.

TIP
See page 63 for a more in-depth introduction to the If the start guide is left on this page it closes
installation’s control system (operation, menus etc.). automatically in
60 min

C. Option / setting
Commissioning
The start guide is displayed when installation is started, It A. Page
describes what needs to carry out at the first start together with
basic settings during installation. You can see the current page of the start guide.
The start guide is displayed so that it cannot be bypassed in Scroll between the pages of the start guide as follows:
order to carry out the start-up correctly. You can start the start 1. Turn the control knob until the arrow is marked in the top
guide later in menu 5.7. left corner (at the page number).
During the start-up guide, reversing valves and the shunt are 2. Press OK button to proceed to the next page in the start
run back and forth to help vent the heat pump. guide.
B. Name and menu number
CAUTION
As long as the start guide is active, no function in the heat You can see the menu name of this page. The number refers to
pump will start automatically. the menu number in the control system.
Each time the controller is ON, the guide will appear until it To read more about affected menus, see the help menu or read
is completed on the last page. the user manual.

C. Option / setting
Make settings for the system here.

D. Help menu
In many menus there is a symbol indicating that extra help
is available.
To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
scroll between using the control knob.

44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

Heating/cooling curve setting The optimum slope depends on the climate conditions in your
location, the type of heating device (radiators or under floor
heating curve 1.9.1.1 heating) and how well insulated the house is.
system
The curve is set when the heating installation is installed, but
flow temperature °C may need adjusting later. Normally, the curve will not need
further adjustment.

CAUTION
In the event of making fine adjustments of the indoor
temperature, the curve must be offset up or down instead,
outdoor temp. °C
this is done in menu 1.1 temperature .

cooling curve 1.9.1.2 Curve offset


system
The target temperature can be offset in parallel over the entire
flow temperature °C
outdoor temperature range by this function. This is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
The target temperature can be parallel offset in the entire
outdoor temperature range with this function. It is offset by
5 °C by adjusting 2 steps.
outdoor temp. °C
Supply temperature
°C
70
Offset
Förskju tenheating curve
vär mekurva

heating curve 60

Setting range: 0 – 15 50

Default value: 9 40

30
cooling curve (accessory required)
Setting range: 0 – 9 10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
UTETEMPERATUR
Outdoor temperature
Default value: 0
Flow line temperature – maximum and
The prescribed heating curve for your house can be viewed in minimum values
the menu heating curve . The task of the heating curve is to This function is used in order to limit max-min supply
give an even indoor temperature, regardless of the outdoor temperature. The heating / cooling curve becomes flat beyond
temperature, and thereby energy efficient operation. From this max / min target temperature.
heating curve, the control module determines the temperature
of the water to the heating system, supply temperature, and CAUTION
there by the indoor temperature. Select the heating curve and Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
read off how the supply temperature changes at different temperature set between 35 and 45°C. Take care not to
outdoor temperatures here. If there is cooling function, the cause low temperature burns in case it is set higher than
35°C.
same settings can be made for the cooling curve.
Must be restricted with underfloor cooling min. flow line
Curve coefficient temp. to prevent condensation.
The heating/cooling curve shows the relation between the Check the max temperature for your floor with your
target supply temperature and the corresponding outdoor installer/floor supplier.
temperature. A steep curve indicates that supply temperature
becomes higher at low outdoor air temperature in heating and
it becomes lower at high outdoor air temperature in cooling. Supply temperature
°C
70
Supply temperature
°C
70 60
Steeper
Brantare curve slope
kur vlutning Maximum value
Maximivärde
60
50

50
40

40
30 Minimum value
Minimivärde
30

10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 °C
Outdoor temperature
UTETEMPERATUR
10 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40°C
Outdoor tempera
UTETEMPERATUR

45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

The figure at the end of the curve indicates the curve number. Hot water circulation setting
The figure beside the thermometer icon gives the curve offset.
Use the control knob to set a new value. hot water recirc.
Confirm the new setting by pressing the OK button. operating time
Curve 0 is an own curve created in menu 1.9.7.
Setting range: 1 – 60 min
To select another curve (slope): Default value: 60 min
1. Press OK button to access the setting mode downtime
2. Select a new curve. The curves are numbered from 0 to 15, Setting range: 0 – 60 min
and the bigger number curve has steeper slope.
Default value: 0 min
Curve 0 means that own curve (menu 1.9.7) is used.
3. Press OK button to exit the setting.
Set the hot water circulation for up to three periods per day
To read off a curve: here. During the set periods the hot water circulation pump will
1. Turn the control knob so that the ring on the shaft with the run according to the settings above.
outdoor temperature is marked. "operating time" decide how long the hot water circulation
2. Press OK button. pump must run per operating instance.
3. Follow the grey line up to the curve and out to the left to "downtime" decide how long the hot water circulation pump
read off the value for the supply temperature at the selected must be stationary between operating instances.
outdoor temperature. Hot water circulation is activated in menu 5.4 "soft inputs and
4. You can now select to take read outs for different outdoor outputs".
temperatures by turning the control knob to the right or left
and read off the corresponding flow temperature.
5. Press OK or Back button to exit read off mode.

TIP
Wait 24 hours before making a new setting, so that the
room temperature has time to stabilise.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve slope by one increment.
If it is cold outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve slope by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too low,
increase the curve offset by one increment.
If it is warm outdoors and the room temperature is too high,
lower the curve offset by one increment.

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Commissioning and adjusting

SG Ready
This function can only be used in mains networks that support
the "SG Ready"-standard .
Make settings for the function "SG Ready" here.
Low price mode means that the electricity supplier has a low
tariff and the system uses this to reduce costs.
Over capacity mode means that the electricity supplier has set
the tariff very low and the system uses this to reduce the costs
as much as possible.
affect room temperature
Here you set whether room temperature should be affected
when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset of the
indoor temperature is increased by "+1". If a room sensor is
installed and activated, the desired room temperature increases
by 1 °C.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the parallel offset for
the indoor temperature is increased by"+2".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature increases by 2 °C.
affect hot water
Here you set whether the temperature of the hot water should
be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode on "SG Ready" the stop temperature of
the hot water is set as high as possible at only compressor
operation (immersion heater not permitted).
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" the hot water is set to
"luxury" (immersion heater permitted).
affect cooling (accessory required)
Here you set whether room temperature during cooling
operation should be affected when activating "SG Ready".
With low price mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation the
indoor temperature is not affected.
With over capacity mode of "SG Ready" and cooling operation
the parallel offset for the indoor temperature is reduced by"-1".
If a room sensor is installed and activated, the desired room
temperature decreases by 1 °C.

NOTE
The function must be connected to two AUX inputs and
activated in menu 5.4.

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Control F Switch (SF1)


The switch shows three positions:
Display unit ■ On ( )

A Display
B Status lamp
C OK button
D Back button
E Control knob
F Switch
G USB port

A Display ■ Standby ( )
■ Emergency mode ( )
Instructions, settings and operational information are shown
on the display. The easy-to-read display and menu system, Emergency mode must only be used in the event of a fault
make it easy to navigate between various menus and options, on the control module. In this mode, the compressor in the
set comfort and get the necessary information. heat pump is turned off and the immersion heater is
activated.
B Status lamp The control module display is not illuminated and the status
The status lamp indicates the status of the control module. lamp lights yellow.
It:
G USB port
■ lights green during normal operation.
■ lights yellow in emergency mode. The USB port is hidden behind the plastic badge of the
■ lights red in the event of an alarm. product name.
The USB port is used to update the software.
C OK button
The OK button is used to:
■ confirm selections of sub menus/options/set values/page in
the start guide.
D Back button
The back button is used to:
■ go back to the previous menu.
■ change a setting that has not been confirmed.
E Control knob
The control knob can be turned to the right or left. You can:
■ scroll in menus and between options.
■ increase and decrease values.
■ change pages in multiple page instructions
(for example help text and service info).

48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu system Symbols in the display


The following symbols can appear in the display during
Outdoor Indoor temperature- operation.
tempeature (if room sensors are installed)
Symbol Description

-5o This symbol appears when there is informa-


Hot water temp. tion to be noticed in menu 3.1.
22o
INDOOR CLIMATE

54o These two symbols indicate whether the


MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER compressor in the outdoor unit or additional
Estimated amount of heat in the installation is blocked via
hot water
INFO controller.
These functions will be blocked for example,
Information about Temporary lux when either of the operation mode is blocked
operation (if activated)
in menu 4.2, when blocking of either function
is scheduled in menu 4.9.5, or when an alarm
Menu 1 - INDOOR CLIMATE for blocking the operation occurs.
Setting and scheduling the indoor climate. See information in
the help menu or user manual. Blocking the compressor.
Menu 2 - HOT WATER
Blocking additional heat.
Setting and scheduling hot water production. See information
in the help menu or user manual.
This symbol appears if periodic increase or
This menu only appears if a water heater is installed in the lux mode for the hot water is activated.
system.
Menu 3 - INFO This symbol indicates if "holiday setting" is
active in menu 4.7.
Display of temperature and other operating information and
access to the alarm log. See information in the help menu or This symbol indicates if the controller has
user manual. contact with myUpway.
Menu 4 - MY INSTALLATION
This symbol indicates if cooling is active.
Setting time, date, language, display, operating mode etc. See
information in the help menu or user manual.
Menu 5 - SERVICE
Advanced settings. These settings are not available to the end
user. The menu is made visible by pressing the Back button for
7 seconds in the top screen. See page 68 for details.

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu number – marked sub menu Name and menu number – main menu

Symbol –
INDOOR CLIMATE 1
main menu

INDOOR CLIMATE 1.1 temperature 25.0O

scheduling
MYINSTALLATION HOT WATER
advanced

INFO

Marked main
menu
Symbols – sub menus Name – sub menus Status information – sub menus

The selected option has a green tick.


Operation
To move the cursor, turn the control knob to the left Setting a value
or the right. The marked position is brighter and/or time & date 4.4
has a light frame. time
24 h
Selecting menu
12 h
To advance in the menu system select a main menu by marking
date
it and then pressing the OK button. A new window opens with
day
sub menus.
month
Select one of the sub menus by marking it and then pressing
the OK button. year

Selecting options
comfort mode 2.2
Values to be changed

economy To set a value:


normal 1. Mark the value you want to set using the control
knob.
luxury
2. Press the OK button. The background of the value
becomes green, which means that you have accessed
the setting mode.
3. Turn the control knob to the right to increase the
Alternative value and to the left to reduce the value.
4. Press the OK button to confirm the value you have
In an options menu the current selected option is
set. To change and return to the original value, press
indicated by a green tick.
the Back button.
To select another option:
1. Mark the applicable option. One of the options is pre-
selected (white).
2. Press the OK button to confirm the selected option.

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Use the virtual keyboard


2. Press the OK button to skip between the steps in the start
guide.

Help menu
In many menus there is a symbol that indicates that extra
help is available.
Different keyboards To access the help text:
1. Use the control knob to select the help symbol.
2. Press the OK button.
The help text often consists of several windows that you can
In some menus where text may require entering, a virtual
scroll between using the control knob.
keyboard is available.

Depending on the menu, you can gain access to different


character sets which you can select using the control knob. To
change character table, press the Back button. If a menu only
has one character set, the keyboard is displayed directly.
When you have finished writing, mark "OK" and press the OK
button.
Scroll through the windows
A menu can consist of several windows. Turn the control knob
to scroll between the windows.

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

Scroll through the windows in the start


guide

Current menu Number of windows


window in the menu

1. Turn the control knob until one of the arrows in the top left
corner (at the page number) has been marked.

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu list
"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
1 INDOOR CLIMATE
1.1 - temperature 1.1.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.1.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.3 - scheduling 1.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9 - advanced 1.9.1 curve 1.9.1.1 heating curve ✔ ✔
1.9.1.2 cooling curve ** ✔ ✔
1.9.2 external adjustment ✔ ✔
1.9.3 min. flow line temp. 1.9.3.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.3.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.4 room sensor settings ✔ ✔
1.9.5 cooling settings * ✔ ✔
1.9.7 own curve 1.9.7.1 heating ✔ ✔
1.9.7.2 cooling ** ✔ ✔
1.9.8 point offset ✔ ✔
2 HOTWATER
2.1 temporary lux ✔ ✔
2.2 comfort mode ✔ ✔
2.3 scheduling ✔ ✔
2.9 advanced 2.9.1 periodic increase ✔ ✔
2.9.2 hot water recirc. * ✔ ✔
3 INFO
3.1 service info ✔ ✔
3.2 compressor info ✔ ✔
3.3 add. heat info ✔ ✔
3.4 alarm log ✔ ✔
3.5 indoor temp. log ✔ ✔
4. MY SYSTEM
4.1 plus functions 4.1.3 internet 4.1.3.1 myUpway™ ✔ ✔
4.1.3.8 tcp/ip settings ✔ ✔
4.1.3.9 proxy settings ✔ ✔
4.1.5 SG Ready ✔ ✔
4.1.6 smart price adaption™ ✔ ✔
4.1.8 smart energy source™ 4.1.8.1 settings - ✔
4.1.8.2 set. Price - ✔
4.1.8.3 CO2 impact - ✔
4.1.8.4 tariff periods, electricity - ✔
4.1.8.6 tariff per, ext. shunt add - ✔
4.1.8.7 tariff per, ext. step add - ✔
4.2 op. mode ✔ ✔
4.3 my icons ✔ ✔
4.4 time & date ✔ ✔

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

"* Accessories are needed. ** Heat pump with cooling function required. 40"
MENU RC-HY20 RC-HY40
4.6 language ✔ ✔
4.7 holiday setting ✔ ✔
4.9 advanced 4.9.1 op. prioritisation ✔ ✔
4.9.2 auto mode setting ✔ ✔
4.9.3 degree minute setting ✔ ✔
4.9.4 factory setting user ✔ ✔
4.9.5 schedule blocking ✔ ✔
4.9.6 schedule silent mode ✔ ✔
5 SERVICE
5.1 operating settings 5.1.1 hot water settings * ✔ ✔
5.1.2 max flow line temperature ✔ ✔
5.1.3 max diff flow line temp. ✔ ✔
5.1.4 alarm actions ✔ ✔
5.1.12 addition ✔ ✔
5.1.14 flow set. climate system ✔ ✔
5.1.22 heat pump testing ✔ ✔
5.1.23 compressor curve ✔ ✔
5.2 system settings 5.2.2 installed slaves ✔ ✔
5.2.3 docking ✔ ✔
5.2.4 accessories ✔ ✔
5.3 accessory settings 5.3.2 shunt controlled add. heat * - ✔
5.3.3 extra climate system * - ✔
5.3.6 step controlled add. Heat - ✔
5.3.8 hot water comfort * - ✔
5.3.20 flow sensor* - ✔
5.4 soft in/outputs ✔ ✔
5.5 factory setting service ✔ ✔
5.6 forced control ✔ ✔
5.7 start guide ✔ ✔
5.8 quick start ✔ ✔
5.9 floor drying function ✔ ✔
5.10 change log ✔ ✔
5.11 slave settings 5.11.1 EB101 5.11.1.1 heat pump ✔ ✔
5.11.1.2 charge pump (GP12) ✔ ✔
5.11.2 EB102 - ✔
5.11.3 EB103 - ✔
5.11.4 EB104 - ✔
5.11.5 EB105 - ✔
5.11.6 EB106 - ✔
5.11.7 EB107 - ✔
5.11.8 EB108 - ✔
5.12 country ✔ ✔

53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Sub-menus Menu 5.1 - operating settings


Menu SERVICE has orange text and is intended for the Operating settings can be made for the control module in the
advanced user. This menu has several sub-menus. sub menus.
Status information for the relevant menu can be found on the Menu 5.1.1 - hot water settings
display to the right of the menus.
economy
operating settings: Operating settings for the control
Setting range start temp. economy: 5 – 55 °C
module.
Factory setting start temp. economy: 42 °C
system settings: System settings for the control module, Setting range stop temp. economy: 5 – 60 °C
activating accessories etc. Factory setting stop temp. economy: 48 °C
soft in/outputs: Setting software controlled in and normal
outputs on the input card (AA3) and terminal block (X2). Setting range start temp. normal: 5 – 60 °C
factory setting service: Total reset of all settings (including Factory setting start temp. normal: 46 °C
settings available to the user ) to default values. Setting range stop temp. normal: 5 – 65 °C
forced control: Forced control of the different components in Factory setting stop temp. normal: 50 °C
the indoor module. luxury
start guide: Manual start of the start guide which is run the Setting range start temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
first time when the control module is started. Factory setting start temp. lux: 49 °C
quick start: Quick starting the compressor. Setting range stop temp. lux: 5 – 70 °C
Factory setting stop temp. lux: 53 °C
NOTE stop temp. per. increase
Incorrect settings in the service menus can damage the Setting range: 55 – 70 °C
installation. Factory setting: 55 °C
charge method
Setting range: target temp, delta temp
Default value: delta temp
Here you set the start and stop temperature of the hot water for
the different comfort options in menu 2.2 as well as the stop
temperature for periodic increase in menu 2.9.1.
The charge method for hot water mode is selected here. "delta
temp" is recommended for heaters with charge coil, "target
temp" for heaters with domestic coil.
Menu 5.1.2 - max flow line temperature
climate system
Setting range: 5 – 70 °C
Default value: 60 °C
Set the maximum supply temperature for the climate system
here. If the installation has more than one climate system,
individual maximum supply temperatures can be set for each
system. Climate systems 2 – 8 cannot be set to a higher max
supply temperature than climate system 1.

CAUTION
Underfloor heating systems are normally max flow line
temperature set between 35 and 45°C.
Be careful not to cause low temperature burn if it is set at
35°C or higher.
Check the max floor temperature with your floor supplier.

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.1.3 - max diff flow line temp. <Add. Type: shurt controlled (RC-HY40 only)>
max diff compressor prioritised additional heat
Setting range: 1 – 25 °C Setting range: on/off
Default value: 10 °C Factory setting: off
max diff addition minimum running time
Setting range: 1 – 24 °C Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 7 °C Default value: 12 h
Here you set the maximum permitted difference between the min temp.
calculated and actual supply temperature during compressor Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
mode and add. heat mode. Max diff. additional heat can never Default value: 55 °C
exceed max diff. compressor
mixing valve amplifier
max diff compressor
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
When the current supply temperature deviates from the set Default value: 1.0
value compared to that calculated, the heat pump is forced to mixing valve step delay
stop irrespective of the degreeminute value.
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
If the current supply temperature exceeds the calculated flow Default values: 30 s
temperature plus the set value, the degree minute value is set to
0. The compressor in the heat pump stops when there is only a fuse size
heating demand. Setting range: 1 – 200 A
Factory setting: 16 A
max diff addition
transformation ratio
If "addition” is selected and activated in menu 4.2 and the
Setting range: 300 – 3000
present supply temp exceeds the calculated temperature plus
Factory setting: 300
the set value, the additional heat is forced to stop.
Select this option if shunt controlled additional heat is
Menu 5.1.4 - alarm actions connected.
Select how to control the heat pump in the event of an alarm. Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
You can choose to stop producing hot water and/or reduce the minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
room temperature. External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
CAUTION You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
If no alarm action is selected, it can result in time.
higher energy consumption in the event of an Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
alarm. external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
Menu 5.1.12 - addition otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
add type: step controlled
max step
TIP
Setting range (binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Setting range (binary stepping activated): 0 – 7
Default value: 3
fuse size Menu 5.1.14 - flow set. climate system
Setting range: 1 – 200 A presettings
Factory setting: 16 A Setting range: radiator, floor heat., rad. + floor heat.
You can set the maximum number of permitted additional Default value: radiator
heat steps, if there is internal additional heat in the tank (only Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C
accessible if the additional heat is positioned after QN10), The factory setting of DOT value depends on the country
whether binary stepping is to be used and the size of the that has been given for the product's location.
fuse. The example below refers to Sweden.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C
own setting
Setting range dT at DOT: 0.0 – 25.0

55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Factory setting dT at DOT: 10.0 Menu 5.2 - system settings


Setting range DOT: -40.0 – 20.0 °C Make different system settings for your installation here, e.g.
Factory setting DOT: -20.0 °C activate the connected heat pump and which accessories are
Select the type of heating distribution system. installed.
dT at DOT is the difference in degrees between flow and return
Menu 5.2.2 - installed heat pump
temperatures at dimensioned outdoor temperature.
If a heat pump is connected to the master installation, set it
Menu 5.1.22 - heat pump testing here.
For RC-HY40, you can set slave unit to be connected.
NOTE
There are two ways of activating connected slaves. You can
This menu is intended for testing heat pump according to
different standards. either mark the alternative in the list or use the automatic
Use of this menu for other reasons may result in your function "search installed slaves".
installation not functioning as intended. search installed slaves
Mark “search installed slaves" and press the OK button to
This menu contains several sub-menus, one for each standard. automatically find connected slaves for the master heat pump.
Menu 5.1.23 - compressor curve Menu 5.2.3 – docking (RC-HY 40 only)
Set whether the compressor in the heat pump should work to a Enter how your system is docked regarding pipes, for example
particular curve under specific requirements or if it should to hot water heating and heating the building.
work to predefined curves.
This menu has a docking memory which means that the control
You can set a curve for each operation mode (heat, hot water, system remembers how a particular reversing valve is docked
coolingetc.) by unticking "auto", turning the control knob until and automatically enters the correct docking the next time you
a temperature is marked and pressing OK. You can set at what use the same reversing valve.
temperature max- min frequencies will occur.
This menu consists of several windows (one for each operation Slave (heat pump) Workspace for docking
mode). Use the navigation arrow in the top left corner to
change between the windows. docking 5.2.3
slave 1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8

Compressor Marking frame

Slave: Here you select for which heat pump the docking
setting is to be made.
Compressor: Select if the compressor in the heat pump is
blocked (factory setting), or standard (docked for example to
pool heating, hot water charging and heating the building).
Marking frame: Move around the marking frame using the
control knob. Use the OK button to select what you want to
change and to confirm setting in the options box that appears to
the right.
Workspace for docking: The system docking is drawn
here.

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Symbol Description Menu 5.3 - accessory settings


Compressor (blocked) The operating settings for accessories that are installed and
activated are made in the sub-menus for this.
Menu 5.3.2 - shunt controlled add. Heat
Compressor (standard)
prioritised additional heat
Setting range: on/off
Reversing valves for hot water, cooling. Factory setting: off
The designations above the reversing valve start diff additional heat
indicate where it is electrically connected
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM
(EB101 = Slave 1, etc.).
Default values: 400 GM
Hot water charging minimum running time
Setting range: 0 – 48 h
Default value: 12 h
Heating (heating the building, includes any
extra climate system) min temp.
Setting range: 5 – 90 °C
Cooling Default value: 55 °C
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 –10.0
Menu 5.2.4 - accessories Default value: 1.0
Set which accessories are installed on the installation here. mixing valve step delay
If the water heater is connected, hot water charging must be Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated here. Default values: 30 s
Set when the addition is to start, the minimum run time and the
minimum temperature for external addition with shunt here.
External addition with shunt is for example a wood/oil/gas/
pellet boiler.
You can set shunt valve amplification and shunt valve waiting
time.
Selecting "prioritised additional heat" uses the heat from the
external additional heat instead of the heat pump.
The shunt valve is regulated as long as heat is available,
otherwise the shunt valve is closed.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.3 - extra climate system
use in heating mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: on
use in cooling mode
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
mixing valve amplifier
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
Default value: 1.0
mixing valve step delay
Setting range: 10 – 300 s
Default values: 30 s
Here you select which climate system (2 - 8) you wish to set.
In the next menu you can make settings for the climate system

57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

that you have selected. If this function is activated, you can set Default value: 55 °C
"cooling flow temp. at +20°C" and "cooling flow temp. at mixing valve amplifier
+40°C" for each climate system where the function is
Setting range: 0.1 – 10.0
activated.
Default value: 1.0
CAUTION mixing valve step delay
This setting option only appears if "cooling permitted" is Setting range: 10 – 300 s
activated in menu 5.11.1.1. Default values: 30 s
Make settings for the hot water comfort here.
The shunt amplification and shunt waiting time for the different See the accessory installation instructions for function
extra climate systems that are installed are also set here. description.
See the accessory installation instructions for function activating imm heater: The immersion heater is activated
description. here if installed in the water heater.
Menu 5.3.6 - step controlled add. heat activ. imm heat in heat mode: Activate here whether the
immersion heater in the tank (required if the alternative above
start addition
is activated) will be permitted to charge hot water, if the
Setting range: 0 – 2000 GM compressors in the heat pump prioritise heating.
Default values: 400 GM
activating the mixing valve: Activate here whether a mixer
diff. between additional steps valve for limiting the temperature of hot water from the water
Setting range: 0 – 1000 GM heater is installed.
Default values: 30 GM If this alternative has been activated, you can set the outgoing
max step hot water temperature, shunt amplification and shunt waiting
Setting range time for the mixer valve.
(binary stepping deactivated): 0 – 3 outgoing hot water: Set the temperature at which the
Setting range mixing valve is to restrict hot water from the water heater.
(binary stepping activated): 0 – 7 See the accessory installation instructions for function
Default value: 3 description.
binary stepping
Menu 5.3.20 - flow sensor
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off flow sensor 5.3.20

Make settings for step controlled addition here. Step controlled


addition is for example an external electric boiler.
It is possible, for example, to select when the additional heat is
to start, to set the maximum number of permitted steps and
whether binary stepping is to be used. flow sensor EMK 500
When binary stepping is deactivated (off), the settings refer to
linear stepping.
See the accessory installation instructions for function
description.
Menu 5.3.8 - hot water comfort
flow sensor
activating imm heater
Setting option: EMK 500, EMK 310 / 300, EMK 150
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: EMK 500
Factory setting: off
Here you select which flow sensor is used for the energy
activ. imm heat in heat mode measurement.
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
activating the mixing valve
Setting range: on/off
Factory setting: off
outgoing hot water
Setting range: 40 – 65 °C

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.4 – soft in/outputs Menu 5.9 - floor drying function


You can set the function of in/output for each terminal (AUX1- length of period 1 – 7
6 and output). Setting range: 0 – 30 days
Position of the terminal depends on the type of controller. Factory setting, period 1 – 3, 5 – 7: 2 days
RC-HY20: port 11-18 on X2 terminal (AUX1-6), X4 terminal Factory setting, period 4: 3 days
on AA2 board (output) temp. period 1 – 7
RC-HY40: port 9-14 on terminal X6 and port 1-4 on X2 Setting range: 15 – 70 °C
terminal on AA3 board (AUX1-6), X7 terminal on AA3 board Default value:
(output) temp. period 1 20 °C
temp. period 2 30 °C
Menu 5.5 - factory setting service
temp. period 3 40 °C
All settings can be reset (including settings available to the temp. period 4 45 C
user) to default values here. temp. period 5 40 °C
temp. period 6 30 °C
NOTE temp. period 7 20 °C
When resetting, the start guide is displayed the next time Set the function for under floor drying here.
the control module is restarted.
You can set up to seven period times with different calculated
flow temperatures. If less than seven periods
Menu 5.6 - forced control are to be used, set the remaining period times to 0 days.
You can force control the different components in the control Mark the active window to activate the underfloor drying
module and any connected accessories here. function. A counter at the bottom shows the number of days the
function has been active.
Menu 5.7 - start guide
When the control module is started for the first time the start TIP
guide starts automatically. Start it manually here.
If operating mode "add. heat only" is to be used, select it in
See page 25 for more information about the start guide. menu 4.2.
Menu 5.8 - quick start
It is possible to start the compressor from here. Menu 5.10 - change log
Read off any previous changes to the control system here.
CAUTION The date, time and ID no. (unique to certain settings) and the
There must be a heating or hot water demand to start the new set value is shown for every change.
compressor.
NOTE
CAUTION The change log is saved at restart and remains unchanged
after factory setting.
Do not quick start the compressor too many times over a
short period of time as this may damage the compressor
and its surrounding equipment.

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Control

Menu 5.11 - heat pump settings Speed in standby mode (only used if "auto" has been selected
Settings for installed heat pump can be made in the submenus. for "Operating mode") means the charge pump operates at the
set speed during the time when there is neither a need for
Menu 5.11.1 - EB101 - EB108 compressor operation nor additional heat.
Make settings specifically for the installed heat pump and 5.12 - country
charge pump here.
Select here where the product was installed. This allows access
For RC-HY40, it is possible to connect up to 8 heat pumps.
to country specific settings in your product.
Menu 5.11.1.1 - heat pump Language settings can be made regardless of this selection.
Make settings for the installed heat pump here. To see what
settings you can make, see installation manual for the heat NOTE
pump. This option locks after 24 hours, restart of display or
program updating.
Menu 5.11.1.2 - charge pump (GP12)
op. mode
Heating/cooling
Setting range: auto / intermittent
Default value: auto
Set the operating mode for the charge pump here.
auto: The charge pump runs according to the current operating
mode for SMO 20.
intermittent: The charge pump starts and stops 20 seconds
before and after the compressor in the heat pump.
speed during operation heating, hot water,
cooling
Setting range: auto / manual
Default value: auto
Manual setting
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 70 %
speed in wait mode
Setting range: 1 – 100 %
Default values: 30 %
max. allowed speed
Setting range: 80 – 100 %
Default values: 100 %
Set the speed at which the charge pump is to operate in the
present operating mode. Select "auto" if the speed of the charge
pump is to be regulated automatically (factory setting) for
optimal operation.
If "auto" is activated for heating operation, you can also make
the setting "max. allowed speed" which restricts the charge
pump and does not allow it to run at a higher speed than the set
value.
For manual operation of the charge pump deactivate "auto" for
the current operating mode and set the value to between 1 and
100 % (the previously set value for "max. allowed speed" no
longer applies).

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

External additional heat is active if it is connected to the


Service emergency mode relay (K1, terminal block X1).
Service actions Ensure that the heating medium circulates through the external
additional heat.
NOTE
Temperature sensor data
Servicing should only be carried out by persons with the
necessary expertise. Temperature Resistance Voltage
When replacing components on the system, only genuine (°C) (kOhm) (VDC)
replacement parts may be used.
-40 351.0 3.256
-35 251.6 3.240
NOTE -30 182.5 3.218
If an electrical connection has been disconnected and is -25 133.8 3.189
connected, ground must be checked using a suitable -20 99.22 3.150
multimeter.
-15 74.32 3.105
Maintenance -10 56.20 3.047
-5 42.89 2.976
General inspection 0 33.02 2.889
Check the following: 5 25.61 2.789
1. Condition of casing. 10 20.02 2.673
15 15.77 2.541
2. Electrical connections.
20 12.51 2.399
3. Alarm log. 25 10.00 2.245
Correct any fault before continuing. 30 8.045 2.083
35 6.514 1.916
Climate system
40 5.306 1.752
Check the following: 45 4.348 1.587
1. Climate system start and stop temperature. 50 3.583 1.426
2. Heating curve settings. 55 2.968 1.278
3. Function of the room sensor (if installed). 60 2.467 1.136
65 2.068 1.007
4. System pressure.
70 1.739 0.891
5. Flow and return temperature. The difference must be 5-10 °C. 75 1.469 0.785
Correct any fault before continuing. 80 1.246 0.691
85 1.061 0.607
Emergency mode 90 0.908 0.533
95 0.779 0.469
NOTE 100 0.672 0.414
Switch (SF1) must not be put into mode " " or before the
installation is filled with water.
The compressor in the heat pump can be damaged.

Emergency mode is used in event of operational interference


and in conjunction with service. Hot water is not produced in
emergency mode.
Emergency mode is activated by setting switch (SF1) in mode
" ". This means that:
■ The status lamp illuminates yellow.
■ The display is not lit and the control computer is not
connected.
■ Hot water is not produced.
■ The compressors are switched off. Charge pump (EB101-
GP12) is running.
■ The heating medium pump is active.
■ The emergency mode relay (K1) is active.

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

USB service outlet Menu 7.1 - update firmware


update firmware 7.1

start updating

choose another file

This allows you to update the software in RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
For the following functions to work the USB memory must
contain files with software for RC-HY20/40.

This information states which product the software is intended


for, the software version and general information about them.
RC-HY20/40 is equipped with a USB socket in the display If you wish to select another file than the one selected, the
unit. This USB socket can be used to connect a USB memory correct file can be selected by "choose another file".
to update the software, save logged information and handle the start updating
settings in RC-HY20/40. Select “start updating" if you want to start the update.
You are asked whether you really want to update the software.
USB 7 Respond "yes" to continue or "no" to undo.
If you responded"yes" to the previous question the update
starts and you can now follow the progress of the update on the
display. When the update is complete RC-HY20/40 restarts.
update firmware

logging NOTE
manage settings A software update does not reset the menu settings in
RC-HY20/40.

NOTE
If the update is interrupted before it is complete (for
When a USB memory is connected a new menu (menu 7) example power cut etc.) the software can be reset to the
appears in the display. previous version if the OK button is kept pressing during
start up until the green lamp starts to illuminate (takes
about 10 seconds).

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service

choose another file Menu 7.3 - manage settings


update firmware 7.1 manage settings 7.3

save settings

recover settings

Select “choose another file" if you do not want to use the


Here you can manage (save as or retrieve from) all the menu
suggested software. When you scroll through the files,
settings (user and service menus) in RC-HY20/40 with a USB
information about the marked software is shown in a fact box
memory.
just as before. When you have selected a file with the OK
button you will return to the previous page (menu 7.1) where Via "save settings" you save the menu settings to the USB
you can choose to start the update. memory in order to restore them later or to copy the settings to
another RC-HY20/40.
Menu 7.2 - logging
NOTE
logging 7.2
When you save the menu settings to the USB memory you
replace any previously saved settings
on the USB memory.

activated Via "recover settings" you reset all menu settings from the
interval 5 sec
USB memory.

NOTE
Reset of the menu settings from the USB memory cannot be
undone.

Setting range: 1 s – 60 min


Factory setting range: 5 s
You can set the interval of the log data storage and start saving
the log data on the USB memory.
1. Set the desired interval between loggings.
2. Tick “activated".
3. The present values from RC-HY20/40 are saved in a file in
the USB memory at the set interval until “activated" is
unticked.

NOTE
Untick "activated" before removing the USB memory.
Menu 7.3 - manage settings

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Disturbance in comfort Troubleshooting


In most cases, the control module notes a malfunction and
If the operational interference is not shown in the display the
indicates this with alarms and shows instructions to rectify it in
following tips can be used:
the display. See "Manage alarm" for in- formation about
managing alarms. If the malfunction does not appear in the Basic actions
d i s p l a y, o r i f t h e d i s p l a y i s n o t l i t , t h e f o l l o w i n g Start by checking the following possible fault sources:
troubleshooting guide can be used.
■ The switch's (SF1) position.
■ Group and main fuses of the accommodation.
Manage alarm ■ The property's earth circuit breaker.
■ The control module's miniature circuit breaker (FA1).
Low pressure alarm
Low hot water temperature or a lack of
hot water
alarm
This part of the fault-tracing chapter only applies if the water
heater is installed in the system.
info / action

reset alarm ■ Closed or choked filling valve for the hot water heater.
aid mode – Open the valve.
■ Mixing valve (if there is one installed) set too low.
– Adjust the mixer valve.
In the event of an alarm, some kind of malfunction has
■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
occurred, which is indicated by the status lamp changing from
green continuously to red continuously. In addition, an alarm – If mode "manual" is selected, select "addition".
bell appears in the information window. ■ Large hot water consumption.
Alarm – Wait until the hot water has heated up. Temporarily
increased hot water capacity (temporary lux) can be
In the event of an alarm with a red status lamp a malfunction
activated in menu 2.1.
has occurred that the heat pump and/or control module cannot
remedy itself. In the display, by turning the control knob and ■ Too low hot water setting.
pressing the OK button, you can see the type of alarm it is and – Enter menu 2.2 and select a higher comfort mode.
reset it. You can also choose to set the installation to aid mode. ■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of hot water.
info / action Here you can read what the alarm means and – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when hot
receive tips on what you can do to correct the problem that water is to be prioritised.
caused the alarm.
Low room temperature
reset alarm In most cases it is enough to select "reset alarm"
to correct the problem that caused the alarm. If a green light ■ Closed thermostats in several rooms.
illuminates after selecting "reset alarm" the alarm has been – Set the thermostats to max, in as many rooms as possible.
remedied. If a red light is still visible and a menu called Adjust the room temperature via menu 1.1, instead of
”alarm” is visible in the display, the problem that caused the choking the thermostats.
alarm remains. If the alarm disappears and then returns, see the ■ Control module in incorrect operating mode.
troubleshooting section (page 64 and 65).
– Enter menu 4.2. If mode "auto" is selected, select a higher
aid mode ”aid mode” is a type of emergency mode. This value on "stop heating" in menu 4.9.2.
means that the installation produces heat and/or hot water
– If mode "manual" is selected, select "heating". If this is
despite there being some kind of problem. This can mean that
not enough, select "addition".
the heat pump's compressor is not running. In this case any
electrical addition produces heat and/or hot water. ■ Too low set value on the automatic heating control.
– Enter menu 1.1 "temperature" and adjust the offset
NOTE heating curve up. If the room temperature is only low in
To select aid mode an alarm action must be selected in the cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
menu 5.1.4. curve" needs adjusting up.
■ Too low or no operating prioritisation of heat.
CAUTION – Enter menu 4.9.1 and increase the time for when heating
is to be prioritised.
Selecting "aid mode” is not the same as correcting the
problem that caused the alarm. The status lamp will ■ "Holiday mode" activated in menu 4.7.
therefore continue to be red. – Enter menu 4.7 and select "Off".

64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

■ External switch for changing the room heating activ- ated. Additional heating only
– Check any external switches.
If you are unsuccessful in rectifying the fault and are unable to
■ Air in the climate system.
heat the house, you can, whilst waiting for assistance, continue
– Vent the climate system. running the heat pump in ”add. heat only”. This means that
■ Closed valves to the climate system. additional heating only is used to heat the house.
– Open the valves. Set the installation to additional heat
■ Incorrectly adjusted flow across the heat pump. mode
– Check whether alarm high condenser in (163) or high 1. Go to menu 4.2 op. mode.
condenser out (162) is in the alarm log. Follow the 2. Mark ”add. heat only” using the control knob and then press
instructions for adjusting charge flow. OK button.
High room temperature Return to the main menus by pressing the Back button.
■ Too high set value on the automatic heating control.
CAUTION
– Enter menu 1.1 (temperature) and reduce the offset
When commissioning without MTH air/water heat pump an
heating curve. If the room temperature is only high in alarm communication error may appear in the display.
cold weather the curve slope in menu 1.9.1 "heating
The alarm is reset if the relevant heat pump is deactivated
curve" needs adjusting down. in menu 5.2.2 ("installed heat pump").
■ External switch for changing the room heating activated.
– Check any external switches.
Low system pressure
■ Not enough water in the climate system.
– Top up the water in the climate system.
The compressor does not start
■ There is no heating requirement.
– The heat pump does not call on heating nor hot water.
■ Temperature conditions tripped.
– Wait until the temperature condition has been re- set.
■ Minimum time between compressor starts has not been
reached.
– Wait 30 minutes and check if the compressor has started.
■ Alarm tripped.
– Follow the display instructions.

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm list

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

157 Low lp cooling Protection against freezing in water HX during ■ Low/no water flow
cooling operation

162 High condenser out Too high temperature out from the condenser. ■ Low flow during heating operation
temperature Self-resetting. ■ Too high set temperatures

163 High condenser in Too high temperature into the condenser. ■ Temperature generated by another heat source
temperature Self-resetting.

183 Defrosting in progress Not an alarm, but an operating status. ■ Set when the heat pump runs the defrosting
procedure

220 High pressure alarm BP4 has been above 4,15MPa 5 times within 60 ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
minutes. exchanger
■ Expansion valve not correctly connected
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Low or no flow during heating operation
■ Defective circulation pump
■ Defective fuse, F(4A)

221 Low pressure alarm Tool low value on the low pressure semsor 3 ■ Open circuit or short circuit on input for low
times within 60 minutes pressure sensor
■ Defective low pressure sensor
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Open circuit or short circuit on input for
suction gas sensor (Tho-S)
■ Defective suction gas sensor (Tho-S)

223 Com. flt from the heat Communication between the control board and ■ Any circuit breakers for FDCW off
pump the communication board is interrupted. There ■ Incorrect cable routing
must

224 Fan alarm from heat Deviations in the fan speed in FDCW. ■ The fan cannot rotate freely
pump ■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Defective fan motor
■ Control board in FDCW dirty
■ Fuse (F2) blown

228 Failed defrosting 10 aborted defrost due to alarm: 418,419 or 343 ■ Too low water flow
■ Too low return temperatur

230 Hot gas alarm Temperature deviation on the hot gas sensor ■ Sensor does not work (see section "Ambient
(Tho-D) twice within 60 minutes or for 60 temperature sensor")
minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or heat exchanger
■ Blocked
■ If the fault persists during cooling, there may
be an insufficient amount of refrigerant.
■ Defective control board in FDCW

66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

261 High HWX temp Temperature deviation on the heat exchanger ■ Sensor does not work (see section
sensor (Tho-R1/R2) five times within 60 "Disturbances in comfort")
minutes or for 60 minutes continuously. ■ Insufficient air circulation or blocked heat
exchanger
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Too much refrigerant

262 Inv. err. When IPM (Intelligent power module) displays Can occur when 15V power supply to the
FO-signal (Fault Output) five times during a inverter PCB is unstable.
60-minute period.

263 Inv. err. Voltage from the inverter outside the parameters ■ Incoming power supply interference
four times within 30 minutes. ■ Service valve closed
■ Insufficient amount of refrigerant
■ Compressor fault
■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

264 Communication error Communication between circuit board for ■ Open circuit in connection between boards
with inverter. inverter and control board broken. ■ Defective low pressure sensor
■ Defective circuit board for inverter in FDCW
■ Defective control board in FDCW

265 Inv. err. Continuous deviation on power transistor for 15 ■ Defective fan motor
minutes. ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW

266 Low refrig Insufficient refrigerant is detected upon star-up ■ Service valve closed
cooling mode. ■ Loose connection sensor (BT15, BT3)
■ Defective sensor (BT15, BT13)
■ Too little refrigerant

267 Inv. err. Failed start for compressor ■ Defective circuit board in FDCW
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Compressor fault

268 Inv. err. Overcurrent, Inverter A/F module ■ Sudden power failure

271 Lw otd tmp Temperature of BT28 below the value that ■ Cold weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

272 High otd tmp Temperature of BT28 above the value that ■ Warm weather conditions
permits operation ■ Sensor fault

277 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, heat exchanger in FDCW(Tho-R). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

278 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, outdoor temperature sensor in ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump FDCW (Tho-A). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Disturbance in comfort

Alarm Alarm text on the


Description May be due to
nr. display

279 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, hot gas in FDCW (Tho-D). ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board in FDCW

280 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, suction gas in FDCW (Tho-S) ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW

281 Sensor fault from heat Sensor fault, low pressure transmitter in FDCW. ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
pump ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Service valve closed
■ Defective control board in FDCW
■ Fault in the refrigerant circuit

294 Incompatible heat pump Heat pump and indoor module do not work ■ Outdoor module and indoor module are not
properly together due to technical parameters. compatible.

343 Low temp water out Low water out temperature during cooling or ■ Too low water flow
tank defrost operation ■ Too low return temperatur

347 Temp high press Temporary high pressure alarm ■ No/low water flow
■ Air in water system

403 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor incoming water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT3). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

404 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor high pressure heating/ ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 low pressure cooling in indoor unit (BP4). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

412 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor outgoing water in indoor ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 unit (BT12). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

415 Sensor fault from PCA Sensor fault, Sensor fluid pipe in indoor unit ■ Open circuit or short circuit on sensor input
154 (BT15). ■ Sensor does not work (see section
"Disturbances in comfort")
■ Defective control board AA23 in indoor unit.

418 Low temp water out Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water flow
during defrost.

419 Freeze prot. exch. defr. Anti-freeze protection water heat exchanger ■ Too low water return temperature
during defrost.

68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Accessories

Anode M300
Accessories
Part no. MCD291A026
EMK300M
Anode M500
Part no. MCD291A013
Part no. MCD291A027
EMK500M
Part no. MCD291A014
Charge pump CPD 11
Charge pump for heat pump
CPD 11-25M/65
Part no. MCD291A016
CPD 11-25M/75
Part no. MCD291A017
External electric additional heat ELK
These accessories may require accessories card AXC 30 (step
controlled addition).
ELK 9M
Immersion heater
9 kW 3 x 400 V
Part no. MCD291A015
Hot water control
VST 05M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø22
Max heat pump size 8 kW
Part no. MCD291A018
VST 11M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø28
(Max recommended output, 17 kW)
Part no. MCD291A019
VST 20M
Reversing valve, Cu pipe Ø35
(Max recommended output, 40 kW)
Part no. MCD291A020
Reversing valve for cooling
VCC 05M
Part no. MCD291A021
VCC 11M
Part no. MCD291A022
Electrical model
MEL 1030M
Part no. MCD291A023
Anode
Anode for tank
Anode T300
Part no. MCD291A024
Anode T500
Part no. MCD291A025

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Technical data
Dimensions and setting-out coordinates

110

10
70 215

360

35
310
410

RC-HY 40
110

70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

Electrical circuit diagram

HSB140

71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


72
RC-HY20
Technical data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
INDOOR
UNIT

Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire


located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

73
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


76
RC-HY40
Technical data

INDOOR INDOOR
UNIT UNIT
(HSB) (HSB)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: Meaning of /.3B is that this wire is connected to a wire
located at 3B on same page.
3 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
sheet 1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Note: Meaning of /3.6B means this wire is connected to a wire
located at 6B on sheet 3.
3 means a value of sheet number.
6 means a value of horizontal axis.
B means a value of vertical axis.
Technical data

77
sheet 2
Technical data

sheet 3

78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 4

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 5

INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT
INDOOR

(HSB)
UNIT

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Technical data

sheet 6

81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES THERMAL SYSTEMS, LTD.
16-5 Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-8215, Japan
http://www.mhi-mth.co.jp/

MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES AIR-CONDITIONING EUROPE, LTD.


5 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, United Kingdom
Tel: +44-333-207-4072
Fax: +44-333-207-4089
http://www.mhiae.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like